s Preface, Contents SIMATIC IT Services 1 Text Editor 2 Hot Backup 3 Tag Management 4 Real Time Data Server 5 The SIMATIC IT OPC Browser 6

SIMATIC IT Production Suite V5.1 and SIMATIC IT Historian V6.0 SP2

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 User Manual

Edition 01/2005

Guidelines

This manual contains notices intended to protect the products and connected equipment against damage. These notices are graded according to severity by the following texts:

Caution indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Notice draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particular part of the documentation.

Trademarks

SIMATIC® is a registered trademark of SIEMENS AG.

Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005 All rights reserved The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. Siemens AG Bereich Automation and Drives

Disclaimer of Liability We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.

Geschaeftsgebiet Industrial Automation Systems Postfach 4848, D- 90327 Nuernberg

©Siemens AG 2005 Technical data subject to change.

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Preface

Purpose of the Manual This manual gives you a complete overview of iusign SIMATIC IT Services. This manual is intended for those responsible for configuring, commissioning, and administering automation systems. After installing SIMATIC IT Services, we recommend you get acquainted with the SIMATIC IT Production Suite environment by reading the Getting Started manual. It offers you an easy start in implementing a sample MES application.

Required Basic Knowledge In order to understand the technical language used in this manual and comprehend the information contained herein, readers must have the following basic requirements:

• General knowledge in the field of automation engineering. The manual contains references to this area’s commonplace terms, concepts and related IT environments.

In addition, you should know how to use computers or devices with similar functions (e.g programming devices) under Windows 2000 or XP operating systems.

Where is this Manual valid? This manual is valid for the software packages SIMATIC IT Production Suite V5.0 SP3 and SIMATIC IT Historian 6.0 SP1.

Readme Installation includes a Readme file, which contains information on upgrade procedures and compatibility with previous releases. This file is supplied both in standard text (Readme.txt) and in Acrobat PDF (Readme.pdf) format.

This file is available in folder \ReleaseNotes of the Setup CD-ROM and is installed in folder \setup_path\DATA\ReleaseNotes

Online Help The manual is complemented by an online help which is integrated in the software.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual iii

Preface

This online help is intended to provide you with detailed support when using the software.

The help system is integrated in the software via a number of interfaces:

• The Contents and Index command from the Help menu opens the online help window, from which you can choose the topic of interest. You can search for the desired information, using the Table of Contents or the Index

• The context-sensitive help offers information on the current context, for example, an open dialog box or an active window. You can open the context-sensitive help by clicking the Help button or by pressing F1.

• The status bar offers another form of context-sensitive help. It displays a short explanation for each menu command when the mouse pointer is positioned on the menu command.

• A brief explanation (tooltip) is also displayed for each icon in the toolbar when the mouse pointer is positioned on the icon for a short time.

Related Documentation The following documents contain information related to the contents of this manual.

All these documents are available online from the Start > Programs > SIMATIC IT Online Documentation shortcut.

• SIMATIC IT Production Suite Getting Started, addressed to novice users, guides you step by step in the creation of a complete sample MES application.

• SIMATIC IT Services Online Help, addressed to novice users, describes SIMATIC IT Services basics and working environment.

• SIMATIC IT Services Installation Manual, provides a complete overview of installing and configuring SIMATIC IT Services.

Finding Your Way This manual is sub-divided into the following topics:

• Chapter “SIMATIC IT Services” This chapter provides an introduction to the Services environment and a description of the initial steps in using the Services functionality.

• Chapter “Text Editor”, This chapter describes the functions available for using text editor to create text files of different types, such as .txt files, iter source files (.src, .inc) and server configuration files (.csv)

• Chapters “Hot Backup” In this chapter, there is a description of the various methods for providing backup modules in the event of a Plant or Primary Master Workstation becoming unavailable.

• Chapters “Tag Management” This chapter provides you with a description of the Points database, also called the data dictionary, for managing com logical units.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual iv

Preface

• Chapter “Real Time Data Server” This chapter provides a description of how to manage and manipulate RTDS in order to build up a bridge between SIMATIC IT components and field devices.

• Chapter “The SIMATIC IT OPC Browser” In this chapter, you are provided with a description of how to use the SIMATIC IT OPC Browser from the Management Console.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual v

Preface

Conventions Throughout this manual, specific typographic conventions have been used and are described below:

symbol/convention indicates

E.g. Points where examples are given.

Text in boldtype The names of menus, commands, dialog boxes and toolbar buttons and, in general, all strings (e.g. File menu; Save command).

KEY1+KEY2 Accelerator or shortcut keys, which permit rapid access to commands (e.g. CTRL+C).

UPPERCASE The names of keyboard keys (e.g. RETURN key and toolbar buttons; PLANT button).

Italics The names of parameters that must be replaced with a specific name or value. For example, filename indicates that the name of the file must be specified; input indicates that the corresponding value must be specified.

> A succession of commands in which the command preceding the symbol must be selected before the command following it.

SIMATIC IT Training Center Siemens A&D AS MES offers a number of training courses to familiarize you with the SIMATIC IT product suite. To successfully achieve this goal, training consists of lessons in both theory and practice.

Courses are held year-round, according to a program that is published well in advance of the first scheduled session.

The material on the basis of which our courses are conducted reflects the result of years of experience in process, LIMS and quality control and production management.

All courses are held by expert personnel that is aware of the developments and innovations in the Siemens A&D AS MES product suite.

Courses are held in English at the Siemens A&D AS MES Training Centers in Genoa, Italy and Ninove, Belgium.

Upon request, training courses can also be organized on the customer’s premises.

For more information on the training course calendar, please visit our Technical Web site (http://www.simaticit.com/ Support > Training).

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual vi

Preface

SIMATIC IT Service & Support A Software Maintenance program is provided with SIMATIC IT products.

Software Maintenance includes the following services:

• Software Update Service (SUS): automatic distribution of upgrades and service packs

• Technical Support Service (TSS): support on technical problems with SIMATIC IT software (Standard Support plus other services and optional services)

• Access to Online Support: a technical web site that includes information such as Frequently Asked Questions and technical documentation on SIMATIC IT products

Software Update Service (SUS) This service automatically distributes new versions and service packs when they are released. Typically, when a version becomes available, the installation CD is distributed within a month. For each server that is covered by Software Maintenance, one copy of the installation CD is shipped.

Hot fixes (officially tested and released) are not shipped and can only be downloaded from the Online Support.

Software Update Service is related to the licenses for the SIMATIC IT product purchased by the customer.

Software Update Service is available at no cost for one year after having purchased the software licenses. Upon expiration of this initial one-year period, SUS is included in the end-customer Maintenance Agreement, together with product support.

Technical Support Service (TSS) SIEMENS has a dedicated technical support team for SIMATIC IT products.

Siemens A&D AS MES offers various support services, plus optional services. Those entitled to Standard support are:

• SIMATIC IT Partners;

• Customers who have purchased a SIMATIC IT license for a server product within the last 12 months (in this case, Standard support is related solely to that particular software license and its options);

• Customers who have signed a Maintenance Agreement with Siemens A&D AS MES for their plant; this Maintenance Agreement covers both product support and SUS for the SIMATIC IT licenses used in the project at the plant site.

Other services or optional services will be available only as part of a Maintenance Agreement.

To be able to access TSS, you need to register as a user at the Technical Support Web site: https://tss.simaticit.com

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual vii

Preface

Complete the registration form with:

• Your personal data

• Company and plant information

• The registration number that is provided together with the licenses by the Siemens Licenses office.

The Technical Support Web site provides the following information:

• Service conditions

• Phone numbers

• Working hours

• Reaction times

Online Support Any customer who is a registered TSS user can access the Technical Support Web site (https://tss.simaticit.com). The Technical Support Web contains technical information such as:

• SIMATIC IT knowledge base: a technical support database that includes practical service solutions from Technical Support or the SIMATIC IT community

• SIMATIC IT software (e.g. hot fixes, software examples) and release notes that can be downloaded

• SIMATIC IT Cross-Industry libraries that can be downloaded (limited access to SIMATIC IT Certified Partners)

• SIMATIC IT Product Documentation that can be downloaded

• Frequently Asked Questions and useful tips.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual viii

Table of Contents

1 SIMATIC IT Services 13 1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 13 1.1.1 SIMATIC IT Services .........................................................................................13 1.1.2 Starting SIMATIC IT Services ............................................................................13 1.1.3 Quitting SIMATIC IT Services ............................................................................14 1.2 Getting Started................................................................................................... 14 1.2.1 When SIMATIC IT Services is started for the first time .....................................14 1.2.2 Stand Alone Configuration .................................................................................15 1.2.3 Client-Server Configuration................................................................................16 1.2.4 Client-Server Backup Configuration ..................................................................16 1.2.5 Parameters for system configuration .................................................................17 1.3 Environment ....................................................................................................... 17 1.3.1 SIMATIC IT Services environment.....................................................................17 1.3.2 Plant Management.............................................................................................18 1.3.3 What can I do from Plant Management ? ..........................................................18 1.3.4 Management Console........................................................................................18 1.3.5 ZME Zone Monitoring Environment ...................................................................19 1.3.6 What is a Zone?.................................................................................................20 1.3.7 Defining a Zone..................................................................................................20 1.3.8 Configuring the default Zone..............................................................................20 1.3.9 Removing a Zone...............................................................................................21 1.3.10 Starting the Zone Monitoring Environment ........................................................21 1.4 Working area...................................................................................................... 21 1.4.1 The Zone Monitoring Environment working area...............................................21 1.4.2 Displaying AMD, HDD and GUI windows ..........................................................22 1.4.3 Configuring the file display options ....................................................................22 1.4.4 Arranging windows in the working area .............................................................22 1.4.5 Saving the working area settings.......................................................................22 1.5 Alarm Manager Display...................................................................................... 23 1.5.1 Starting SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager Display from Zone Monitoring Environment23 1.5.2 Creating an AMD file..........................................................................................23 1.5.3 Opening an ADD file ..........................................................................................23 1.5.4 Configuring the connection to the Alarm Manager server .................................24 1.6 Historian Data Display ....................................................................................... 24 1.6.1 Starting SIMATIC IT Historian Data Display from Zone Monitoring Environment24 1.6.2 Creating a Historian Data Display file ................................................................24 1.6.3 Opening a Historian Data Display file ................................................................25 1.7 Working with Projects ........................................................................................ 25 1.7.1 The Project.........................................................................................................25 1.7.2 Creating a new Project.......................................................................................26 1.7.3 Viewing the Projects ..........................................................................................26 1.7.4 Removing a Project............................................................................................26 1.7.5 Renaming a Project ...........................................................................................26 1.7.6 Copying a Project...............................................................................................27 1.8 Programming environments............................................................................... 27 1.8.1 SIMATIC IT Programming Environments ..........................................................27 1.8.2 Control Programming Environment ...................................................................27 1.8.3 Configuring the programming mode of a Unit....................................................28 1.8.4 Running PDE from a CONTROL Unit ................................................................28 1.8.5 Running PDE from an RTDS/IMC User Unit .....................................................29 1.8.6 Running PDE from a Project..............................................................................29 1.8.7 Data manipulation and aggregation...................................................................30 1.8.8 Starting the SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Engine Manager ...............................30 1.8.9 API Environment ................................................................................................31 1.8.10 Configuring IMC .................................................................................................31 1.8.11 Starting IMC .......................................................................................................31 1.8.12 Debugging a program ........................................................................................32

1.8.13 Dumping/restoring a control panel .....................................................................32 1.8.14 Transmitting a program to the controller............................................................33 1.9 Graphic User Interface....................................................................................... 33 1.9.1 Starting SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface from Zone Monitoring Environment33 1.9.2 Creating a graphic panel....................................................................................33 1.9.3 Opening a graphic panel....................................................................................34 1.9.4 Compiling a graphic panel .................................................................................34 1.9.5 Compiling multiple graphic panels .....................................................................34 1.9.6 Configuring SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface Development .........................35 1.9.7 Showing/hiding the grid and defining the step ...................................................35 1.9.8 Enabling/disabling the snap and defining the step ............................................36 1.9.9 Defining the SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface page configuration................36 1.9.10 Defining the maximum number of objects and points........................................36 1.9.11 Defining the maximum number of graphic panels that can be displayed at the same time 37 1.9.12 Locking objects in the panel...............................................................................37 1.9.13 Logging all operator actions by default ..............................................................37 1.9.14 Configuring Dynamic Link Libraries (DLLs) .......................................................38 1.9.15 Configuring the source files backup...................................................................38 1.10 Miscellaneous elements of SIMATIC IT Services.............................................. 38 1.10.1 System Toolbox .................................................................................................38 1.10.2 Enabling the System Toolbox at startup ............................................................39 1.10.3 Management Console Tasklist...........................................................................39 1.10.4 System Information ............................................................................................40 1.11 User Management ............................................................................................. 41 1.11.1 Logging on to SIMATIC IT .................................................................................41 1.11.2 Configuring automatic logoff ..............................................................................42 1.11.3 Predefined logon users ......................................................................................42 1.11.4 Defining the automatic logon user .....................................................................42 1.11.5 Logging on to SIMATIC IT with a user other than "Default" ..............................43 1.11.6 Modifying the user password .............................................................................43 1.11.7 Allowing user password modification.................................................................43 1.11.8 Configuring the password expiry date ...............................................................44 1.12 User Manager tool ............................................................................................. 44 1.12.1 Overview of User Manager ................................................................................44 1.12.2 Filtering the contents..........................................................................................45 1.13 Working with groups .......................................................................................... 46 1.13.1 Groups ...............................................................................................................46 1.13.2 Resources of the Administrators group .............................................................46 1.13.3 Resources of the Developer group ....................................................................46 1.13.4 Resources of the High Level Operator group ....................................................47 1.13.5 Resources of the Low Level Operator group.....................................................47 1.13.6 Resources of the Maintenance Operator group.................................................47 1.13.7 Creating a group ................................................................................................47 1.13.8 Removing a group..............................................................................................48 1.13.9 Displaying the groups of a user .........................................................................48 1.14 Working with users............................................................................................. 49 1.14.1 Defining a user...................................................................................................49 1.14.2 Modifying the properties of a user......................................................................50 1.14.3 Removing a user................................................................................................50 1.14.4 Associating a user to a group ............................................................................50 1.14.5 Associating a user to a different group ..............................................................51 1.14.6 Locking a user....................................................................................................51 1.14.7 Rules for defining user-account options ............................................................51 1.14.8 Disabling a user account....................................................................................52 1.14.9 Displaying the users associated with a group....................................................53 1.15 Working with access levels ................................................................................ 53 1.15.1 Access levels .....................................................................................................53 1.15.2 Hierarchical access level ...................................................................................53 1.15.3 Exclusive access level .......................................................................................54 1.15.4 How to use access levels...................................................................................54 1.15.5 Configuring the access level for a resource.......................................................55 1.15.6 Load Graphic Panels - Access level ..................................................................55

1.15.7 Run SIMATIC IT Applications from GUI - Access level .....................................55 1.15.8 Set Variables from SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface - Access level.............56 1.15.9 Set Variables from Ladder, Block Editor, ODS - Access level...........................56 1.16 Working with resources...................................................................................... 56 1.16.1 SIMATIC IT resources .......................................................................................56 1.16.2 Assigning system resources to a group.............................................................59 1.16.3 Assigning local resources to a group.................................................................59 1.16.4 Displaying the resources of a group ..................................................................60 1.16.5 Modifying the resources assigned to a group ....................................................60 1.16.6 General Purpose resources ...............................................................................60 1.16.6.1 Access to Administrative Tools ..........................................................................60 1.16.6.2 Access to Help ...................................................................................................60 1.16.6.3 Access to License Configuration........................................................................61 1.16.6.4 Access to Operating System Shell ....................................................................61 1.16.6.5 System Configuration.........................................................................................61 1.16.6.6 Close Session ....................................................................................................61 1.16.6.7 Modify and Save Configurations........................................................................61 1.16.6.8 Modify Configurations (without Saving) .............................................................61 1.16.7 Historian resources ............................................................................................62 1.16.7.1 Alarm Acknowledgement ...................................................................................62 1.16.7.2 Alarm Configuration ...........................................................................................62 1.16.7.3 Enable GUI Menu Bar........................................................................................62 1.16.7.4 Historical Trends Configuration..........................................................................62 1.16.7.5 Load Graphic Panels .........................................................................................62 1.16.7.6 Print from Graphics, Alarm, Historical Environments.........................................62 1.16.7.7 Run Alarms ........................................................................................................62 1.16.7.8 Run SIMATIC IT Applications from GUI ............................................................62 1.16.7.9 Run Historical Trends ........................................................................................63 1.16.7.10 Run Messages from GUI ...................................................................................63 1.16.7.11 Run Applications from GUI ................................................................................63 1.16.7.12 Set Variables from GUI......................................................................................63 1.16.8 Production Modeler resources...........................................................................63 1.16.8.1 IfPMObserver .....................................................................................................63 1.16.8.2 IfPMSuperUser...................................................................................................63 1.16.8.3 IfPMUser ............................................................................................................63 1.16.8.4 IfPMEnd-User.....................................................................................................63 1.16.9 PM COM Interface resources ............................................................................64 1.16.9.1 PM COM Interface Show ...................................................................................64 1.16.9.2 PM COM Interface Exit ......................................................................................64 1.16.9.3 PM COM Interface Delete..................................................................................64 1.16.9.4 PM COM Interface Configure.............................................................................64 1.16.10 Business Process Modeler resources ...............................................................64 1.16.10.1 BPM Configuration Administrator ......................................................................64 1.16.10.2 BPM Remove Plants and Libraries....................................................................64 1.16.10.3 BPM Close Session...........................................................................................64 1.16.11 Material Manager resources ..............................................................................64 1.16.11.1 MM Model Configuration ...................................................................................64 1.16.11.2 MM Configuration Administrator ........................................................................65 1.16.11.3 MM Sublot Management ...................................................................................65 1.16.11.4 MM Hut Configuration........................................................................................65 1.16.11.5 MM Close Session.............................................................................................65 1.16.12 Messaging Manager resources..........................................................................65 1.16.12.1 Access to Messaging Manager Form................................................................65 1.16.13 Production Order Manager resources ...............................................................65 1.16.13.1 POM Order Dispatch .........................................................................................65 1.16.13.2 POM Order Management ..................................................................................66 1.16.13.3 POM In Progress Order Management...............................................................66 1.16.13.4 POM Configuration Administrator......................................................................66 1.16.13.5 POM Template Instantiation ..............................................................................66 1.16.13.6 POM Template Management ............................................................................66 1.16.13.7 POM State Machine Management ....................................................................66 1.16.13.8 POM Close Session ..........................................................................................66

1.16.14 Production Operation Recorder resources ........................................................67 1.16.14.1 POPR Backup Restore......................................................................................67 1.16.14.2 POPR Configuration Administrator....................................................................67 1.16.14.3 POPR Close Session ........................................................................................67 1.16.15 Personnel Manager resources...........................................................................67 1.16.15.1 PRM Common Data Configuration....................................................................67 1.16.15.2 PRM Low Level Operator ..................................................................................67 1.16.15.3 PRM Manager....................................................................................................67 1.16.15.4 PRM Person/Group Definition ...........................................................................67 1.16.15.5 PRM Work Schedule Definition .........................................................................67 1.16.16 Miscellaneous resources ...................................................................................68 1.16.16.1 Browse Source Files..........................................................................................68 1.16.16.2 CommuWinII - Specialist User...........................................................................68 1.16.16.3 Edit DB, User Libraries, Projects .......................................................................68 1.16.16.4 Hardware Configuration.....................................................................................68 1.16.16.5 Modify, Save, Compile Source Files .................................................................68 1.16.16.6 PMC Operations ................................................................................................68 1.16.16.7 Program Transmission ......................................................................................68 1.16.16.8 Run ODS ...........................................................................................................69 1.16.16.9 Set Variables from Ladder, Block Diagram, ODS .............................................69 1.16.16.10 Application Builder Runtime Widget ............................................................69 1.16.16.11 Batch Operator ............................................................................................69 1.16.16.12 Close Application Builder Runtime ..............................................................69 1.16.16.13 Set Variables from OPC Server ..................................................................69 1.17 Licensing ............................................................................................................ 69 1.17.1 Inserting SIMATIC IT license codes ..................................................................69 1.17.2 When you insert licenses for the first time .........................................................70 1.17.3 Inserting license codes from file.........................................................................70 1.17.4 Entering license codes manually .......................................................................70 1.18 Basic Configuration............................................................................................ 71 1.18.1 System configuration .........................................................................................71 1.18.2 Entering the System Configuration window.......................................................71 1.18.3 Workstation ........................................................................................................72 1.18.3.1 Configuring a SIMATIC IT workstation ..............................................................72 1.18.3.2 Enabling serial communications ........................................................................72 1.18.3.3 Defining the system language............................................................................72 1.18.4 Foundation servers ............................................................................................73 1.18.4.1 Configuring the Foundation servers...................................................................73 1.18.4.2 What happens if no Foundation servers are configured?..................................73 1.18.4.3 Removing a Foundation server..........................................................................74 1.18.5 Start-up configuration.........................................................................................74 1.18.5.1 Enabling SIMATIC IT stand-alone start-up ........................................................74 1.18.5.2 Starting SIMATIC IT Management Console ......................................................74 1.18.5.3 Starting SIMATIC IT applications from SIMATIC IT Management Console ......75 1.18.5.4 Minimizing SIMATIC IT Management Console..................................................75 1.18.5.5 Start order for SIMATIC IT Management Console components........................75 1.18.5.6 Starting SIMATIC IT components automatically ................................................76 1.18.5.7 Start Delay time .................................................................................................77 1.18.5.8 Configuring start-up parameters for SIMATIC IT components ..........................78 1.18.5.9 Alarm Manager Display: startup parameters .....................................................78 1.18.5.10 Real Time Data Engine: start-up parameters....................................................78 1.18.5.11 Graphic User Interface Run-Time: start-up parameters....................................79 1.18.5.12 Operations Data Display: start-up parameters ..................................................79 1.18.5.13 Historian Data Display: start-up parameters .....................................................79 1.18.5.14 Real Time Data Server: start-up parameters ....................................................79 1.18.5.15 Controlled shutdown..........................................................................................79 1.18.6 Working with Plants ...........................................................................................80 1.18.6.1 What is a Plant?.................................................................................................80 1.18.6.2 Creating a Plant .................................................................................................80 1.18.6.3 Opening a Plant .................................................................................................81 1.18.6.4 Copying a Plant..................................................................................................81 1.18.6.5 Renaming a Plant ..............................................................................................81

1.18.6.6 Removing a Plant...............................................................................................81 1.18.6.7 Closing a Plant ...................................................................................................82 1.18.6.8 Plant directory structure .....................................................................................82 1.18.6.9 APPLIC directory structure ................................................................................83 1.18.6.10 MMI directory structure......................................................................................83 1.18.6.11 ACTION.LOG directory structure.......................................................................83 1.18.6.12 ALARM.LOG directory structure........................................................................84 1.18.6.13 DATA.LOG directory structure...........................................................................84 1.18.6.14 EVENT.LOG directory structure ........................................................................84 1.18.6.15 Archiving ............................................................................................................84 1.18.6.16 Archiving a Plant............................................................................................................ 84 1.18.6.17 Archiving a Plant you are not logged on to .................................................................... 84 1.18.6.18 Creating a backup copy of a Plant................................................................................. 85 1.18.6.19 Selecting the files to be archived ................................................................................... 85 1.18.6.20 Selecting the Units to be archived ................................................................................. 86 1.18.6.21 Selecting the Zones to be archived ............................................................................... 86 1.18.6.22 Selecting the third-party applications to be archived ..................................................... 86 1.18.6.23 Checking the correctness of the backup copy ............................................................... 86 1.18.6.24 Creating a backup copy of a Plant automatically ........................................................... 87 1.18.6.25 Compiling the backup configuration file ......................................................................... 88 1.18.6.26 Displaying the contents of a backup file ........................................................................ 89 1.18.6.27 Sorting the files by user parameters .............................................................................. 89 1.18.6.28 Selecting the fields to be displayed ............................................................................... 89 1.18.6.29 Changing the width of table columns............................................................................. 90 1.18.6.30 Changing the type of character used in the table .......................................................... 90 1.18.6.31 Restoring ...........................................................................................................90 1.18.6.32 Restoring a Plant ........................................................................................................... 90 1.18.6.33 Selecting the files to be restored ................................................................................... 91 1.18.6.34 Selecting the Units to be restored.................................................................................. 91 1.18.6.35 Selecting the Zones to be restored................................................................................ 91 1.18.6.36 Selecting the third-party applications to be restored...................................................... 91 1.18.7 Working with Units .............................................................................................92 1.18.7.1 What is a Unit?...................................................................................................92 1.18.7.2 Configuring a Unit ..............................................................................................93 1.18.7.3 Modifying the Unit attributes ..............................................................................93 1.18.7.4 Duplicating a Unit ...............................................................................................94 1.18.7.5 Renaming a Unit ................................................................................................94 1.18.7.6 Removing a Unit ................................................................................................94 1.18.7.7 RTDS/IMC User Unit..........................................................................................94 1.18.7.8 Why use an RTDS/IMC User Unit? ................................................................................. 94 1.18.7.9 Configuring the RTDS/IMC User Unit .............................................................................. 95 1.18.7.10 Configuring the RTDS/IMC User Unit in programming mode ........................................ 95 1.18.7.11 Configuring the RTDS/IMC User Unit in supervisory mode ........................................... 95 1.18.7.12 Configuring the RTDS/IMC User Unit and the network device ...................................... 95 1.18.7.13 Parameters (Arcnet) ...................................................................................................... 96 1.18.7.14 Parameters (Session Manager)..................................................................................... 96 1.18.7.15 Session Manager...............................................................................................97 1.18.7.16 Why use a Session Manager Unit ? .............................................................................. 97 1.18.7.17 Configuring a Session Manager Unit ............................................................................. 97 1.18.7.18 ControlCORE Unit .............................................................................................97 1.18.7.19 Why use a ControlCORE Unit ? .................................................................................... 97 1.18.7.20 Configuring the ControlCORE Unit ................................................................................ 97 1.18.7.21 Configuring the ControlCORE Unit in programming mode ............................................ 97 1.18.7.22 Configuring the ControlCORE Unit in supervisory mode ............................................... 98 1.18.7.23 Configuring the ControlCORE Unit and the network device .......................................... 98 1.18.7.24 Remote CONTROL Unit ....................................................................................99 1.18.7.25 Why use a Remote Control Unit ? ................................................................................. 99 1.18.7.26 Configuring a Remote CONTROL Unit .......................................................................... 99 1.18.7.27 Configuring a Remote Control Unit in programming mode ...........................................100 1.18.7.28 Configuring a Remote Control Unit in supervisory mode..............................................100 1.18.7.29 CONTROL Unit................................................................................................100 1.18.7.30 Why use a CONTROL UNIT ?......................................................................................100 1.18.7.31 Configuring the CONTROL Unit ...................................................................................101 1.18.7.32 Configuring a Control Unit in programming mode.........................................................101 1.18.7.33 Configuring a Control Unit in supervisory mode ...........................................................101 1.18.7.34 Configuring a CONTROL Unit and the network device.................................................102

1.18.7.35 P.M.C. date & time synchronization..............................................................................102 1.18.7.36 Real Time Data Engine User Unit ...................................................................102 1.18.7.37 Why use a Real Time Data Engine User Unit?.............................................................102 1.18.7.38 Configuring the Real Time Data Engine User Unit .......................................................103 1.18.7.39 Configuring the Real Time Data Engine User Unit and the network device..................103 1.18.7.40 RTDS/IMC - EXTERN DEVICE User Unit.......................................................104 1.18.7.41 Configuring an RTDS/IMC-EXTERN DEVICE User Unit ..............................................104 1.19 Advanced Configuration................................................................................... 105 1.19.1 Networks and Communication.........................................................................105 1.19.1.1 Monitoring network nodes................................................................................105 1.19.1.2 Rebuilding the network configuration...............................................................105 1.19.1.3 Time alignment on client workstations.............................................................106 1.19.1.4 Advanced configurations..................................................................................107 1.19.1.5 RIS ...................................................................................................................107 1.19.1.6 RIS Inter-Process Communication Service.....................................................................107 1.19.1.7 Configuring networking using RIS IPC ...........................................................................107 1.19.1.8 Example..........................................................................................................................108 1.19.1.9 Example..........................................................................................................................109 1.19.1.10 Example - Two servers in hot-backup configuration with preferential network set for backup communications. ..............................................................................................................................109 1.19.1.11 Example - Two servers in hot-backup configuration with no preferential network ........110 1.19.1.12 Example - A single server without backup with two clients ...........................................111 1.19.1.13 Configuring a redundant network with two Historian servers in hot-backup..................111 1.19.1.14 Example of a configuration of a redundant network with two Historian servers in hot-backup configuration and one client .............................................................................................................111 1.19.1.15 Configuring the RIS parameters ...................................................................................112 1.19.1.16 Configuring the RIS parameters (Default).....................................................................113 1.19.1.17 Configuring the RIS parameters (Custom)....................................................................113 1.19.1.18 IPADDR.INI ..................................................................................................................114 1.19.1.19 Adding a new FAT Server.............................................................................................114 1.19.1.20 TCP/IP .............................................................................................................114 1.19.1.21 Configuring the TCP protocol .......................................................................................114 1.19.1.22 Configurable TCP/IP parameters..................................................................................115 1.19.1.23 Optimizing TCP/IP timeouts..........................................................................................116 1.19.1.24 CAB Protocol Configurator ..............................................................................116 1.19.1.25 Overview of CAB Protocol Configurator........................................................................116 1.19.1.26 Defining the default settings .........................................................................................117 1.19.1.27 Defining specific subnet settings ..................................................................................118 1.19.1.28 Troubleshooting for CAB Protocol Configurator............................................................119 1.19.2 Client/Server Architecture ................................................................................119 1.19.2.1 Client/Server Architecture ................................................................................119 1.19.2.2 Sharing a Plant ................................................................................................120 1.19.2.3 Connecting to a remote Plant ..........................................................................121 1.19.2.4 Emergency configuration for SIMATIC IT client workstations .........................121 1.19.2.5 Configuring a client workstation.......................................................................122 1.19.2.6 Disabling file alignment ....................................................................................122 1.19.2.7 Filtering files to be replicated ...........................................................................123 1.19.3 Security Management ......................................................................................123 1.19.3.1 Security Management ......................................................................................123 1.19.3.2 Disabling hotkey combinations ........................................................................124 1.19.3.3 Disabling Ctrl Alt Del ........................................................................................124 1.19.3.4 Automatic Windows Logon ..............................................................................124 1.19.3.5 Impersonate User ............................................................................................125 1.19.4 External components .......................................................................................125 1.19.4.1 Adding third-party components to the Client menu..........................................125 1.19.4.2 Structure of .ADN files .....................................................................................125 1.19.4.3 Starting the third-party modules.......................................................................127 1.19.4.4 Adding custom components to the Client menu ..............................................128 1.20 Troubleshooting Tools ..................................................................................... 128 1.20.1 Alerter service ..................................................................................................128 1.20.2 Log File Viewer ................................................................................................129 1.20.2.1 Overview of Log File Viewer ...........................................................................................129 1.20.2.2 Structure of log file messages ........................................................................................129 1.20.2.3 Starting the Log File Viewer............................................................................................130 1.20.2.4 Updating log file messages.............................................................................................130

1.20.2.5 Displaying details of a message .....................................................................................130 1.20.2.6 Environment: Customize the Log File Viewer window.....................................131 1.20.2.7 Environment: Arranging windows ....................................................................131 1.20.2.8 Environment: Arranging the selected windows................................................132 1.20.2.9 Environment: Hiding messages .......................................................................132 1.20.2.10 Environment: Showing hidden messages .......................................................132 1.20.2.11 Environment: Configuring the message display time ......................................133 1.20.2.12 Environment: Setting the local time.................................................................133 1.20.2.13 Applying filters .................................................................................................133 1.20.2.14 Filtering by the description...............................................................................133 1.20.2.15 Filtering by date ...............................................................................................134 1.20.2.16 Filtering by priority level...................................................................................134 1.20.2.17 Filtering by advanced criteria...........................................................................135 1.20.2.18 Filtering by application.....................................................................................135 1.20.2.19 Finding a message in the log file .....................................................................135 1.20.2.20 Priority Level search option .............................................................................136 1.20.2.21 Application search option ................................................................................136 1.20.2.22 Advanced Criteria search option .....................................................................136 1.20.2.23 Message search option ...................................................................................137 1.20.2.24 Working with log files.......................................................................................137 1.20.2.25 Opening a log file..........................................................................................................137 1.20.2.26 Viewing archived log files .............................................................................................137 1.20.2.27 Viewing application log files..........................................................................................137 1.20.2.28 Viewing remote log files................................................................................................138 1.20.2.29 Saving a log file ............................................................................................................138 1.20.2.30 Printing a log file ...........................................................................................................138 1.20.2.31 Overwriting the system log ..............................................................................139 1.20.2.32 Configuring the log size ...................................................................................139 1.20.2.33 Configuring the overwriting mode....................................................................139 1.20.2.34 Displaying information on the log file...............................................................140 1.20.2.35 Removing log messages .................................................................................140 1.20.2.36 Configuring Categories....................................................................................141 1.20.2.37 Defining the category value ..........................................................................................141 1.20.2.38 Disabling message archiving for an application............................................................141 1.20.2.39 Loading a category configuration file ............................................................................142

2 Text Editor 143 2.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 143 2.1.1 Overview of Text Editor....................................................................................143 2.1.2 Starting the Text Editor from SIMATIC IT Management Console....................143 2.2 Working with text files ...................................................................................... 144 2.2.1 Creating a new file ...........................................................................................144 2.2.2 Opening a file ...................................................................................................144 2.2.3 Saving a file......................................................................................................144 2.2.4 Printing a file ....................................................................................................144 2.2.5 Closing a file.....................................................................................................145 2.3 Editing text files................................................................................................ 145 2.3.1 Standard Editing operations.............................................................................145 2.3.2 Tabs and spaces..............................................................................................145 2.3.3 Advanced Editing operations ...........................................................................146 2.3.4 Selecting a horizontal block of text ..................................................................146 2.3.5 Selecting a vertical block of text.......................................................................146 2.3.6 Filling a selection .............................................................................................147 2.3.7 Keys available in Text Editor............................................................................147 2.4 Finding and replacing text................................................................................ 148 2.4.1 Finding and replacing.......................................................................................148 2.4.2 Finding text in the current file...........................................................................148 2.4.3 Finding and replacing text in the current file ....................................................149 2.4.4 Finding text in more than one file.....................................................................149 2.4.5 Finding and replacing text in more than one file ..............................................150 2.4.6 Locating text in the file .....................................................................................150 2.5 Customizing the working environment............................................................. 151 2.5.1 Showing/hiding toolbars...................................................................................151

2.5.2 Showing/hiding the Output Window.................................................................151 2.5.3 Choosing the default file type...........................................................................152 2.5.4 Choosing the default save format ....................................................................152 2.5.5 Configuring the Save options...........................................................................152 2.5.6 Setting Colours ................................................................................................153 2.5.7 Defining user keywords....................................................................................153 2.5.8 Setting the default font .....................................................................................154 2.5.9 Configuring the search options ........................................................................154

3 Hot Backup 155 3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 155 3.1.1 Hot Backup.......................................................................................................155 3.1.2 Useful tips on hot backup.................................................................................155 3.1.3 Monitoring the backup status ...........................................................................156 3.1.4 Backup status...................................................................................................156 3.2 Configuring servers in hot backup ................................................................... 157 3.2.1 Configuring hot backup for SIMATIC IT plants and applications .....................157 3.2.2 Configuring hot-backup servers as Primary and Auxiliary Master...................158 3.2.3 Removing hot-backup servers .........................................................................158 3.2.4 Modifying hot-backup servers ..........................................................................158 3.2.5 Configuring SIMATIC IT applications hot-backup............................................159 3.2.6 Configuring the Plant hot backup.....................................................................159 3.2.7 Replication of files between primary and auxiliary masters.............................160 3.2.8 Copying Plant directories .................................................................................160 3.3 Master-slave switching..................................................................................... 161 3.3.1 Overview of master-slave switching.................................................................161 3.3.2 Plant Master-Slave Switching ..........................................................................161 3.3.3 When the master disk is unavailable ...............................................................162 3.3.4 Example: when the master disk is not available ..............................................162 3.3.5 When a network error occurs (Plants) .............................................................162 3.3.6 Application Master-Slave Switching.................................................................162 3.3.7 When the master application is unavailable ....................................................163 3.3.8 Example: when the master application is not available ...................................163 3.3.9 When a network error occurs (Applications)....................................................164 3.3.10 Enhancing master-slave alignment..................................................................164 3.4 Manual switching ............................................................................................. 164 3.4.1 Manual switching of Plants and modules.........................................................164 3.4.2 Manual master-slave switching of Plants.........................................................164 3.4.3 Manual master-slave switching of SIMATIC IT components ...........................165

4 Tag Management 166 4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 166 4.1.1 Overview of the Points Database.....................................................................166 4.1.2 Structure of the Points Database.....................................................................166 4.1.3 Maximum size of the Points Database ............................................................166 4.2 Points Database tables .................................................................................... 167 4.2.1 Main table.........................................................................................................167 4.2.1.1 AM table...........................................................................................................168 4.2.2 GUI table ..........................................................................................................168 4.2.3 PDA table .........................................................................................................169 4.2.3.1 RTDS table ......................................................................................................170 4.3 Database Editor ............................................................................................... 170 4.3.1 Starting the Database Editor............................................................................170 4.3.2 Typographical conventions used in the database grid ....................................171 4.3.3 Opening a database.........................................................................................172 4.3.3.1 Opening a database (Database Editor)...........................................................172 4.3.3.2 Opening a database linked to a particular Unit ...............................................172 4.3.4 Working with views ..........................................................................................172 4.3.4.1 Database table views ......................................................................................172 4.3.4.2 User Views.......................................................................................................172 4.3.4.3 Creating a User view .......................................................................................173 4.3.4.4 Assigning a User view .....................................................................................173

4.3.4.5 Deleting a User view........................................................................................173 4.3.5 Working with points..........................................................................................174 4.3.5.1 Managing Points..............................................................................................174 4.3.5.2 Inserting a new point (guided mode) ...............................................................174 4.3.5.3 Inserting a new point (manual mode) ..............................................................175 4.3.5.4 Automatic allocation ........................................................................................176 4.3.5.5 Example of automatic allocation......................................................................176 4.3.5.6 Automatic Filling ..............................................................................................177 4.3.5.7 Example of Automatic Filling ...........................................................................177 4.3.5.8 Modifying a point (guided mode) .....................................................................178 4.3.5.9 Modifying a point (manual mode) ....................................................................179 4.3.5.10 Modifying a group of variables .........................................................................179 4.3.5.11 Deleting a point ................................................................................................179 4.3.5.12 Duplicating a point ...........................................................................................180 4.3.5.13 Duplicating several points ................................................................................180 4.3.5.14 Correcting errors ..............................................................................................180 4.3.5.15 Displaying errors ..............................................................................................180 4.3.5.16 Converting a scalar variable into an array .......................................................180 4.3.5.17 Find and Replace.............................................................................................181 4.3.5.18 Conventions used for finding strings................................................................181 4.3.5.19 Single-field queries ..........................................................................................181 4.3.5.20 Multiple-field queries ........................................................................................182 4.3.5.21 Finding and replacing text................................................................................183 4.3.5.22 Converting text to uppercase/lowercase..........................................................184 4.3.5.23 Locating a point in the database......................................................................184 4.3.5.24 Sorting points ...................................................................................................184 4.3.5.25 Inserting/removing Bookmarks ........................................................................184 4.3.5.26 Exporting points ...............................................................................................185 4.3.5.27 Importing points from a .DEF file .....................................................................186 4.3.5.28 Locking a point .................................................................................................186 4.3.5.29 Unlocking a point .............................................................................................187 4.3.6 Working with arrays .........................................................................................187 4.3.6.1 Managing Arrays..............................................................................................187 4.3.6.2 Adding an array ...............................................................................................187 4.3.6.3 Modifying the field values of an array element (guided mode)........................188 4.3.6.4 Buttons.............................................................................................................188 4.3.6.5 Modifying the field values of an array element (manual mode).......................189 4.3.6.6 Duplicating an array.........................................................................................189 4.3.6.7 Deleting Arrays ................................................................................................189 4.3.6.8 Locking an array ..............................................................................................190 4.3.6.9 Unlocking an array...........................................................................................190 4.3.7 Updating server configuration..........................................................................191 4.3.7.1 Updating the SIMATIC IT servers configuration..............................................191 4.3.8 Configuring alarms...........................................................................................191 4.3.8.1 Configuring alarms ..........................................................................................191 4.3.8.2 Creating a group of alarms ..............................................................................192 4.3.8.3 Updating alarm groups ....................................................................................192 4.3.8.4 Associating an alarm group to a point .............................................................193 4.3.8.5 Configuring the read/write mode .....................................................................193 4.3.9 Configuring RTDS parameters.........................................................................194 4.3.9.1 Entering RTDS parameters to handle communication with a PLC network....194 4.3.10 Configuring historical data ...............................................................................194 4.3.10.1 Configuring a point to be archived ...................................................................194 4.3.11 Configuring graphic panels ..............................................................................195 4.3.11.1 Graphic object attributes ..................................................................................195 4.3.11.2 Configuring graphic object parameters............................................................196 4.3.11.3 Parameters used by graphic objects ...............................................................196 4.3.11.4 Parameters of a logic variable .........................................................................197 4.3.11.5 Parameters for a slider.....................................................................................197 4.3.11.6 Parameters of an integer or real variable ........................................................198 4.3.11.7 Parameters for a Trend or a Chart...................................................................198 4.3.12 Repairing the database....................................................................................198

4.3.12.1 Recreating the database indexes ....................................................................198 4.3.12.2 Rebuilding the database ..................................................................................199 4.3.12.3 Resetting the server status ..............................................................................199 4.3.13 Printing .............................................................................................................199 4.3.13.1 Printing the database .......................................................................................199 4.3.13.2 Print preview ....................................................................................................199 4.3.13.3 Selecting a printer ............................................................................................199 4.3.13.4 Printing records................................................................................................200 4.3.13.5 Printing to file ...................................................................................................200 4.3.13.6 Print settings ....................................................................................................200 4.3.13.7 Defining the header..........................................................................................201 4.3.13.8 Defining the footer............................................................................................201 4.3.13.9 Defining the page layout ..................................................................................201 4.3.13.10 Defining the filter..............................................................................................201 4.3.14 Customizing the environment ..........................................................................202 4.3.14.1 Showing/hiding bars.........................................................................................202 4.3.14.2 Customizing the scroll bars..............................................................................202 4.3.14.3 Arranging windows in the client area ...............................................................203 4.3.14.4 Changing the font.............................................................................................203 4.3.14.5 Changing colors ...............................................................................................203 4.3.14.6 Customizing a view ..........................................................................................204 4.3.15 Creating a Database ........................................................................................204 4.3.15.1 Automatic vs. manual database creation.........................................................204 4.3.15.2 Creating a database associated with an RTDS/IMC Unit ................................205 4.3.15.3 Creating a database associated with a Real Time Data Engine Unit ..............205 4.3.15.4 Creating a database associated with a CONTROL Unit..................................205 4.3.15.5 Creating a database from Database Editor .....................................................205 4.3.16 Creating a new database .................................................................................206 4.4 Locreg management ........................................................................................ 206 4.4.1 Defining and displaying the Locreg..................................................................206 4.4.2 Database Locreg - Details ...............................................................................207 4.4.3 Troubleshooting for different locregs ...............................................................207 4.4.4 Assigning a new locreg run-time......................................................................207 4.4.5 Viewing the locreg map....................................................................................207 4.5 Database Management Tool............................................................................ 208 4.5.1 Overview about Points Database Maintenance...............................................208 4.5.2 The Database Management environment .......................................................209 4.5.3 Database attributes..........................................................................................209 4.5.4 Field: Type .......................................................................................................210 4.5.5 Viewing the Database details...........................................................................210 4.5.6 Opening a database (Database Management)................................................210 4.5.7 Database-file types ..........................................................................................210 4.5.8 Renaming a database......................................................................................211 4.5.9 Browsing the database ....................................................................................211 4.5.10 Copying a database .........................................................................................211 4.5.11 Removing a database ......................................................................................212 4.5.12 Reallocating registers ......................................................................................212 4.5.13 Importing/exporting a database .......................................................................212 4.5.14 Conversion.......................................................................................................213 4.5.14.1 Creating a CSV file ..........................................................................................213 4.5.14.2 Keyword: Symbolic ..........................................................................................214 4.5.14.3 Keyword:Type ..................................................................................................214 4.5.14.4 Keyword: Register............................................................................................214 4.5.14.5 Keyword: Comment1 .......................................................................................214 4.5.14.6 Keyword: Comment2 .......................................................................................214 4.5.14.7 Keyword: Description .......................................................................................214 4.5.14.8 Example of CSV File........................................................................................215 4.5.14.9 Converting a database.....................................................................................215 4.5.14.10 Converting a SIMATIC IT database (.CDB) into a .CSV file ...........................215 4.5.14.11 Converting the format of a SIMATIC IT database (.CDB) ...............................216 4.5.14.12 Converting a .CSV file into a SIMATIC IT database (.CDB) ...........................217 4.5.14.13 Conversion with Main tab ................................................................................217

4.5.14.14 Conversion without Main tab ...........................................................................218 4.5.15 Merging ............................................................................................................219 4.5.15.1 Merging databases ..........................................................................................219 4.5.15.2 Register Reallocation.......................................................................................219 4.5.15.3 Example ...........................................................................................................220 4.5.15.4 Reallocation rules ............................................................................................221 4.5.15.5 Example of register reallocation.......................................................................221 4.5.15.6 Congruence of the database Locregs..............................................................222 4.6 Database Browser ........................................................................................... 222 4.6.1 Overview of the Database Browser .................................................................222 4.6.2 Selecting a different Unit..................................................................................223 4.6.3 Finding records ................................................................................................223 4.6.3.1 Finding Records ..............................................................................................223 4.6.3.2 Searching by Point Type .................................................................................224 4.6.3.3 Searching by Symbolic Name .........................................................................224 4.6.3.4 Searching by Comment ...................................................................................224 4.6.3.5 Searching by Record Type ..............................................................................224 4.6.3.6 Searching by RTDS fields ...............................................................................225 4.6.3.7 Searching by Configuration .............................................................................225 4.6.3.8 Choosing the Sorting Order.............................................................................225 4.6.3.9 Choosing the Display Format ..........................................................................226 4.6.3.10 Display Format: Normal ...................................................................................226 4.6.3.11 Display Format: Extended................................................................................226 4.6.3.12 Display Format: Compressed ..........................................................................226

5 Real Time Data Server 228 5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 228 5.1.1 What is SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server? .................................................228 5.1.2 Starting SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server ...................................................229 5.1.3 RTDS polling classes.......................................................................................230 5.1.4 Dynamic class change .....................................................................................231 5.1.5 Dynamic class change scenarios.....................................................................231 5.1.6 Reading and writing arrays with RTDS............................................................232 5.1.7 Installing and Configuring the SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server Drivers ....232 5.1.8 Data exchange between SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server and the RTDS interfaces

.........................................................................................................................233 5.1.9 Updating the SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server ...........................................233 5.1.10 Troubleshooting the RTDS update ..................................................................234 5.2 Data Memory Area........................................................................................... 235 5.2.1 Data Memory Area...........................................................................................235 5.2.2 RTDS Data Types............................................................................................235 5.2.3 System Locregs for SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server ................................235 5.2.4 Locreg RTDB_0 ...............................................................................................236 5.2.5 Locreg RTDB_1 ...............................................................................................236 5.2.6 Locreg RTDB_2 ...............................................................................................236 5.2.7 Locreg RTDB_3 ...............................................................................................237 5.2.8 Locreg RTDB_4 ...............................................................................................237 5.2.9 Locreg RTDB_5 ...............................................................................................237 5.2.10 User Registers .................................................................................................237 5.2.11 Registers for RTDS Locregs ............................................................................237 5.2.12 Registers for PMC Locregs..............................................................................238 5.2.13 System Registers.............................................................................................239 5.3 Configuring the Locreg..................................................................................... 239 5.3.1 Configuring the Locreg.....................................................................................239 5.3.2 Creating a new user locreg ..............................................................................240 5.3.3 If you have selected an RTDS Locreg .............................................................240 5.3.4 Type .................................................................................................................241 5.3.5 Field Memory ...................................................................................................241 5.3.6 User Memory....................................................................................................241 5.3.7 Backup Memory ...............................................................................................241 5.3.8 If you have selected a PMC Locreg.................................................................242 5.3.9 Permanent Memory .........................................................................................242

5.3.10 Not permanent Memory ...................................................................................242 5.3.11 Modifying a user locreg....................................................................................243 5.3.12 Viewing the registers of a locreg......................................................................243 5.4 Configuring SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server ............................................. 244 5.4.1 Configuring SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server .............................................244 5.4.2 Configuring the interfaces to the RTDS drivers ...............................................245 5.4.3 Defining the size of RTDS queues...................................................................246 5.4.4 Monitoring the RTDS queue status..................................................................247 5.4.5 Defining the management of 0 class points.....................................................247 5.4.6 Optimizing the setting of values on device drivers for 0 class points ..............248 5.4.7 Enabling oneshot reading ................................................................................248 5.4.8 Enabling quality flags management.................................................................248 5.4.9 Enabling Time Stamp.......................................................................................249 5.4.10 Displaying quality information ..........................................................................249 5.4.11 The GOOD quality attribute .............................................................................250 5.4.12 The BAD quality attribute .................................................................................250 5.4.13 The UNCERTAIN quality attribute ...................................................................250 5.4.14 The quality status.............................................................................................251 5.4.15 The limit field ....................................................................................................251 5.5 Hot backup (redundancy)................................................................................. 251 5.5.1 Details on RTDS hot backup (redundancy) .....................................................251 5.5.2 Register management with RTDS in hot backup.............................................251 5.5.3 The DB-Align function ......................................................................................252 5.5.4 Launching the DB-Align application (dbalign.exe) ...........................................252 5.6 Advanced RTDS configuration......................................................................... 253 5.6.1 Advanced RTDS configurations.......................................................................253 5.6.2 COMMVIEWER.INI..........................................................................................253 5.6.3 GPSSOCK.INI..................................................................................................253 5.6.4 ITFLIB.INI.........................................................................................................254 5.6.5 MENU.INI .........................................................................................................255 5.6.6 NCSERV.INI.....................................................................................................255 5.6.7 QBRIDGE.INI ...................................................................................................255 5.6.8 RTDB.INI..........................................................................................................256 5.6.9 USERBK.INI.....................................................................................................257

6 The SIMATIC IT OPC Browser 259 6.1 How to use SIMATIC IT OPC Browser ............................................................ 259

1 SIMATIC IT Services

1.1 Overview

1.1.1 SIMATIC IT Services

SIMATIC® IT Services is a software package that acts as an enabling layer offering common services to all SIMATIC IT components. Such services include:

• User Management

• License Management

• Audit Trail Service

• Electronic Signature Service

• Troubleshooting Tools

• Configuration Tools

• Messaging Management

1.1.2 Starting SIMATIC IT Services

After installing SIMATIC IT Services, you must configure some parameters related to the client-server architecture and the network services. Note that configuration can only be done after the program has been started.

To start SIMATIC IT Services from Windows:

1. Select the Start button from Microsoft Windows taskbar.

2. Select option Programs.

3. Click the Management Console icon in the program group SIMATIC IT ManagementConsole.

The SIMATIC IT Management Console welcome window appears showing the different software modules being loaded (this operation takes a few seconds). This window also contains useful information about the environment, the version date and number, the protection key serial number.

Depending on the configuration, you might either access the Plant Management environment (this occurs, for instance, when you start SIMATIC IT Services for the very first time) or log on directly to a specific Plant and thus access the Management Console environment. In both cases, you will have to perform some configurations required for the system to work correctly.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 13

1.1.3 Quitting SIMATIC IT Services

To terminate your working session and log off from SIMATIC IT Services:

1. Select command File > Exit from Plant Management or Management Console.

2. The Exit window appears. Select one of the following options:

Select ToExit End the current working session, quit the Management Console /

Plant Management environment. Exit to Operating System End the current working session, quit the Management Console /

Plant Management environment and return to Windows Shutdown End the Windows working session and prepare your computer to be

turned off. Shutdown and Power Off End the current SIMATIC IT working session and switch off the

computer (hardware dependent). Note If you want the option Shutdown and Power Off to appear in the WinLogOn menu you have to set it in the PC registry. This is only possible if the OEM has supplied the computer with a HAL (Hardware Abstruction Layer) which supports the power down request. The x86 Microsoft supplied HALs do not support this request.

If you choose to Shutdown the system, you can then select one of the following options:

Select ToRestart when shutdown is complete Restart automatically after the system shutdown is

complete Restart with Operating System Shell active

Restart the system and activate the Windows NT operating system shell

Automatic Windows Logon Restart and logon automatically to Windows (without pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL).

Important

In order for the Restart with Operating System Shell active and Automatic Windows Logon options to work correctly, the Windows user must have the right to access the Registry.

1.2 Getting Started

1.2.1 When SIMATIC IT Services is started for the first time

The first time the system is started, it is possible to configure the system quickly:

• Stand Alone Configuration

• Client-Server Configuration

• Client-Server Backup Configuration.

Important

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 14

SIMATIC IT Services should be started on the workstation on which the Plant will reside. It is recommended that this workstation be also configured as one of the Foundation servers.

Important

The Management Console Quick Configuration tool allows you to define only the SIMATIC IT workstations. To configure network and control devices, you must use the Network Configuration tool or define them when configuring a Unit.

After that, some other configuration must be carried out:

• Configuring the users and the access levels

• Configuring the plant and units

Important

In order to configure a Unit it is necessary to insert the SIMATIC IT Services license.

For more information, see Inserting SIMATIC IT license codes.

The SIMATIC IT licenses must be configured on each workstation of the network, in relation to the components for which the license has been purchased.

1.2.2 Stand Alone Configuration

To configure a Stand-Alone application:

1. Select command Tools > Management Console Quick Configuration in Plant Management.

2. In the Management Console Quick Configuration dialog box, select the Stand Alone option button. Click Next.

3. Within the Foundation Server tab, enter the computer name of the workstation that will be configured as the Foundation server and click the Apply button. For more information about defining Foundation servers, see Configuring the Foundation servers.

4. Select a network and click Add. Click the Next button.

Note: It is possible to change the name, used to identify the network, by clicking and overwriting it.

5. Insert the required parameters for system configuration according to the selected network and click Next.

6. Information about the configuration (Foundation server, network type, node number, …) is displayed. Click Finish to save the configuration.

Checking the configuration After completing this configuration, you can check it by clicking Tools > Network Configuration in Plant Management.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 15

1.2.3 Client-Server Configuration

To configure a Client-Server application:

1. Select command Tools > Management Console Quick Configuration in Plant Management.

2. In the Management Console Quick Configuration dialog box, select the Client-Server option button. Click Next.

3. Within the Foundation Server tab, enter the computer name of the workstation that will be configured as the Foundation server and click Add. Then click the Apply button. For more information about defining Foundation servers, see Configuring the Foundation servers.

4. Within the Client tab, enter the computer name of the workstation that will be configured as the client and click Add.

Note: It is possible to change the name, used to identify the network, by clicking and overwriting it.

5. Select a network and click Add. Click the Next button.

6. Insert the required parameters for system configuration according to the selected network and click Next.

7. Information about the configuration (Foundation server, network type, node number, …) is displayed. Click Finish to save the configuration

Checking the configuration After completing this configuration, you can check it by clicking Tools > Network Configuration in Plant Management.

1.2.4 Client-Server Backup Configuration

To configure a Client-Server Backup application:

1. Select command Tools > Management Console Quick Configuration in Plant Management.

2. In the Management Console Quick Configuration dialog box, select the Client-Server Backup option button. Click Next.

3. Within the Foundation Server tab, enter the computer name of the workstations that will be configured as the Primary Master and Auxiliary Master and click the Apply button. . For more information about defining Foundation servers, see Configuring the Foundation servers.

4. Within the Client tab, enter the computer name of the workstation(s) that will be configured as the client(s) and click Add.

5. Select a network and click Add. Click the Next button.

Note: It is possible to change the name, used to identify the network, by clicking and overwriting it

6. Insert the required parameters for system configuration according to the selected network and click Next.

7. Information about the configuration (Foundation server, network type, node number, …) is displayed. Click Finish to save the configuration.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 16

Checking the configuration After completing this configuration, you can check it by clicking Tools > Network Configuration in Plant Management.

1.2.5 Parameters for system configuration

The following table illustrates the parameters that are involved in performing:

• Stand Alone configuration

• Client Server configuration

• Client Server Backup configuration

Parameter Iternet Session ManagerCpu type Select the type of CPU associated with the

workstation: • None: Used exclusively for supervision

tasks • RTDS/IMC-n: Used to read or write data

to non-proprietary PLC networks or other devices. Each type of RTDB_IMC CPU identifies the default locreg that will be assigned to all logical Units associated with this workstation (e.g. CPU type RTDS/IMC1 corresponds to locreg RTDS1). For more information on SIMATIC IT system locregs, see System Locregs for SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server.

• SPV-n: This CPU type is obsolete and is used only for old locregs based on VMS systems

As per Iternet.

Node A Enter the node number assigned to the workstation.

Not applicable.

IP Address Not applicable. Enter the TCP/IP address of Channel A (and, if necessary, of Channel B) from the workstation you are configuring. For more information on IP Addresses, see Session Manager network parameters .

1.3 Environment

1.3.1 SIMATIC IT Services environment

SIMATIC IT Services are the ground layer that supports the system’s entire architecture and must be installed on each workstation.

The Services’ main role is to centralize those functions affecting all of the system’s components: i.e. management and configuration of users and user groups, licenses, logging of operations, hot back-up, real-time database, system events, etc.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 17

The main working environments that make up the Services are:

• Plant Management

• Management Console

• Zone Monitoring Environment

1.3.2 Plant Management

The Plant Management environment is specifically designed for Plant definition.

In the SIMATIC IT environment, the term "Plant" indicates an element that comprehends all the configurations, programs and, in general, the files that form an application for the supervision and control of an automation system.

From the Plant Management environment you can perform some basic functions for SIMATIC IT Services environment configuration, such as management of users, definition of master machines, management of the physical network and the enabling codes of the SIMATIC IT components.

Once the Plant has been defined, and configuration, which is essential for system operation, has been carried out, you can access the SIMATIC IT Management Console system menu for a single Plant.

1.3.3 What can I do from Plant Management ?

From the Plant Management environment, you can:

• Configure the Foundation servers

• Configure the SIMATIC IT network

• Insert license codes

• Configure groups

• Configure your workstation

1.3.4 Management Console

SIMATIC IT Management Console is the management and configuration environment for all SIMATIC IT components.

From Management Console, you can access all the configuration tools (licenses, users, workstation, network, start-up, third party applications, etc) and, in general, all those components making up the SIMATIC IT product family.

The SIMATIC IT Management Console environment is made up of various tabs, from which you can access the different functions. The same functions are also available from the menu commands.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 18

Important

Access to individual SIMATIC IT components depends on the resources available to each user.

1.3.5 ZME Zone Monitoring Environment

From SIMATIC IT Management Console you can define supervisory Zones, that is the supervisory logical areas that make up a Plant.

The Zone is the logical element that includes all files and configurations dedicated to the supervision and management of a specific Plant area. Each workstation can access more than one supervisory Zone, either local or remote.

Supervisory Zones are managed in the SIMATIC IT Management Console environment, in the

tab. Each zone is graphically represented by an icon which can be double-clicked by the user in order to launch the Zone Monitoring Environment.

Zone Monitoring Environment (ZME) is the supervisory environment which integrates all the software tools required to supervise the Plant, that is:

• SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface (SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface);

• SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager Display (Alarm Manager Display);

• SIMATIC IT Historian Data Display (Historian Data Display).

These modules must be configured with reference to a specific Zone, i.e., for a specific logical area of the Plant.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 19

You will have access to the Zone Monitoring Environment only if you have configured a Default Zone in SIMATIC IT Management Console, since all the operations (database management, cross-reference, function keyboard configuration, etc.) which you can execute in ZME refer to a specific zone. For more information, see Configuring the Default Zone.

1.3.6 What is a Zone?

The SIMATIC IT environment is subdivided into zones, that is, logical supervision areas.

A zone includes all the files and configurations related to the supervision and operation of a specific area of your Plant. To each zone you can associate graphic panels, alarms, archived points.

The SIMATIC IT applications which provide supervisory functions (SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface, SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager Display, SIMATIC IT Historian Data Display) can be started also from the SIMATIC IT Management Console system menu, but only when executed from within the Zone Monitoring Environment can you obtain a complete view of the whole zone on which you are operating.

Each workstation can have access to more than one supervisory zone, either locally or on a remote server.

1.3.7 Defining a Zone

To define a Zone:

1. Select the tab in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

2. Select command File > New.

3. In the New Zone dialog box enter the name to be assigned to the zone (maximum 8 characters) in the Zone Name box.

4. Click OK. The icon of the zone appears in the window.

The supervisory modules (SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface, SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager Display, SIMATIC IT Historian Data Display) integrated in Zone Monitoring Environment always refer to the Default Zone when they are activated. For more information, see Configuring the Default Zone.

1.3.8 Configuring the default Zone

The supervisory modules integrated in ZME (SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface, SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager Display, SIMATIC IT Historian Data Display) always refer to a default zone when they are activated.

To configure the Default Zone:

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 20

1. Select command Configuration > System in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

2. Click the Plant Configuration tab in the System Configuration window.

3. Select the name of the default zone to be configured from the Current Zone list box.

4. Click OK.

Important

If you execute this operation when a supervisory application (SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface, SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager Display, SIMATIC IT Historian Data Display) is currently running, you will be asked whether to interrupt the application or not.

1.3.9 Removing a Zone

To remove a Zone:

1. Select the tab in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

2. Select command Edit > Delete .

3. The message Do you really want to delete it ? appears.

4. Click Yes. The icon of the zone is removed from the window.

1.3.10 Starting the Zone Monitoring Environment

• mentSelect command Tools > Zone Monitoring Environ in SIMATIC IT Management sole to enter the ZME supervisory environment.

Or

•

Con

Select the tab, expand the Tools folder and double-click Zone Monitoring ironment.

Select the

Env

Or

• tab, expand the Zones folder and double-click a zone icon.

1.4 Working area

1.4.1

ironment working rea. Each window shows the files defined in the corresponding directories.

The Zone Monitoring Environment working area

Graph, Alarm and Data windows can be arranged in the Zone Monitoring Enva

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 21

1.4.2

hree windows can be opened in the Zone Monitoring Environment working area: Alarm Files, , Graph Files. They correspond to the three object classes managed within a Zone,

en you enter the Zone Monitoring

To d GUI file windows:

1. s > Windows Setting in the Zone Monitoring Environment.

2. dialog box check or uncheck the boxes of the file windows to be area:

- raph Files Window

ile Window

- Data Files Window

1.4.3 o

Alarm Files, Data Files, Graph Files) you

all the file details (name, size, creation date and time) with command View > All File Details

> By File Type

can be refreshed run-time by selecting commands Refresh and Refresh All from the Window menu.

1.4.4 rranging windows in the working area

n be minimized and arranged in the working area, starting from the left lower corner with command Window > Arrange Icons.

If the windows are m

Displaying AMD, HDD and GUI windows

TData Filesthat is, alarms, historical points and graphic panels. WhEnvironment all three windows are displayed by default.

show or hide the AMD, HDD an

Select command Option

In the Window Settingdisplayed in the working

G

- Alarm F

3. Click OK.

C nfiguring the file display options

In the three Zone Monitoring Environment windows (can display:

•

• only the file name, with command View > Name

• only the files with a particular extension, with command View

The list of files displayed in one or all of the windows

A

The Alarm, Data and Graph windows ca

aximized you can:

tile them horizontally (command Window > Tile Horizontal).

tile them vertically (command Window > Tile Vertical).

arrange them one on top of the other (command Window > Cascade).

1.4.5

The setting of the ZME working environment can be saved:

Saving the working area settings

s

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 22

• as soon as configured (command Options > Save Settings Now)

• each time you quit the Zone Monitoring Environment (command Options > Save Settings on Exit)

1.5

1.5.1 nvironment

Click the

Alarm Manager Display

Starting SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager Display from Zone Monitoring E

icon on the Zone Monitoring Environment toolbar to gain access to the SIMATIC nvironment. IT Alarm Manager Display e

Click the icon on the Zone Monitoring Environment toolbar to gain access to the Alarm e

1.5.2 reating an AMD file

To create an AMD file:

le > New

Acknowledge Services environm nt.

C

1. Select command Fi in the Zone Monitoring Environment.

. In the New dialog box click the Alarm Viewer button.

3. Click OK. You access the SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager Display environment.

Tip For more l SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager and Alarm Manager Display:

1.5.3 Op n

To open a

mand File > Open

2

information, see manuaUser’s Guide.

e ing an ADD file

n ADD file:

1. Select com in the Zone Monitoring Environment.

. In the Open dialog box select the directory where the files you want to open are stored. The following directories are available for SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager Display:

\ALARM\USER contains active alarm, alarms to be acknowledged and workspace files.

- \ALARM\TEXT contains alarm configuration files.

Or

2

-

3. Select the file from the File Name box.

4. Click OK.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 23

1. In the Alarm – User Files window double click the name of the file you want to open.

1.5.4

ach Alarm Manager Display or Alarm Acknowledge Service client can connect to one or more larm Manager servers and thus display the alarms generated by all the servers configured in e network.

the Zone Monitoring

Importan

Before co IC IT Alarm Manager Display clwithin the def

1. ne

SIM

2. and Co

st box.

onfigured in hot

3. Click the Add>> button to add the selected server name to the Computer Name 1-

ct other pairs of servers, if required.

5. Click OK.

1.6 ta Display

1.6.1 tarting SIMATIC IT Historian Data Display from Zone Monitoring Environment

2. According to the file type you selected you access the SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager Display, Alarm Acknowledge Services or Text Editor environments.

Configuring the connection to the Alarm Manager server

EAth

The server/s to which the clients must connect can be configured also inEnvironment.

t nfiguring the servers make sure that the SIMATient and the SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface module are not running

ault zone.

To configure the connection to the AM server:

Select command Configuration > Alarm Manager Connections Configuration in the ZoMonitoring Environment or Configuration > Alarm Manager > AMD Connections in

ATIC IT Management Console; the Connections Configuration dialog box appears;

Select the pair of servers to which the clients must connect from the Computer Name 1mputer Name 2 list boxes:

- if the server selected from the Computer Name 1 list box is configured in hot backup, select the name of the corresponding slave server from the Computer Name 2 li

- if the server selected from the Computer Name 1 list box is NOT cbackup, select (None) from the Computer Name 2 list box.

Computer Name 2 box.

4. Repeat steps from 2 to 3 to sele

Historian Da

S

Click the button on the Zone Monitoring Environment toolbar to gain access to the SIMATIC lay environment.

1.6.2

o create a HDD file:

IT Historian Data Disp

Creating a Historian Data Display file

T

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 24

1. Select command File > New in the Zone Monitoring Environment.

3. Click OK. You access the SIMATIC IT Historian Data Display environment.

Tip

ore rchive and Historical Data Display: User’s Guide

1.6.3 Op

To open a

1. Select command File > Open

2. In the New dialog box click the Historical Trend button.

For m information, see manual SIMATIC IT Plant Data A

ening a Historian Data Display file

HDD file:

in the Zone Monitoring Environment.

re the files you want to open are stored. The irectories are available for SIMATIC IT Historian Data Display:

- \DATA\USER which contains the trend and workspace files.

\DATA\TEXT which contains the process data configuration files.

Select the file from the File Name box.

Or

1. In the Data – User Files window double click the file name you want to open.

2. According to the file type you selected you access the SIMATIC IT Historian Data Display ironments.

1.7 Working

1.7.1 The

modules, compiled modules, libraries and databases that ontribute to creating an application program:

environmen

e automatically created in the SIMATIC IT Management Console environment hen you define a Unit and has the same name assigned to the Unit. The same Project can be

ciated to more than one Unit.

SIMATIC IT Management Console provides a

2. In the Open dialog box select the directory whefollowing d

-

3.

4. Click OK

or Text Editor env

with Projects

Project

PDE allows a programmer to organize his application programs into Projects.

A Project is made up of all the source c

Therefore, if you want to use the programming t, you must create a Project.

A Project can bwasso

window from which you can manage your projects.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 25

1.7.2

1. ATIC IT Management Console, click the

Creating a new Project

To create a new Project:

In SIM tab.

the shortcut menu.

. The New Project wizard is displayed.

4. Enter the name to be assigned to the project (maximum 8 characters) in the Project Name

added to the project tree.

Tip ore velopment Environment, see manual

s Guide

1.7.3

2. Right click the Projects folder and choose command New from

3

box.

5. Click OK. The icon of the Project is

For m information on the Project DeControl Environment Programming User’

Viewing the Projects

To view the Projects defined for the current Plant:

1. In SIMATIC IT Management Console, click the tab

2. Double click the Projects folders to expand the project tree.

. The icons of all the projects defined for the current Plant are displayed.

to launch the Project Development Environment and edit the project.

1.7.4

3

You can click a project icon

Removing a Project

To remove a Project from the project tree:

1. In SIMATIC IT Management Console, click the tab.

. Double click the Projects folder to expand the tree.

3. Right click a project and choose command Delete from the shortcut menu.

message Do you really want to delete it?

project tree.

1.7.5

To ame to an existing Project:

2

4. Click Yes to confirm the

5. The icon of the Project is removed from the

Renaming a Project

assign a new n

1. In SIMATIC IT Management Console, click the tab.

Double click the Projects folder to expand the tree. 2.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 26

3. Right click a project and choose command Rename from the shortcut menu or click the project name.

s ENTER.

1.7.6

1. ATIC IT Management Console, click the

4. Type the new name, and then pres

Copying a Project

To copy a Project to the project tree:

In SIM tab.

. Right click a project and choose command Copy from the shortcut menu.

4. The Copy Project wizard is displayed.

ximum 8 characters) in the Project Name box.

6. Click . The icon of the Project is added to the project tree.

1.8 Progra

1.8.1 ents

hree programming environments to help you satisfy all of the control and upervision requirements of a modern automation system:

1.8.2 o Environment

environment specifically esigned to develop control applications. It offers three proprietary programming languages ter, Ladder and Block Diagram) and the tools required to edit, compile and transfer programs

RTDS/IMC User Units in order to:

process data read from non-proprietary external devices

TIC IT automatically associates a new or existing Project to each

DE environment can be dynamically associated to various gical Units.

2. Double click the Projects folder to expand the tree.

3

5. Enter the name to be assigned to the project (ma

OK

mming environments

SIMATIC IT Programming Environm

SIMATIC IT provides ts

• Control Programming Environment

• Supervisory Programming Environment

• API Environment

C ntrol Programming

PDE Project Development Environment is the programmingd(Ito the P.M.C. controllers, where they will be executed.

This environment can be also used with

• simulate a virtual P.M.C.

•

PDE manages projects. SIMAUnit configured in programming mode.

Therefore any project defined in the Plo

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 27

For more information on how to run the PDE environment from a CONTROL Unit, see Running PDE from a CONTROL Unit.

For more information on how to run the PDE environment from an RTDS/IMC Unit, see Running

1.8.3

rom the Plant configuration environment (SIMATIC IT Management Console) you can define butes of CONTROL or RTDS/IMC

Unit.

ure

1. Select co C IT Management Console.

. Click the Plant Configuration tab in the System Configuration window.

of the buttons related to the Variable Insertion Mode attribute:

Guid atabase to check if the

arning messages are issued if incompatibilities are detected.

Not Guided The program does not check the variables for consistency. You can access the Points Database in read-only mode.

1.8.4 OL Unit

ImportanThe Unit must be configured in programming mode. For more information, see Configuring a NTROL Unit .

1.

PDE from an RTDS/IMC User Unit.

Configuring the programming mode of a Unit

Fattri PDE, which will be applied each time you run PDE from a

the programming mode of aTo config Unit:

mmand Configuration > System in SIMATI

2

3. Select one

ed The program always reads the Points Dvariables are defined and consistent. W

4. Click OK.

Running PDE from a CONTR

t

CO

To run PDE from a CONTROL Unit:

Click the tab in the SIMATIC IT Management Console window.

Select the Co2. ntrol Unit icon and choose command Unit > Programming Environment

or

Double click the Control Unit icon to expand the unit tree.

3. Double click the Program or Project icon or expand the Management item and then double click the Project Development Environment icon.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 28

The Project Development Environment is launched and the project previously associated to the Unit is opened.

er’s Guide

1.8.5

Important The Unit mus in , see Configuring a

To

the

Tip

For more information on the Project Development Environment, see manual Control Environment Programming Us

Running PDE from an RTDS/IMC User Unit

t be configured in programm g mode. For more informationn RTDS/IMC User Unit.

run PDE from a RTDS/IMC User Unit:

1. Click tab in the SIMATIC IT Management Console window.

2. Select the RTDS Unit icon and choose command Unit > Programming Environment

or

Double click the RTDS Unit icon to expand the unit tree.

3. Double click the Program or Project icon or expand the Management item and then the Project Development Environment ico

The Project Development Environment is launched and the project previously associated to thUnit is opened.

n.

e

For more Control En

associated n RTDS/IMC Unit, the les must al running. These modules

process data stored in this

1.8.6 Ru

ns a roject to each Unit configured in programming mode. The project can be new or already exist.

To run PDE from a Project:

, click the

Tip

information on the Project Development Environment, see manual vironment Programming User’s Guide.

Note When you activate PDE to manage a project with aSIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server and-IMC modu so behandle the SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server memory area andarea, respectively.

nning PDE from a Project

PDE handles Projects. SIMATIC IT Management Console and Historian automatically assigp

tab 1. In SIMATIC IT Management Console

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 29

2. Double click the Projects folders to expand the project tree.

3. Double click a project

4. If the project is not currently associated with any Unit, you will be prompted to choose a Unit to which the project will be assigned.

Tip For more infoControl Environment Programming User’s Guide

erful data-processing engine designed pervision. This module allows you to

any external device, and then makes them ngine M r simplifies the management

s rs, alarm processing and various other kinds of data.

You can Us

. tarting the SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Engine Manager

5. The Project Development Environment is launched and the project is opened.

rmation on the Project Development Environment, see manual

1.8.7 Data manipulation and aggregation

SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Engine Manager is a powto satisfy calculation needs related to monitoring and suexecute sophisticated processing on data read fromavailable to the supervision tools. Real Time Data E anageof calculated variable , trigge

run the Real Time Data Engine Manager environment from a Real Time Data Engine er Unit.

1 8.8 S

To start SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Engine Manager:

1. In SIMATIC IT Management Console, click the tab.

2. Select a RTDEM Unit.

3. Select command Unit > Real Time Data Engine > Start Real Time Data Engine. or Expand the Unit tree, then expand the Management nd double click the SIMATIC item aIT Real Time Data Engine Manager icon.

Importan

To execute the tasks created in the SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Engine Manager engine with command Unit > Real Time

ngine in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

Tip For more T Real Time Data Engine Manager environmeGuide.

t

environment, you must start the run-timeData Engine > Start Real Time Data E

information on the SIMATIC Int, see the manual Supervisory Environment Programming User's

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 30

1.8.9 P

ovides the software libraries, the tools and ocumentation required to develop programs to be integrated into the SIMATIC IT environment,

which perform custom functions, supply new communications interfaces with PCs and field modules in order to

Programs can be created using high-level languages such as C and C++, which support the C-tandard conventions for calling routines.

llowing environments:

Tip For more info r’s Guide.

1.8.10 Configuring

Se me Data Server, processes it and mory area.

configur

IT Management Console, click the

A I Environment

The Application Programming Interface (API) prd

devices or even replace standard SIMATIC IT components with custommeet specific requirements.

s

APIs are supplied for the fo

• System Enabler (data management)

• Alarms Management

• Historical Trends Management

rmation, see the manual Application Programming Interface Use

IMC

IMC is a virtual controller which acquires data, reading it from the SIMATIC IT Real Time Data rver memory area managed by SIMATIC IT Real Ti

generates output values which will be written to the same me

To e IMC:

1. In SIMATIC tab.

. Select an RTDS 2 Unit.

3. Select command Unit > Integral Multifunction Controller > IMC Configuration

e, then expand the Management or Expand the Unit tre item and double click the IMC

ion Configurat icon.

4. In the IMC Configuration dialog box enter the controller cycle time (in milliseconds) in the .

- Ru- St any program

. Click OK.

1.8.11 Starting IMC

o start IMC:

Tick box. This value cannot be less than 500 ms

5. In the Start Mode area select the IMC start-up attribute:

n IMC executes the last program transmitted op IMC does not execute

6

T

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 31

1. In SIMATIC IT Management Console, click the tab.

2. Select the icon of the RTDS/IMC Unit you want to use.

3. Select command Unit > Integral Multifunction Controller > Start IMC.

4. The IMC module is started.

ImportanThis commcomputer n me as the current workstation n

IMC has no user interface. To check if IMC is running (two IMC instances cannot be started

To tion, see Management Console Tasklist.

1.8.12

ssociated with the selected Unit:

• Select command Unit > Operation Debugging Support

t and is enabled only if you have selected an RTDS/IMC Unit and if the ame assigned to the logical Unit is the sa

ame.

concurrently on the same workstation) view the Management Console Tasklist in the System olbox. For more informa

Debugging a program

To start the ODS Operation Debugging Support module for the application program a

in SIMATIC IT Management

In the

Console

or

window, double click a Unit, then expand the Management item and double click the Debug

• icon.

in

f all the variables used by a program while the program is at to each variable and change its value in run-time.

Tip For more information, see manuals Control Environment Programming Users Guide and Su ing Users Guide.

1.

he Dump/Restore Control Panel utility allows you to save the contents of some P.M.C. data-torage registers on a file and, if necessary, to restore the saved data.

To launch this utility, do as follows:

1. Click the

ODS is the tool offered by SIMATIC IT to debug and correct the application programs created the PDE or SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Engine programming environments.

With ODS you can view the values orunning, apply a different display form

pervisory Environment Programm

8.13 Dumping/restoring a control panel

Ts

tab in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

2. Select a CONTROL or RTDS Unit, expand the tree and double click the Management item.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 32

3. Double click the Dump icon.

Tip For more information, see manual Control Environment Programming User's Guide.

1.8.14 ransmitting a program to the controller

To transmit a program to the P.M.C. or virtual controller CPU:

Select command Unit > Transmission Control Panel

T

in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

or

In the window, double click an RTDS or P.M.C. Unit, then expand the e item and double click the Transmit Managem nt icon.

Tip

For more info ntrol Environment Programming User’s Guide.

1.9

1.9.1 Starting SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface from Zone Monitoring

rmation, see manual Co

Graphic User Interface

Environment

Click the icon on the ZoIT Graphic User Interface Develo

ne Monitoring Environment toolbar to have access to the SIMATIC pment environment, where you can:

Compile multiple graphic panels

•

UI Development from the Zone

• Create a graphic panel

• Open a graphic panel

• Compile a graphic panel

•

Also, you can configure some default attributes of SIMATIC IT GMonitoring Environment.

1.9.2 Creating a graphic panel

To create a graphic panel:

1. Select command File > New in Zone Monitoring Environment.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 33

2.

3. i pment environment.

Tip

For more info SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface: User

1.9.3

o open a graphic panel:

In the New dialog box select the Graphic Panel button.

Cl ck OK to access the SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface Develo

rmation on creating graphic panels, see manual ’s Guide.

Opening a graphic panel

T

1. Select command File > Open in Zone Monitoring Environment.

2. In the Open dialog box select the directory where the files you want to open are stored.

ilable for SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface:

- \GRAPH\SOURCES which contains graphic source files (.grs)

- \GRAPH\LIB which contains graphic object libraries.

In either case you have access to the SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface Development environment.

1.9.4

elect command File > Compile in Zone Monitoring Environment to start the graphic panel ompiler for the selected file.

ob points assigned to the objects are defined in the Unit database.

dia g Report box with the

1.9.5

a file with .grm extension hich contains the names of the source files to be compiled.

The following directories are ava

- \GRAPH\TEXT which contains text files used by SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface

3. Select the file from the File Name box.

4. Click OK.

Or

In the Graph – Source Files window, double click the name of the file you want to open.

Compiling a graphic panel

Sc

The compiler optimizes the instructions inserted in the file, verifies the attributes assigned to the jects and checks if the

When you start the compiler, the SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface environment displays a log box with the compilation percentage and then the Compilin

compilation results, the error and warning messages.

Compiling multiple graphic panels

To compile more than one graphic panel at a time you must create w

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 34

1. Select the Build command from the Tools menu in Zone Monitoring Environment. The Build dialog box appears.

2. Select the source files to be added to the .grm file from the Graphic Panels list box.

Modules list

Files window in Zone Monitoring Environment.

and from the File menu.

Tip For more information, see manual SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface: User’s

1.9.6

ent :

Defining the SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface page configuration

Configuring Dynamic Link Libraries (DLLs)

Configuring the source files backup

1.9.7 Showing/hiding the grid and defining the step

To show/hide the grid and define the step:

ration in the Zone Monitoring Environment. The Development Configuration dialog box appears.

x to show or hide the grid respectively.

ImportantThe distanthe grid must be between 1

For more information, see manual SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface: User’s Guide.

To create a .grm file:

3. Click the Add button. The selected files are automatically added to the Buildbox. Click Remove to remove one or more files from the list.

4. Enter the name of the .grm file in the Build File box.

To compile multiple graphic panels:

1. Select the .grm file from the Graph – Source

2. Select the Compile comm

Guide.

Configuring SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface Development

Some default attributes of the SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface Development Environmcan be configured in the Zone Monitoring Environment. These attributes include

•

•

• Showing/hiding the grid

• Enabling/disabling the snap

•

1. Select command Configuration > GUI Development Configu

2. In the Grid area, check or uncheck the On bo

3. Enter the distance between the grid points in the Step X and Step Y boxes.

ce between the intersection points of the horizontal and vertical axes of

0 and 50 pixels.

Tip

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 35

1. Enabling/disabling the snap and defining the step

1. Select command Configuration > GUI Development Configuration in Zone Monitoring Environment. The Development Configuration dialog box appears.

tively.

values for

ImportanThe step v u must be between 2 and 50 pixels.

Tip For more information, see manual SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface: User’s

1.9.9

n defining the GUI page configuration, you can perform the following settings:

•

1.

objects and points that can be inserted into a graphic panel. The aximum limit has been set at 10,000 objects and 5,000 points. Only users with the MANAGER

ss level can modify these limits.

To define the maximum number of objects and points:

. Select the command Configuration > GUI Development Configuration in Zone Monitoring Environment. The Development Configuration dialog box appears.

ImportanThe defaumaximum

Tip For more e manual SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface: User’s Guide.

9.8

To enable/disable the snap and define the step:

2. In the Snap area, check or uncheck the On box to enable or disable the snap respec

3. Enter the cursor step in the Step X and Step Y boxes. You can choose differentthe horizontal and vertical axis.

t al e on either axis of the grid

Guide.

Defining the SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface page configuration

Whe

• Define the maximum number of objects and points

• Establish the maximum number of displayable panels

Lock objects in the panel

• Log all operator actions by default

9.10 Defining the maximum number of objects and points

You can modify the number ofmacce

1

2. In the Limits area enter the maximum number of Objects and Points that can be configuredin a graphic panel.

t lt values (1024 objects and 512 points) represent the recommended limits for each graphic panel.

information, se

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 36

1. Defining the maximum number of graphic panels that can be displayed at e same time

To define the maximum number of graphic panels that can be displayed simultaneously:

GUI Development Configuration in Zone Monitoring Environment. The guration dialog box appears.

box , enter the maximum number of graphic

3. Click

Tip For more information, see manual SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface: User’s Guide.

1.9.12 ocking objects in the panel

To lock objects in the panel:

ment Configuration in Zone Monitoring Environment. The Development Configuration dialog box appears.

ck box to prevent objects from being dragged outside

3. Click

Tip For more Guide.

The Development Configuration dialog box appears.

. Select the Log by default check box to log all operator actions by default.

info

9.11 th

1. Select command Configuration > Development Confi

2. In the Max no. simult. displayed panelspanels that you intend to display at the same time (max. 8).

. OK

L

1. Select command Configuration > GUI Develop

2. Select the Out of video objects chethe workspace.

OK.

information, see manual SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface: User’s

1.9.13 Logging all operator actions by default

To log all operator actions by default:

1. Select command Configuration > GUI Development Configuration in Zone Monitoring Environment.

2

3. Click OK.

You can also choose whether to log the operator actions for each individual button. For morermation, see the SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface documentation.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 37

1.

Dynamic Link Libraries (DLLs) contain custom procedures created by the user to meet specific quirements. These files must be copied into the system directory (by default \ICUBESYS\BIN)

and then configured, before being called with an appropriate button ("DLL Interface") from a

le in the DLL Name box.

. Click the Add >> button to add the file name to the list box. Click << Remove to remove DLLs you no longer need from the list.

For more information, see manual SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface: User’s

1.9.15 source files backup

ackup copy (.bak extension) of the graphic panel each time you save it:

onitoring Environment. The Development Configuration dialog box appears.

1.10

1.10.1

you can disable this option setting the tartup parameters.

The System Toolbox is always displayed on top of all other applications.

Y > System

Toolbox in SIMATIC IT Management Console or by clicking the

9.14 Configuring Dynamic Link Libraries (DLLs)

re

graphic panel.

To configure DLLs:

1. Select command Configuration > GUI Development Configuration in Zone Monitoring Environment. The Development Configuration dialog box appears.

2. In the DLL area enter the name of the DLL fi

3

Tip

Guide.

Configuring the

To create a b

1. Select command Configuration > GUI Development Configuration in Zone M

2. In the Panel area, check the File .Bak box.

Miscellaneous elements of SIMATIC IT Services

System Toolbox

By default, SIMATIC IT Management Console displays the System Toolbox toolbar upon SIMATIC IT Management Console startup. However,s

ou can disable this toolbar whenever you want by choosing command Services

tab in SIMATIC IT Management Console, expanding the System folder and double stem Toolbox.

on which the System Toolbox label and the system ch button is associated with one of the

e related application is running. All buttons e application is currently minimized, you switch to the application

-clicking Sy

The System Toolbox consists of a title bar, time appear, and a toolbar with several buttons: eaSIMATIC IT components and appears only if thoperate in toggle mode: if th

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 38

and the application window will be maximized; if the application is currently maximized, it will be default, the System Toolbox shows the following three buttons. Those which refer

s are inserted in run time. minimized. Byto the other application

: Click this button to switch to SIMATIC IT Management Console.

: Click this button to view the Management Console Tasklist that displays all SIMATIC IT applications currently running on your workstation.

: Click this button to view the SIMATIC IT Management Console Online Help.

1.10.2

o enable the System Toolbox at start-up:

the System Toolbox check box.

4. Click OK.

on, when you start SIMATIC IT Managolbox toolbar is loaded.

Task

click the

Enabling the System Toolbox at startup

T

1. Enter the System Configuration window.

2. Select the Start Up tab.

3. Select

With this optiSystem To

ement Console and log on to a Plant, the

1.10.3 Management Console list

To display the Management Console Tasklist dialog box, button on the System in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

he Management Console Task List tab lists all the SIMATIC IT applications currently running n your workstation.

llowing operations:

To

Toolbox bar or on the main toolbar

To

Within the Management Console Task List tab, you can perform the fo

Action

select an activ application and switch to it Choose the application name from the list and click

terminate an a

add a new tas x and click the Run button.

display SIMATIC IT ations runni n another workstation,

d on SIM

(reserved for future use) Choose a name from the Computer Name list box.

list of S ions currently our w

orkstati

Click the Refresh button.

Importan

ethe Switch To button.

pplication Choose the application name from the list and click the End Task button.

k to the applications list Enter any valid command in the New Task bo

(reserved for future use)applic ng oconfigure ATIC IT Network Configuration refresh the IMATIC IT applicatrunning on y orkstation or (reserved for futureuse) the w on you are connected to

t

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 39

The End Task button is enabled only for SIMATIC IT applications with no user interface (e.g. IMCRTDS, PDA, AM, ...) or for OLE server modules, such as AMD and HDD.command

served for future use) The Remote Control tab shows the computer name of the orkstation to which the current workstation is connected in the Currently connected to area.

m tab, you can perform the following operations:

Click

All other applications must be terminated using the appropriate on their menu bar.

(Rew

Within the Re ote Control

To

Logoff Log off from the Plant to <-Logon Log o

which the current workstation is connected. Plant. gramming systems.

n to a Shutdown Close all pro

efresh the are connecte

1.10.4 System Info

If you select co lp > System Information in SIMATIC IT Management Console the ystem Information dialog box containing information related to your SIMATIC IT workstation

is displayed:

Refresh R list of SIMATIC IT applications currently running on the workstation you d to.

rmation

mmand HeSappears.

By clicking the Miscellaneous tab, the following information

In the Management DescriptionConsole Information area:Key Serial Number

ion on how to install the hardware key see Installing the Protection Key

Arcnet Node

Computer NaStand Alone YES indicates that SIMATIC IT Management Console stand-alone

startup has been configured. For more information, see Enabling

Plant resides on Computer name of the workstation where the Plant is located and to which the current workstation is connected. C e of the workstation to which the current workstation is connected.

Serial number and type of the hardware key installed on the workstation. For more informat

Number Node number of the Arcnet network adapter. This data is available only if your workstation is connected to an Arcnet network. For more information, see Monitoring network nodes.

me Computer name of the workstation, defined during Windows installation.

SIMATIC IT stand-alone start-up .

Currently Connected to omputer nam

In the Memory Status area: Description Physical Memory Installed T

e TTmemora ld o

click th files which are not matching the s files contained in the Bin directory, before and

he physical memory installed on your computer. Physical Memory Availabl Total Virtual Memory

he physical memory not yet used. he space on your hard disk that Windows uses as if it were actually

y. The benefit of using virtual memory is that you can run more pplications at one time than your system’s physical memory woutherwise allow.

You can e Check Management Console files button to display the list of installation. This table show

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 40

after installation and installation date/time for each file are displayed issing is displayed.

cking the Hard n is displayed:

In the System Hardware

of a new program version. The size (in bytes) . For the files not present in the updated version the string m

By cli ware tab, the following informatio

Information area:Description

Processor Specifies the processor name. Number of processors Specifies the number of processors present on your computer.

r ar processor. r Sp sor speed (in megahertz).

Active proce

Processor lev es the system’s architecture-dependent processor level. Processor reMinimum app ess accessible to applications and

dynamic-link libraries (DLLs). Maximum apaddress

to applications and

OEM id Page size ity of page protection and

CPU Manufac er name.

TIC IT

SIM

Wh ou on as

Processo chitecture Specifies the type ofProcesso eed Specifies the proces

ssor mask Specifies a mask representing the set of processors configured into the system. Bit 0 is processor 0; bit 31 is processor 31.

el Specifivision Specifies the processor revision. lication address Pointer to the lowest memory addr

plication Pointer to the highest memory address accessibledynamic-link libraries (DLLs). Specifies the Original Equipment Manufacturer Id. Specifies the page size and the granularcommitment.

turer Specifies the CPU manufactur

1.11 User Management

1.11.1 Logging on to SIMA

From SIMATIC IT Management Console you can log on to all components making up the ATIC IT suite.

en you start SIMATIC IT Management Console for the very first time, the system logs yDEFAULT user, with very limited rights.

To appropriately start and configure your system, you must:

• Switch to full-authorization mode by pressing the SHITF+ESC keys and entering the pre-defined username MANAGER (no password).

• Define the appropriate user profiles and the related rights

• Log on with a user other than default

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 41

1.11.2 in atic l

Procedure

. Select the File > New > User

Configur g autom ogoff

1 command in the User Manager environment; or select a

user in the User Manager - User View and then select the Edit > Modify command (oright-click and select the Modify command from th

r e shortcut menu ), the New User or

Modify user dialog boxes are displayed, respectively.

dialog box is displayed.

3. Click the Timeout check box in the Automatic Logoff area.

e spin button.

the Apply button to exit the Advanced dialog box.

atically logs off any user that has been ole longer than the configured time interval.

1.11.3

rname

2. Click the Advanced button: the Advanced

4. Enter the number of minutes (1-1440) after which the system will automatically logoff the user in the Minutes edit box or select a value clicking th

5. To notify the user before logging off, click the Confirm before logoff check box.

6. Click

Note When this option is selected, the system automconnected to SIMATIC IT Management Cons

Predefined logon users

SIMATIC IT Services come with two pre-defined users:

Use Password AuthorizationsDefault none Only start the SIMATIC IT Plant Management

and Management Console environments and view graphic panels.

ger none All administrative rights.

s and profiles and

1.11.4 Defining the automatic logon user

When you start SIMATIC IT, the system logs on automatically using the system user Default

edit box. This name must already have been defined as a SIMATIC IT user or must be one of the pre-defined users (Manager or Operator).

5. Enter, if required, the password that uniquely identifies the user in the Password edit box. Characters are replaced with stars as you type.

Mana

From the User Management tool you can then define additional user groupassign them the appropriate rights.

(password RETURN), if no other information is available.

However, you can configure the name and password of the user that must be used for automatic logon, as follows:

1. Enter the System Configuration window.

2. Select the Workstation tab.

3. Select the Automatic User Logon checkbox.

4. Enter the username in the User

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 42

The user you M

have just defined will be available the next time you log on to SIMATIC IT anagement Console.

1.11.5

r automatic logon, the system logs on to d RETURN), which has

To default, do as follows:

keys; the User Logon dialog box appears.

. Insert the user name and password in the User and Password edit boxes respectively;

3. Click the OK button to log on.

1.11.6 e user password

Important You must configure an appropriate option, in order for a user to be allowed to

/her password.

However, theconfigurat

Procedure . Press the SHIFT+ESC keys; the User Logon dialog box opens.

Change Password dialog box opens.

. Enter the new password in the Password edit box and then type it again in the Confirm Password edit box to check that the previously entered string is correct. Characters are replaced with stars as you type.

ing user password modification

By default, only the ssword,con

Important If you do not select the Automatic Logon option, the system will always log on to SIMATIC IT Management Console with the Default user.

Logging on to SIMATIC IT with a user other than "Default"

If you have not configured a user to be used foSIMATIC IT Management Console with the Default username (passworaccess rights to limited resources.

log on with a user other than the

1. Press the SHIFT+ESC

2

Modifying th

change his

MANAGER user can always change his password, regardless of his ion

1

2. Enter the user name in the User edit box.

3. Click the Change button; the

4

5. Click the OK button.

1.11.7 Allow

Manager user can always change his pa regardless of his figuration.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 43

Othpa

Procedure

er users must be appropriately configured in order for them to be allowed to modify their ssword:

1. Enter the User Management environment (command Tools > User Manager).

2. Create a new user (command Edit > New > User ) or modify an existing user (comman

Edit >Modify

d

or right click the user name and select Modify on the shortcut menu).

the 3. In area, select the ssword check box.

ot allowed to change his/her password, the Change button in the User Logon dialog box (SHIFT+ESC) is disabled.

Procedure

Account Settings User can change pa

If a user is n

1.11.8 Configuring the password expiry date

1. Select the File > New > User command in the User Manager environment; or select a

user in the User View and then select the Edit > Modify command (or double click the he ), the New

2. Click the Advanced button: the Advanced dialog box opens.

k b

. Enter the number of days (0-34463) after which the password is no longer valid in the Days edit box or select a number by clicking the spin button.

ting before check box of days in the Days edit box or select a number by clicking the

spin button.

1.12

1.12.1 verview of User Manager

rovided by SIMATIC IT Services to manage users and groups nment.

user name or right-click and select the Modify command on t shortcut menuUser or Modify user dialog boxes are displayed, respectively.

3. In the Temporal Expiration area, select the Password expires in chec ox.

4

5. If you want to be advised before the password expires, click the Waiand then enter the number

6. Click the Apply button to exit the Advanced dialog box.

User Manager tool

O

The User Manager is a tool pwithin the SIMATIC IT enviro

The user can access the User Manager environment simply by selecting the Tools > User

Manager command in the Plant Management or in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

The User Manager environment contains three different views:

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 44

• User View, displaying existing users (View >Show > Users command).

• Group View, displaying existing groups (View > Show > Groups command).

• Scenario View, displaying existing groups (View > Show > Scenario comman

d).

Important

ary to save changes by selecting the File > Save It is necess command before qui

All chang rformed within the User Manager environment (e.g. i are

tra hese records can be viewed by selecting the View > Show >

tting the User Manager environment.

es made and operations pedefining, modifying, deleting users groups and scenarios, as well as policy account sett ngs)

ced as Audit Trail records. T

Audit Trail Viewer menu command or by clicking the Audit Trail Viewer button on the olbar.

1.12.2 Filtering the contents

In the User Manager environment (command Tools > User Manager from Plant Management ing e

ps View, this dialog box is composed of two columns: Group Name and escription.

sed of three columns: User Name, Full Name and

View, this dialog box is composed of three columns: Scenario Name, d Members.

Procedure column that you wish to set the filter on.

. Type the search criteria. The word can be typed completely or in part (either the first few letters or by using an asterisk)

button on the right side of the cell

to

or from SIMATIC IT Management Console) it is possible to set the filter criteria when searchfor an item contained within the columns. This way, you can see only the items that match thsearch criteria.

In the GrouD

In the Users View, this dialog box is compoGroups.

In the ScenarioDescription an

1. Select the cell under the

2

3. To see the search result, press Enter, select the , or simply wait a few seconds.

4. The search results will be shown in the cells below.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 45

1.13 Working with groups

1.13.1 Groups

IMATIC IT Services control access to the diverse functions offered by the system through so c roup has specific access rights to the

IT system. SIMATIC User Manager tool for the management

ps a

inistrators

r

vel Operator

erator

Maintenance Operator

1.13.2 Resources of the Administrators group

remove the resources.

owever, if you select the Only administration rights for Administrator Group option in the ount dialog box (Menu ce associated with

Administrators group will be ac ools, bearing the

Sgroups, to which specific re ur es are assigned. A gSIMATIC IT Services provide theof groups.

The following default grou re available:

• Adm

• Develope

• High Le

• Low Level Op

•

By default the Administrators group has been assigned all the resources available and it is not possible to modify or

HPolicy Acc Edit> Policy Account), the only resour

the cess to administrative t symbol in the Selected area of the General tab th g box.

ve this resource, but you can add or remove other resources according to your preferences.

• Access to • System Configuration • Alarm Con u • Enable GUI Menu Bar • Load Grap • Hardware Configuration • Edit DB, User Libr ects • Modify and Save Configurations • Historical ends Configuration • Modify, Save, Compile Source Files • Modify Configurations (without Saving) • Print from Graphics, Alarm, Historical Environments

• Run Histo• Run Applic• Browse So

in e Modify group dialo

Note It is not possible to remo

1.13.3 Resources of the Developer group

By default the Developer group has been assigned the resources listed below. However you can update this group if you belong to the Administrators group (e.g. if you are the Manager user).

Operating System Shell fig ration hic Panels

aries, ProjTr

• PMC Operations • Run Alarms • Program Transmission • Run ODS

rical Trends • Set Variables from GUI ations from GUI • Set Variables from Ladder, Block Diagram, ODS urce Files

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 46

1.13.4 Resources of the High Level Oper o

he High Level Operator group has rces listed below. u can update this group if you b dministrators group (e.g. if you are user).

• Load Grap ic Panels • Modify Configurations (without Saving) • Run Alarms • Run Historical Trends

DS • Set Variables from GUI riab gram,

ODS

1.13.5 Resources of the Low Level Operator group

Low Level Operator group has been assigned the resources listed below.

the

•

•

1.13.6 r group

y default the Maintenance Operator group has been assigned the resources listed below.

• Enable GU• Modify Co PMC Operations • Print from Graphics, Alarm, Historical Environments • Program Transmission • Run Alarms • Load Graphic Panels

isto • Run ODS • Set Variables from Ladder, Block Diagram, ODS

• Browse Source Files

1.13.7

tors gro e Access to Administrative Tools resource).

at r group

By default tHowever yo

been assigned the resouelong to the A

the Manager

h

• Run O• Set Va les from Ladder, Block Dia

By default the However you can update this group if you belong to the Administrators group (e.g. if you are

Manager user).

Load Graphic Panels

• Run Historical Trends

Run Alarms

Resources of the Maintenance Operato

BHowever you can update this group if you belong to the Administrators group (e.g. if you are the Manager user).

I Menu Bar • Hardware Configuration

nfigurations (without Saving) •

• Run H rical Trends • Set Variables from GUI

Creating a group

You can create a new group only if your user name has been associated to the Administraup (or to an equivalent group owning th

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 47

Procedu re

1. Start the User Manager tool by selecting the Tools > User Manager command in Plant Management or in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

2. Select the File > New > Group command or click the New Group button on the olbaThe New Group dialog box opens.

to r.

and

. Click the Local Resources tab to assign local resources to the new group.

6. Click the OK button to confirm this operation.

om scratch you can create a new group using the definition

of an existing group, by selecting a group and then the Edit > Copy

3. Enter the name of the new group (an alphanumerical string up to 15 characters) in the Group Name edit box.

4. Select the system resources of the new group from the System Resources list box, then click the Add> button.

5

In addition to defining a new group fr

command. (or by right-Copy command from the displayed shortcut menu ). The Copy you are prompted to enter a new group name and then you can

1.13.8 Removing a group

Procedure

ager

clicking and selecting the Group dialog box opens: modify all group configuration parameters.

1. In the User Manager - Group View environment (command Tools > User Man in terest.

2.

Plant Management or SIMATIC IT Management Console) select the group of in

Select command Edit > Delete , or right-click and select the Delete command on thshortcut menu , or press the DEL key.

e

1.13.9 Di

Procedure

. In the User Manager - User View environment (command Tools > User Manager

3. Click the Yes button to confirm this operation.

splaying the groups of a user

1 in ect the user of interest.

command Edit > Modify

Plant Management or SIMATIC IT Management Console) sel

2. Select or double-click the user name or right-click and select the Modify command on the shortcut menu .

rship tab: the groups box.

3. The Modify user dialog box opens. Select the Group membeassociated with the current user are displayed in the Selected Groups list

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 48

1.14

1.14.1 Defining

1. Select the Tools > User Manager

Working with users

a user

You can define a new user only if your user name has been associated to the Administrators group (or to an equivalent group owning the Access to Administrative Tools resource).

Procedure

command in Plant Management or SIMATIC IT Management Console to start the User Manager environment.

2. Select command File > New > User ; the New User dialog box is displayed.

Enter the user name In the User Name edit box. By default, the name proposed by Us3. er Manager is composed of 3 alphabetical characters, the pound sign and a progressive

4. log ager-Group View dialog box).

a, if required, enter the password in the Password re replaced with stars as you type.

6. Enter the password again in the Confirm Password edit box to check if the previously ct.

Important that it is possible to block the user by setting the dedicated

parameters. For mo

tio

• logon (expiry date, updating,. . . )

• The possibility for the user to change his/her password

user

In addition to defining a new user from scratch you can create a new user using the definition of

ser, by selecting an existing user and then the Edit > Copy

number (e.g. USR#21). However, the user can modify the name.

(Optional) Enter a comment in the Full Name edit box (User Manager-User View diabox) or the Description edit box (User Man

5. Operating in the Account Settings areedit box. Characters a

entered string is corre

Rememberre information on how to lock a user, see Locking a user.

You can then select one or more op nal parameters related to:

Changing the password at the following

• The user account

• The possibility of unlocking a locked

• Associating a user to a group

an existing u command (or by

con

right-clicking and selecting the Copy command on the shortcut menu ). The Copy User dialog box is displayed: you are prompted to enter a new user name and then you can modify all

figuration parameters.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 49

1.14.2

Procedure

nment (command Tools > User Manager

Modifying the properties of a user

1. In the User Manager - User View enviro in nt Console) select the user of interest.

command Edit > Modify

Plant Management or SIMATIC IT Manageme

2. Select , or double-click the user name, or right-click and select the Modify command on the shortcut menu ; the Modify User dialog box opens and displays the properties of the current user.

4. Click the OK button.

Procedure

3. Update the parameters of interest.

1.14.3 Removing a user

1. In the User Manager-User View environment (command Tools > User Manager in Plant Management or SIMATIC IT Management Console), select the user of interest.

2. Select command Edit > Delete , or right-click and select the Delete command on the shortcut menu or press the DEL key.

1.14.4

ach new user must be associated to a group in order to perform any operation in the SIMATIC nt.

re

3. Click the Yes button to confirm this operation.

Associating a user to a group

EIT environme

Procedu

1. Select command File > New > User in the User Manager environment or select a user

in the User Manager - User View and then select the Edit > Modify command (or right-click and select the Modify command from the shortcut menu ); the New User or Modify user dialog boxes are displayed, respectively.

2. Select the Group membership tab.

3. Select a group from the Available Groups list box and then click the Add> button. The group name is moved to the Selected Groups list box.

. Click the Resources button to display the resources assigned to the selected group. The Resources dialog box opens and displays all resources and related access levels available to the user.

ImportanEach use e group

4

t r can be associated to more than on

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 50

1.14.5 Associating o a

Procedure

1. In the User Manager - Use

a user t different group

r View environment (command Tools > User Manager in Plant Management or SIMA

2. Select command Edit > Modif

TIC IT Management Console), select the user of interest.

y , or double-click the user name, or right-click and select the Modify on th

3. The Modify user dialog box opens. Sele ps associated with the current user are displayed.

ssar old

5. Select the new group to which the ubox.

6. Click the Add> button to mo p to the Selected Groups list box.

O conf

This option allows you to blocktimes, User Manag block the entrance into the envirLock User Ac ck boassociated icon in the User Manager-User View environment will be displayed with a red line

command e shortcut menu .

ct the Group membership tab: the grou

4. If necebutton.

y, select the group from the Selected Groups list box and click the <Remove

ser is to be associated from the Available Groups list

ve the grou

7. Click the K button to irm this operation.

1.14.6 Locking a user

a user. This way, if a user inserts the wrong password several er will

count cheonment. To block a user, select the

x in the Policy Account dialog box. Once a user is blocked, the

through it , indicating that t

To unlock the user, select the dand then select the User > MoLocked check box. The user wIT.

1.14.7

Select command Edit > Policy Account in the User Manager-User View environment, the

If

his user has been disabled.

isabled user icon in the User Manager-User View dialog box dify command. In the Modify User dialog box , clear the User ill be re-enabled and will therefore be able to access SIMATIC

Rules for defining user-account options

Policy Account dialog box opens

Is Then

Check user name uniqueness

Selected User Manager suggests a default name for each new user, composed of three alphabetical characters, the pound sign and a progressive number (e.g.

ver used

sible to rename the old user names by following the same criteria of

It is also possible to copy the new user names in the Full Name cells by old ones.

Cleared User Manager will suggest this name but the user can choose whether to

USR #21). But it is also possible to insert a different name, if nebefore.

It is posthe user name automatically created by User Manager.

overwriting the

k it h it l t l dif it i t

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 51

keep it, change it completely or modify it in part.

Only Adminrights for AGroup

cess to administrative tools and it is not possible to add or remove it. Instead it is possible to add or remove the local resources on the Local Resources tab.

aves like the other groups.

Password Generation

Selected The old password (if a password has been modified by a user) will be ‘locked’ for this user only (i.e. it will not be able to be used) for a pre-defined time

Lock User Account area

Selected This option sets how many times the user can insert the wrong password g d utton to set

any times you can insert the wrong password (up to 10).

he user will always remain enabled.

Password Constraints area

Selected The area below is enabled and it is possible to define the password setting rules. These rules will be enabled from that moment on. As such, old

will continue to be valid, but if the user creates a new password or old password, he/she will have to respect the password setting

rules.

Cleared The area below is disabled

ept

1.14.8 isabling a user account

Procedure

and File > New > User

istration dministrator

Selected The only resource associated to the Administrator Group will be ac

Cleared The Administrator Group beh

area period.

before bein isabled. Click the Invalid Logon Attempts spin bhow m

Cleared There is no limit to wrong entries; t

passwords modifies an

Once the password and the user generation parameters are set, select the OK button to accthem and exit the dialog box.

D

1. Select comm from the User Manager environment or choose a

user and then select the Edit > Modify command (or right-clicommand on the shortcut menu ).

ck and select the Modify

. In the New User / Modify User dialog box that opens, select the Account not enabled

xit the dialog box.

mporarily disable a user’s access to the system.

Modify

2check box.

3. Click the OK button to e

This option can be used to te

To re-enable the user’s access, select command Edit > in the User Manager nvironment and clear the option by clicking the Account not enabled check box in the Modify

User dialog box. e

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 52

1.14.9 Displaying the users associated with a group

Procedure

1. In the User Manager - Group View environment (command Tools > User Manager in Plant Management or SIMATIC IT Management Console) select the group of interest.

2. Either select command Edit > Modify or right-click on the group and select the Modify command on the shortcut menu .

ox opens. Click the Users button.

s, displaying a list of the users associated to the group.

1.15

1.15.1 Access levels

Access levels allow you to perform a further control on the access to SIMATIC IT functions. resource, configured with different access levels, to more

groups and thus limit the access to specific functions managed by the same resource.

ach

e an d below:

Load Graphic Panels

Set Variables from Ladder, Block Diagram, ODS

chical access level

s

e with hierarchical access level

3. The Modify group dialog b

4. The Users dialog box open

Working with access levels

Actually, you can assign the same

SIMATIC IT Management Console provides 30 access levels (from 1 to 30) that can be configured as:

• Hierarchical (default)

• Exclusive

and can be assigned to e resource associated with a group.

At present you can defin Exclusive access level only for the resources liste

•

• Run SIMATIC IT Applications from GUI

• Set Variables from GUI

•

1.15.2 Hierar

Any user of a resource configured with hierarchical access level can perform all operationrelated to this resource IF the access level defined in the application (e.g. SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface, ODS, …) is LESS THAN or EQUAL TO the level configured for the resource.

For example, if you configure the Load Graphic Panels resourc12 and then you assign level 10 to the SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface graphic panel ProdLine1, the operator can load this page.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 53

1.15.3

ny user of a resource configured with exclusive access level can perform all operations related source ONLY IF the access level defined in the application (e.g. SIMATIC IT Graphic

or example, if you configure the Load Graphic Panels resource with exclusive access level 12 n you assign level 12 ATIC IT Graphic User Interface graphic panel

can

1.15.4 ow to use access levels

ou have configured two groups, Production Line Operator and Production Line Manager and ave assigned the "Run SIMATIC IT Applications from GUI" resource to each of them. This

n configured, respective 5 and 20 (both hierarchical). ith roduction Line Manager and Brown as Production

Line Operator. This scenario is illustrated in the following table:

User

Exclusive access level

Ato this reUser Interface, ODS, …) is EQUAL TO the level configured for the resource.

Fand the to the SIMProdLine1, the operator load this page.

H

Scenario

Yhresource has bee ly, with access level 1Then you have defined two users: Sm as P

Group Resource

Smith

Brown

SIMATIC IT Application button

Production Line Manager Run SIMATIC IT Applications from GUI with access level 20 (hierarchical).

Production Line Operator Run SIMATIC IT Applications from GUI with access level 15 (hierarchical).

Then you create a graphic panel, define two buttons of type "SIMATIC IT Application" and configure their access levels as follows:

Access levelto load a SIMATIC IT ODD (Operations Data Display) 18 workspace to configure an alarm 14

con , tha SInt

On wn can configure an alarm, as the access level required for this operation t

res

me situation:

User

According to this configuration, Smith can both load a SIMATIC IT ODD workspace and figure an alarm, as the access level required to perform these operations is less than 20t is, the level assigned to the "Run SIMATIC IT application from IMATIC IT Graphic User

erface" resource for the "Production Line Manager" group.

the other hand Brois less than 15, the level assigned to the resource for the "Production Line Operator" group, bucannot load a SIMATIC IT ODD workspace as the button access level is greater than the

ource level.

You might also have configured the groups as follows in order to handle the sa

Group Resource

Smith Pr vel

Brown access level 20 (exclusive).

oduction Line Manager Run SIMATIC IT Applications from GUI with access le20 (hierarchical).

Production Line Operator Run SIMATIC IT Applications from GUI with

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 54

Then you create a graphic panel, define two buttons of type "SIMATIC IT Application" and configure their access levels as follows:

SIMATIC IT A pplication button Access level

to load an SIMworkspace to configure an alarm 14

According to this configuration, Smith can both load a SIMATIC IT ODD workspace and ns is less than 20,

level is less than the level assigned to the resource for the "Production Line Operator" group, the resource level has been configured as exclusive, and therefore the two buttons would be enabled only if their access level were equal to 20.

1.15.5

Procedure

the User Manager - Group View environment (command Tools > User Manager

ATIC IT ODD (Operations Data Display) 18

configure an alarm, as the access level required to perform these operatiothat is, the level assigned to the "Run SIMATIC IT application from SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface" resource for the "Production Line Manager" group.

On the other hand, Brown can neither load a SIMATIC IT ODD workspace nor configure an alarm: although the button access

Configuring the access level for a resource

1. In in Plant Management or SIMATIC IT Management Console) double-click a group (Group

Name column), or select a group and then the Edit > Modify command, or right-click and select the Modify command from the displayed shortcut menu . The Modify group

source of interest from the Selected list box within the Resources area and

Level (1-30) edit box or select the value clicking the spin button.

ce click the Max Level check box.

5. To configure the access level as exclusive, click the Mutex check box. SIMATIC IT Management Console displays an "x" next to the level value in the Modify group dialog box.

ss level as exclusive only for some resources.

6. Click the Apply button to return to the Modify group dialog box.

nels - Access level

om SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface.

sed to control access to graphic panels. You can configure a different access ing command File > Properties from SIMATIC IT Graphic

1.15.7 ions from GUI - Access level

m SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface.

dialog box opens.

2. Select the rethen click the Set Level button. The Edit Resource Level dialog box opens.

3. Enter the access level value in the

4. To assign the highest level to the resour

You can configure an acce

1.15.6 Load Graphic Pa

You configure this access level fr

This resource is ulevel for each graphic panel selectUser Interface Development.

Run SIMATIC IT Applicat

You configure this access level fro

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 55

This resource is used to control access by "SIMATIC IT Application" type buttons, and thus to allow/prevent the execution of SIMATIC IT applications from the SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface environment. The access level can be configured for each "SIMATIC IT Application"

c panel.

1.15.8 SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface - Access level

ss level from the Database Editor.

ss to variables within a graphic panel. You can cess level for each variable defined in the Points Database using the SL

1.15.9 Ladder, Block Editor, ODS - Access level

level from the Database Editor, the Ladder and Block Diagram

ontrol write access to variables in a Ladder or Block Diagram

1.16.1

llowing resources to manage the access to the different functions of the environment:

General Pu ces strative Tools

elp

se Configuration

Access to Operating System Shell

ions

Saving)

SIMATIC IT Historian resources

uration

button defined in a graphi

Set Variables from

You configure this acce

This resource is used to control write acceconfigure a different acfield.

Set Variables from

You configure this access Editors.

This resource is used to cprogram, or from an ODS monitor.

1.16 Working with resources

SIMATIC IT resources

SIMATIC IT supplies the fo

rpose resourAccess to Admini

Access to H

Access to Licen

Close Session

System Configuration

Modify and Save Configurat

Modify Configurations (without

Alarm Acknowledgement

Alarm Configuration

Enable GUI Menu Bar

Historical Trends Config

Load Graphic Panels

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 56

Print from Graphics, Alarm, Historical Environments

Run Alarms

I

Run Messages from GUI

SIMATIC IT ler resources inistrator

ibraries

SIMATIC IT Production Modeler resources

ce Configure

SIMATIC IT Material Manager resources ration

nt

SIMATIC IT Messaging Manager resources nager Form

SIMATIC IT

n Administrator

Run SIMATIC IT Applications from GU

Run Historical Trends

Run Applications from GUI

Set Variables from GUI

Business Process ModeBPM Configuration Adm

BPM Remove Plants and L

BPM Close Session

IfPMObserver

IfPMSuperUser

IfPMUser

IfPMEnd-User

SIMATIC IT PMCOM Interface resources PM COM Interface Exit

PM COM Interface Delete

PM COM Interfa

PM COM Interface Show

MM Model Configu

MM Sublot Manageme

MM Hut Configuration

MM Configuration Administrator

MM Close Session

Access to Messaging Ma

Production Order Manager resources POM In Progress Order Management

POM Configuratio

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 57

POM Template Management

POM Template Instantiation

POM Order Dispatch

SIMATIC IT Production Operation Recorder resources POPR Backup Restore

POPR Close Session

SIMATIC ITPR

PR

PRM Person/Group Definition

n

Miscellanerowse Source Files

CommuWinII - Specialist User

Hardware Configuration

Compile Source Files

tions

Ru

Se der, Block Diagram, ODS

Clo

res n Alarms, Load Graphic Panels, Run Historical

esources Access to License Configuration and Access to Administrative Tools are assigned, Administrators group.

POM Order Management

POM State Machine Management

POM Close Session

POPR Configuration Administrator

Personnel Manager resources M Common Data Configuration

M Low Level Operator

PRM Manager

PRM Work Schedule Definitio

ous resources B

Edit DB, User Libraries, Projects

Modify, Save,

P.M.C. Opera

Program Transmission

n ODS

t Variables from Lad

Application Builder Runtime Widget

Batch Operator

se Application Builder Runtime

Set Variables from OPC Server

When you start SIMATIC IT Management Console, the system is configured with the following ources assigned to the Default user: Ru

Trends.

Rby default, only to the

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 58

1.

Procedure

1. In the User Manager - Group View environment (command Tools > User Manager

16.2 Assigning system resources to a group

in Plant Management or SIMATIC IT Management Console) double-click a group (Group

ick Edit > Modify. The Modify group dialog box opens.

2. Select the resource/s of interest from the Available list box (in the System Resources area).

4.

o

1.16.3

Procedure

and Tools > User Manager

Name column), or select a group and then cl

3. Click the Add >> button.

The selected resources are moved to the Selected list box.

5. Click the OK button to exit the dialog b x.

Assigning local resources to a group

1. In the User Manager - Group View environment (comm in ) double-click a group (Group

Name column) select a group and then the Edit > Modify

Plant Management or SIMATIC IT Management Console

command. The Modify group dialog box opens.

2. Click the Local Resources tab.

d

4.

5. rce/s of interest .

Importan

Unlike system local resources can also be assigned to remote workstatioif you wannetwork, you chine you want to assign it to

3. Select the workstation you want to assign one or more local resources to.

Note Only workstations configure in the SIMATIC IT network are displayed.

Click the plus sign beside the workstation icon to expand the resource tree list.

Select the check box next to the resou

6. Select another workstation and repeat the above steps on any other workstation you want to assign one or more local resources to.

7. Click the OK button to exit the dialog box.

t resources,

ns; however, these are available only at a workstation level. Therefore, t to assign a local resource to multiple workstations on the SIMATIC IT

must select that resource on each individual ma.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 59

1.16.4 Displaying the resources of a group

Procedure

er Manager 1. In the User Manager-Group View environment (command Tools > Us in Plant Management or SIMATIC IT Management Console), select the group of interest.

Edit > Modify ,2. Either select command or right-click on the group and select the Modify hortcut menu .

tly assigned to the group.

l resources currently assigned to the group are

1.16.5 Modifying the resources assigned to a group

Procedure

User Manager

command from the s

3. The Modify group dialog box opens and displays the system resources curren

4. Click the Local Resources tab: the locadisplayed.

1. In the User Manager - Group View environment (command Tools > in Plant Management or SIMATIC IT Management Console) select the group of interest.

ify 2. Select command Edit > Mod or double-click the group name, or right-click and select the Modify command on the shortcut menu . The Modify group dialog box opens and you

. To assign a new resource, select the resource of interest in the upper table of the System Resources area, and click the Add> button; to remove a resource, select the resource in the

n click the <Remove button.

5. Click the Local Resources tab: the local resources currently assigned to the group are

ew resource, select the check box near the resource of interest to remove a resource, clear the corresponding check box.

1.16.6 Ge

1.16.6.1 Ac

If t your group you can run the User Manager and Log File r tools in Plant Management or SIMATIC IT Management Console

If this resource has been assigned to your group you can access to Online Help.

can assign a new name to the group.

3. The system resources currently assigned to the group are displayed in the Selected list boxwithin the System Resources area.

4

lower table and the

displayed.

6. To assign a n

7. Click OK to confirm this operation.

neral Purpose resources

cess to Administrative Tools

his resource has been assigned toViewe

1.16.6.2 Access to Help

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 60

1.16.6.3 c

If tea IT

anagement Console).

tem Shell

o your group you can access and run all applications IMATIC IT Management Console.

1.16.6.5 System Configuration

d to your group you can create, delete, modify Units, backup

Resize, move, close client windows; open files; save files; close applications (from SIMATIC IT Historian Data Display and SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager Display).

sting files/workspaces; save files/workspaces; load programs

Alarm Manager Display).

Create new files; open existing files/workspaces; load programs different to the current one (other than the current one); resize, move, close windows; edit monitors; define the module

e toolbar, the status bar and the module system bar (from ODS).

A cess to License Configuration

his resource has been assigned to your group you can insert/update the license codes for ch module (using the License Configuration tool in Plant Management or SIMATIC

M

1.16.6.4 Access to Operating Sys

If this resource has been assigned tavailable on your workstation from S

If this resource has been assigneand restore Plant directories, run the Backup Switch Tool and all applications which handle configurations from SIMATIC IT Management Console. You cannot run the License Configuration or third-party configuration tools.

1.16.6.6 Close Session

If this resource has been assigned to your group you can quit SIMATIC IT Management Console.

1.16.6.7 Modify and Save Configurations

If this resource has been assigned to your group you can:

•

• Create new files; open exidifferent to the current one (other than the current one); resize, move, close windows; edit/save monitors; define the module options; show the toolbar, the status bar and the module system bar (from ODS).

1.16.6.8 Modify Configurations (without Saving)

If this resource has been assigned to your group you can:

• Resize, move, close client windows; open files; close applications (from SIMATIC IT Historian Data Display and SIMATIC IT

•

options; show th

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 61

1.16.7 Historian resources

1.16.7.1

can acknowledge alarms.

n nt Console.

ion

rom with

c panel.

al Environments

If this resource has been assigned to your group you can print graphic panels from SIMATIC IT e, historical trends from SIMATIC IT Historian Data Display and alarms

anager Display.

1.16.7.7 Run Alarms

ich must be replaced with the Run SIMATIC IT Application from GUI

1.16.7.8 un SIMATIC IT Applications from GUI

has been assigned to your group, you can configure Application buttons from hic User Interface to run SIMATIC IT applications. This operation is subject to

Alarm Acknowledgement

If this resource has been assigned to your group you

1.16.7.2 Alarm Configuration

If this resource has been assigned to your group you can run the Alarm Manager Configuratiotool from SIMATIC IT Manageme

1.16.7.3 Enable GUI Menu Bar

If this resource has been assigned to your group you can display or hide the menu bar from SIMATIC IT Management Console.

1.16.7.4 Historical Trends Configurat

If this resource has been assigned to your group you can run the Plant Data Archive Configuration tool from SIMATIC IT Management Console.

1.16.7.5 Load Graphic Panels

If this resource has been assigned to your group you can create and load Graphic Panels fSIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface. This operation is subject to the access level associated each graphi

1.16.7.6 Print from Graphics, Alarm, Historic

Graphic User Interfacfrom SIMATIC IT Alarm M

(Obsolete resource, whresource.)

R

If this resource SIMATIC IT Grapthe access level associated with each button.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 62

1.16.7.9 Run Historical Trends

lication from GUI source.)

0

onfigure DDE and EVENT buttons terface to send SIMATIC IT messages.

1.16.7.11 un Applications from GUI

d to your group you can configure the RUN button from

h ariable.

1.16.8

1.16.8.1 IfPMObserver

ves the user very restricted access to system functions. The user can only display objects.

1.16.8.2

ce refers to Production Modeler and allows the user to access all system functions. particular, access to the user environment is permitted only to Super-Users.

1.16.8.3

ons).

(Obsolete resource, which must be replaced with the Run SIMATIC IT Appre

1.16.7.1 Run Messages from GUI

If this resource has been assigned to your group, you can cfrom SIMATIC IT Graphic User In

R

If this resource has been assigneSIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface to run other applications.

1.16.7.12 Set Variables from GUI

If this resource has been assigned to your group you can set variables from SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface. This operation is subject to the access level associated with eacv

Production Modeler resources

This resource refers to Production Modeler and gi

IfPMSuperUser

This resourIn

IfPMUser

This resource refers to Production Modeler and allows the user to access a sub-set of system functions, that is, activating rules and modifying object parameters (but not connecti

1.16.8.4 IfPMEnd-User

This resource refers to Production Modeler and is reserved for future use.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 63

1.16.9 PM COM Interface resources

1.16.9.1 PM COM Interface Show

This resource allows the user to view PM COM Interface.

1.16.9.2 M

exit from PM COM Interface.

1.16.9.3 M COM Interface Delete

objects listed in the PM COM Interface grid.

1.16.9.4

allows the user to configure PM COM Interface.

1.16.10 u odeler resources

1.16.10.1 P strator

user to change the database login password from the BPM server operation, the user must necessarily possess the appropriate

rivileges.

1.16.10.2

perating from BPM Display, this resource allows the user to definitely delete a selected plant se. If the user wants to restore what has been deleted, he/she

a Download Objects operation from Production Modeler.

1.16.10.3 PM Close Session

This resource refers to Business Process Modeler and allows the user to close the BPM

1.16.11

1.16.11.1

Material Manager and allows you to configure Materials:

Add/Modify/Delete Classes and Definitions

• Manage Properties for Classes & Definitions

P COM Interface Exit

This resource allows the user to

P

This resource allows the user to delete the

PM COM Interface Configure

This resource

B siness Process M

B M Configuration Admini

This resource allows theform. In order to perform thisp

BPM Remove Plants and Libraries

Oor library from the BPM databamust necessarily perform

B

application server.

Material Manager resources

MM Model Configuration

This resource refers to

•

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 64

• Manage Units of Measurements

• Manage Inventory types

1.16.11.2 M Configuration Administrator

hange the database login password from the MM server form. es.

1.16.11.3

his resource refers to Material Manager and allows the user to handle lots/sublots:

Modify Material Lot properties

1.16.11.4

This resource refers to Material Manager and allows the user to manage the Handling Units.

1.16.11.5

ce refers to Material Manager and allows the user to close the MM application erver.

1.16.12

1.16.12.1 anager Form

allows the user to configure the access to the entire form and to the access is assigned to the form during its development. At run access level of the current user to this resource is

ces

1.16.13.1

• Manage Bill of Materials

M

This resource allows the user to cIn order to perform this operation, the user must necessarily possess the appropriate privileg

MM Sublot Management

T

• Add/Modify/Delete Lot

• Modify Lot available fields = Commit, Status

•

• Sublot Management

MM Hut Configuration

MM Close Session

This resours

Messaging Manager resources

Access to Messaging M

This resourcelevels. An access level (from 1 to 30) time, when the form is displayed, the compared with the level assigned to the form. If the user access level is lower, the insertion fields will be disabled.

1.16.13 Production Order Manager resour

POM Order Dispatch

This resource refers to Production Order Manager and allows the user to dispatch an order.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 65

1.16.13.2 POM Order Management

fy ntry or Campaign data, and to change the status of an order.

xception: the status of an "in progress" order cannot be modified unless the user owns the "POM In Progress Order Management" resource.

Note This resource has been maintained for compatibility with previous versions on POMD and anaged by the system state machines.

1.16.13.3

his resource has been maintained for compatibility with previous versions, as transient states State Machine Management.

1.16.13.4

allows the user to change the database login password from the POM server rm. In order to perform this operation, the user must necessarily possess the appropriate

1.16.13.5 Instantiation

his resource refers to Production Order Manager and allows the user to generate actual Production Orders, Campaigns or Entries in POM from a Template used for all three objects. On

an create the desired object in POM (passage from

1.16.13.6

r Manager and allows the user to create and modify emplates relative to Production Orders, Campaigns or Entries.

1.16.13.7

nager and allows the user to create and modify ustom State Machines and Custom Statuses. The State Machines are those provided by

s the Custom Statuses are defined "ad hoc" by the user. This resource definition of the various moments that concur to the creation, modification, roduction Order, Campaign or Entry.

1.16.13.8 POM Close Session

r and allows the user to close the POM

This resource refers to Production Order Manager and allows the user to create and modiProduction Order, E

E

is valid solely on those states m

POM In Progress Order Management

Tare now managed by the State Machines. See POM

POM Configuration Administrator

This resourcefoprivileges.

POM Template

T

the basis of the selections made, the user c"template" to "actual object").

POM Template Management

This resource refers to Production OrdeT

POM State Machine Management

This resource refers to Production Order MaCdefault in POM, whereapermits the detailed approval, etc. of a P

This resource refers to Production Order Manageapplication server.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 66

1.16.14 Production Operation Recorder resources

1.16.14.1 up Restore

his resource refers to Production Operation Recorder and allows the user to enable the backup/restore functionalities of the POPR database.

1.16.14.2 POPR Configuration Administrator

ange the database login password from the POPR server

R

1.16.15 Personnel Manager resources

1.16.15.2 RM Low Level Operator

l Manager and only allows you to display information from the various Personnel Manager environments.

1.16.15.3 PRM Manager

allows you to access all system functions.

1.16.15.4

s you to configure but not work schedule

anagement.

1.16.15.5 PRM Work Schedule Definition

POPR Back

T

This resource allows the user to chform. In order to perform this operation, the user must necessarily possess the appropriate privileges.

1.16.14.3 POPR Close Session

This resource refers to Production Operation Recorder and allows the user to close the POPapplication server.

1.16.15.1 PRM Common Data Configuration

This resource refers to Personnel Manager and allows you to configure properties, operations, measuring units, day and group types.

P

This resource refers to Personne

This resource refers to Personnel Manager and

PRM Person/Group Definition

This resource refers to Personnel Manager and allowpersons/groups/qualification test specifications and user management,m

This resource refers to Personnel Manager and allows you to configure work schedule management.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 67

1.16.16 Miscellaneous resources

1.16.16.1 se Source Files

If this resource has been assigned to your group you are granted read access to the source files onitoring Environments.

1.16.16.2

If this resource has been assigned to your group you can run the CommuWinII program for access to all CommuWinII

).

m

ols, as well as define and update the module options and save onfigurations; from ZME you can run the Data Base Management tool.

1.16.16.4 ion

this resource has been assigned to your group you can run the Hardware Configuration Tool

1.16.16.5

this resource has been assigned to your group you can:

raphic User Interface.

update, save and compile source files (graphic panels) from ZME.

If this resource has been assigned to your group you can run the Transmission Control Panel and Dump/Restore Control Panel tools from SIMATIC IT Management Console or PDE. In the

status (Run/Stop), and the sequence status

1.16.16.7

Brow

from the PDE and Zone M

CommuWinII - Specialist User

configuring Endress + Hauser devices as a "specialist" user (fullfunctions).

Otherwise, you can run the CommuWinII program as a "maintenance" user (limited access to tionsCommuWinII func

1.16.16.3 Edit DB, User Libraries, Projects

If this resource has been assigned to your group you can run the Locreg Configuration tool froSIMATIC IT Management Console or PDE; from PDE you can run the Library Manager and

anagement toData Base Mc

Hardware Configurat

Iffrom SIMATIC IT Management Console.

Modify, Save, Compile Source Files

If

• save and compile files from SIMATIC IT G

• update, save and compile source files from PDE.

•

1.16.16.6 PMC Operations

ODS environment you can change the P.M.C. (Suspend/Resume).

Program Transmission

(Obsolete resource, which must be replaced with the P.M.C. Operations resource.)

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 68

1.

(Obsolete resource, which must be replaced with the Run SIMATIC IT Application from GUI source.)

1.16.16.9

If this resource has been assigned to your group you can set variables from ODS, Ladder and Block Diagram files.

1.16.16.10

n enable the

1.16.16.11

1.16.16.12 Close

This resource is obsolete. If this resource has been assigned to your group, you can exit from SIMATIC IT Application Builder Runtime.

1.16.16.13

his resource allows you to modify the values of RTDS variables from OPC Server.

1.17

1.17.1

SIM h com hich is linked to the protection key supplied with the product.

wobe

Important Only users belonging to a group to which the Access to License Configuration

ce h ses Configuration. For more information, see SIMATIC IT resources.

You can perform one of the following operations:

16.16.8 Run ODS

re

Set Variables from Ladder, Block Diagram, ODS

Application Builder Runtime Widget

This resource is obsolete. It is applicable to the buttons, the screenSIMATIC IT Application Builder application. If this resource is available, you ca

s and the menu items of a

button or menu item.

Batch Operator

This resource is obsolete.

Application Builder Runtime

Set Variables from OPC Server

T

Licensing

Inserting SIMATIC IT license codes

ATIC IT is made up of a number of components which are independent of each other: eacponent has a license code w

You must insert the license codes for all the components that you wish to start on your rkstation in order to be able to use the components. In particular, a specific procedure must followed when inserting license codes for the first time.

resour as been assigned can use command Licen

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 69

• Inserting license codes from file

y

1.17.2 es for the first time

. Check if the SIMATIC IT protection key has been plugged into the selected parallel port.

2. Check if the protec er has been correctly installed;

3. Start SIMATIC IT M nsole;

anager licenses. To the S

RETURN without e

5. Enter the System C

6. Select the License

icense

1.17.3 serting license codes from file

sa

To

2. Select the Licenses tab.

Update from File dialog box

listed in alphabetical order (all files have .LIC me as the serial number of the protection key for which

6. Select the file name corresponding to the number labelled on the protection key of your ile list box. You can also check for the serial number of your > System Information in Plant Management or SIMATIC IT

1.17.4 y

nly a few license codes (for module or a new driver).

To enter license codes manually:

• Entering license codes manuall

When you insert licens

The first time you insert licenses on your workstation, you must do as follows:

1

tion key driv

anagement Co

4. Log on as Mlog on, press

, since only this user has the access permission to update HIFT+ESC keys, enter manager in the User Logon dialog box and press ntering any Password.

onfiguration window.

s tab.

7. Type in the l codes or insert them from diskette.

In

You can insert license codes from file when you need to add or update all license codes at theme time.

insert license codes from file:

1. Enter the System Configuration window.

3. Click the Update from Files button.

4. Select the appropriate drive and directory in the

5. The files contained in the directory are extension and their name is the sathey have been generated).

workstation from the License fkey by running command HelpManagement Console.

7. Click the Exit button.

Entering license codes manuall

You can type in license codes when you need to add or update oexample, when you must configure the licenses of a new add-on

1. Enter the System Configuration window.

2. Select the Licenses tab.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 70

3. In the Category area, select one or more radio buttons related to the kind of components you want to display in the list box:

Select To displayAll Modules

ain moduall components

ponenSIMATIC IT MSIMATIC IT Add-on Mo

les ts dule , those components which are not

part of SIMATIC IT base architecture but can be used for

Drivers all driv oped by Siemens A&D AS MES which connect the Real Time Data Server with a wide range of supervisory and control systems.

Third Party Add-on Modules all third-party components, implemented by third-party companies in co-operation with Siemens A&D AS MES. all CORe components (i.e. SIMATIC IT BPM, POPR, POM, MM) and SIMATIC IT Plant Performance Analyzer

4. The list box shows the component name, the license code and, where applicable, the

URN keys to move between the fields.

of the license in the License Expiration Code edit

1.18

1.18.1 Sy

guration includes the following functions:

Configuring the Foundation servers

n

.

nments:

SIMATIC IT Management Console.

If you are in...

all SIMATIC IT main com all add-on components, that iss

specific purposes. ers, that is, the interface modules devel

Components

expiration date of the product license. Select the component for which the license must be inserted or updated.

5. Type the license code in the License Code edit box; press the TAB or RET

6. Where applicable, type the expiry code box.

7. Click the Update License button to save the inserted codes.

8. Click the Exit button to quit this operation.

Basic Configuration

stem configuration

SIMATIC IT Management Console provides a user-friendly tab-based interface for the configuration of the system.

System confi

•

• Configuring a SIMATIC IT workstatio

• Configuring SIMATIC IT components for automatic start-up

1 18.2 Entering the System Configuration window

You can enter the System Configuration window from two distinct enviro

• Plant Management

•

Select...

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 71

Plant Manage nd SIMATIC IT Management Cons

m command ment Tools > System Configuration comma

ole Or Configuration > Syste

tab > Configuration > System Configuration command

Workstation

1.18.3.1

n parameters define the start-up and utilization mode of a SIMATIC IT workstation (e.g., Foundation Server, default user name, system language, messages format, etc.)

the workstation on which they are configured.

1.18.3.2 Enabling serial communications

twork ed to:

n window.

munications checkbox to start the SIMATIC IT

work.

1.

layed either in English

ImportanThe differe en English (United Kingdom) and English (United States) is limited to Alarm Maday/month

To define the language used on your workstation:

1.18.3

Configuring a SIMATIC IT workstation

Configuratio

The above settings are local to

If the SIMATIC IT workstation you are configuring acts as gateway to a P.M.C. serial ne(that is, if you configured it as Master during the creation of the serial network), you ne

1. Enter the System Configuratio

2. Select the Workstation tab.

3. Select the Enable P.M.C. serial comManagement Console services which handle serial communications.

If this option is not properly configured, the system will not be able to send data to/receive data from P.M.C.s connected to the serial net

18.3.3 Defining the system language

SIMATIC IT Management Console menus and dialog boxes can be disp(United Kingdom or United States), French, German, Italian and Spanish.

t nce betwe

date-display in the SIMATIC IT Historian Data Display and SIMATIC IT nager Display client modules (English (United Kingdom): /year, English (United States): month/day/year).

1. Enter the System Configuration window.

2. Select the Workstation tab.

3. Select one of the following options in the System Language area:

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 72

Select To defineRun-time LanDevelopmenOperator keyboa nal keyboard language (Italian, English, French, German or

he next time you log on to SIMATIC IT Management

1.18.4

1.18.4.1

efined during installation of SIMATIC IT Services, as wever, if the servers have not been defined during

stallation, you can configure them later from the Plant Management or SIMATIC IT anagement Console environment.

window:.

. Select the Foundation Servers tab.

3. Enter the computer name of the workstation that will be configured as the Foundation server

4. Click the Add button to insert the computer name into the Foundation Server List list box.

ImportanIf the follo u select the Foundation servers commandwait for abconfiguratServers ta

rder in the Foundation Server List list box,

e ting one of the displayed computer names.

1.18.4.2

tion is available, that is, the BCKCONF.CNF file located in read (either because no configuration was defined during

ecause no workstations defined as Foundation servers re available), all SIMATIC IT components on the workstation start normally but cannot perform e following functions:

.

guage the language used by online applications t Language the language used by off-line applications

rd the functiolanguage Spanish)

The configured language will be applied tConsole.

Foundation servers

Configuring the Foundation servers

The Foundation servers should be dprompted by the setup program. HoinM

To configure a Foundation server:

1. Enter the System Configuration

2

in the Computer Name box.

5. Click the OK button to confirm.

t wing message appears when yo: "Write access on masters configuration file temporarily denied" please out 3 minutes until you are granted write access to the server ion file. Until access is granted all buttons and boxes in the Foundation b are disabled

The computer names are listed in alphabetical oindependent of the order in which they have been inserted. You can enter three computer names at most, and then the Add command is disabled. You can insert another computer namonly after dele

What happens if no Foundation servers are configured?

If no Foundation server configuradirectory ICUBE.CNF cannot be installation of SIMATIC IT Services or bath

• Updating the physical network configuration.

• Communicating with remote server modules

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 73

• Updating the user database and transferring the updated information to all other SIMATIC IT

1.18.4.3 a Foundation server

o remove a Foundation server:

. Click the OK button to confirm.

Even if you remove all Foundation servers, thenctions

configuration

SIMATIC IT stand-

hen you start SIMATIC IT Management Console on your workstation, the system reads on and groups from the machine which has been

mponents on our workstation are isolated from all other SIMATIC IT components running on remote

onfiguration from the local

dled by your machine, therefore you must

is recommended when you do not need to interact with other rk and if you do not need to perform many functions on the same

o enable SIMATIC IT stand-alone start-up:

1.18.5.2 ent Console

ndow.

check box.

workstations.

Removing

T

1. Enter the System Configuration window.

2. Select the Foundation Servers tab.

3. Select the computer name of the workstation that must no longer be configured as Foundation server in the Computer Name combo box.

4. Click the Delete button to remove the computer name from the Foundation Server List list box.

5

Important current network server still

maintains network fu

1.18.5 Start-up

1.18.5.1 Enabling alone start-up

Winformation related to network configuraticonfigured as network server.

If you configure SIMATIC IT to start up in stand-alone mode, the SIMATIC IT coyworkstations, and therefore the system obtains the network cmachine, ignoring the centralized configuration.

Also, if you select this option, all functions are hanhave installed both client and server modules.

The stand-alone configuration workstations over the netwoworkstation.

T

1. Enter the System Configuration window .

2. Select the Workstation tab.

3. Select the Stand-Alone checkbox.

Starting SIMATIC IT Managem

1. Enter the System Configuration wi

2. Select the Start Up tab.

3. Select the Automatic Log-On to Current Plant

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 74

4. Click OK.

With this option, when you start SIMATIC IT Management Console you log on directly to the le environment of the current Plant and do not need to select ement window

1.18.5.3 m SIMATIC IT Management Console

menu that provides access to all SIMATIC IT

From

SIMATIC IT Management Consothe Plant icon in the Plant Manag

Starting SIMATIC IT applications fro

SIMATIC IT Management Console is the systemconfiguration and programming tools.

Start the applications

Server menu or tab Compliance Service Server, Event Manager,

Manager, etc.

Configuratio

Alarm

tab ManagerCompl

n menu or iance Service Configuration, Event

, Alarm Manager, etc.

Client menu o tab r Compliance Service Viewer, Historian Data Display, etc.

Component menu or tab ProductiPlant Performance Analyzer, Material Manager,

on Order Manager, etc.

Tools menu o tab Backup Maetc. r

nager, Log File Viewer, User Manager,

Services menu or tab Alerter, System Toolbox, etc.

lays all the applications currently running on your ee Management Console Tasklist.

1.18.5.4 i IC IT Management Console

nt Console:

w.

2. Select

3. Select k box.

4. Click

mized.

This is the default order that SIMATIC IT uses to automatically launch its modules. Note that this

ata Server

•

•

• SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager

The Management Console Tasklist dispworkstation. For more information, s

M nimizing SIMAT

To minimize SIMATIC IT Manageme

1. Enter the System Configuration windo

the Start Up tab.

the Start System Menu as an Icon chec

OK.

With this option, when you start SIMATIC IT Management Console and log on to a Plant, the SIMATIC IT Management Console application window is mini

1.18.5.5 Start order for SIMATIC IT Management Console components

order cannot be modified by the user:

• SIMATIC IT Messaging Manager Server

• SIMATIC IT Real Time D

• SIMATIC IT Data Engine

Compliance Service Server SIMATIC IT

SIMATIC IT Plant Data Archive

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 75

• SIMATIC IT DDE Interface

SIMATIC IT Report Manager •

•

•

•

• tatistical Process Control Run-Time

•

•

•

• SIM

•

• SIMATIC IT

•

•

•

SIMATIC IT Production Modeler

SIMATIC IT Batch

ager Display

Run-Time

a Display

-party applications must be launched between the launch of SIMATIC IT BATCH COM terface and SIMATIC IT PM COM INTERFACE (if installed).

1.18.5.6

y:

uration window.

3. logon from the Management

ns become disabled.

ted

• SIMATIC IT Event Manager

SIMATIC IT Expert System User Interface

SIMATIC IT Expert System/RTDS Interface

SIMATIC IT Statistical Process Control

SIMATIC IT S

SIMATIC IT Expert System/PDA Interface

SIMATIC IT Operations Data Display

• SIMATIC IT Business Process Modeler

SIMATIC IT Material Manager

ATIC IT Production Operation Recorder

SIMATIC IT Production Order Manager

Personnel Manager Server

SIMATIC IT Plant Performance Analyzer

SIMATIC IT Batch COM Interface

Custom and Third-party applications

• SIMATIC IT PM COM Interface

•

•

• SIMATIC IT Batch COM Server

• Alarm Acknowledge Services

• SIMATIC IT Alarm Man

• SIMATIC IT Graphics User Interface

• SIMATIC IT Historian Dat

The thirdIn

Starting SIMATIC IT components automatically

To start a SIMATIC IT component automaticall

1. Enter the System Config

2. Select the Start Up tab.

Select the component/s to be started automatically upon Plant Console Applications list box where they are sorted in alphabetical order.

Note It is not possible to change the order in which the components are started up automatically. When you select them, the Up and Down butto

4. Click the Add-> button. Component names are moved to the Start-Up list box and delefrom the Management Console Applications list box.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 76

5. If you need to start third-party or custom applications automatically, select the application/s from the Third Party Applications list box and click the Add-> button. Application names

tions list box.

Note If you add more than one Third Party Application, you can change only their order in the Start-Up list box using the Up and Down buttons; however, they must be inserted between the SIMATIC IT Batch COM Interface and SIMATIC IT PM COM Interface

ed to Client menu. For more information, see Adding third-

tween the launch of any two components:

t Console Applications list box, click the y property to the end of the Start-Up list box.

tart-Up list box and move it using the Up and Down components whose start time you want to delay.

- To change the default of the delay from 5 seconds to another interval, see Start Delay time.

Note the Delay property is always present in the Management Console Applications list t a launch delay between various components

the current settings.

ImportanThe following omponents are always launched last and you cannot insert a delay time or

• SIMATIC s • SIMAT ta Display • SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface Run-Time

IT Historian Data Display

1.18.5.7 tart Delay time

delay between launching

the to the Start-Up list box.

n between the components whose start time you want to modify.

. Select the Properties button, the Delay dialog box appears.

t to set as delay time before the

are moved to the Start-Up list box and deleted from the Third Party Applica

components.

Also note that third-party applications are listed in this box ONLY IF they have been addthe SIMATIC IT Management Console party components to the Client menu.

6. To set a default delay of 5 seconds be

- Select the Delay property in the ManagemenAdd -> button which moves the dela

- Select the Delay property in the Sbuttons to a location between the

box because it can be used repeatedly to se

7. Click OK to exit and save

t cthird-party/custom application(s) between them:

IT Alarm Acknowledge ServiceIC IT Alarm Da

• SIMATICFor more information, see the User’s Guide of the SIMATIC IT component of interest.

S

SIMATIC IT Management Console has a 5 second defaultcomponents. You can modify the delay:

1. Enter the System Configuration window.

2. Select the Start Up tab.

3. In the Management Console Applications list box, select the Delay property and clickAdd -> button, the property is moved

4. In the Start-Up list box, select the Delay property and move it using the Up and Down buttons to a locatio

5

6. In the Delay dialog box, type the milliseconds you wanautomatic start of the next component.

7. Click OK to save or Cancel to exit without saving.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 77

1.18.5.8 Configuring start-up parameters for SIMATIC IT components

Purpose

IT start-up:

SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager Display

Display

ameters in the Properties dialog box.

e configured.

. Click OK.

ImportanComponents hic User Interface, Historical Trends, …) are executed in the default zone defined. For more information on how to change this parameter, see Configuring the

1.18.5.9 startup parameters

e of the workspace file stored in the \USER directory

to use the Alarm Manager Display module only as an objects into SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface or other

ations.

f you want to run the Alarm Manager Display module in a

1.18.5.10 gine: start-up parameters

Real Time Data Engine Unit to be used.

The following SIMATIC IT components require start-up parameters in order to permit their automatic launching upon SIMATIC

•

• SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Engine

• SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface Run-Time

• SIMATIC IT Operations Data

• SIMATIC IT Historian Data Display

• SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server

Procedure 1. Enter the System Configuration window.

2. Select the Start Up tab.

3. Select the component name from the Start-Up list box.

4. Click the Properties button and enter the required par Please note that this button is disabled if the component does not need any start-up parameters to b

5

t which are run within a Zone (such as Alarms, SIMATIC IT Grap

Default Zone. .

Alarm Manager Display:

Command Line: nam\plantname\\MMI\zonename\ALARM

OLE Server: check this box if you need OLE server, that is, to load AMDWindows OLE-compliant applic

Run Minimized: check this box iminimized mode.

Real Time Data En

Unit Name: name of the

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 78

1.18.5.11

he graphic panel stored in the \plantname\MMI\zonename MP directory.

Graphic User Interface Run-

start-up parameters

Command Line: name of the SIMATIC IT ODD workspace stored in the \plantname ectory.

Run Minimized Operations Data Display module in a

1.18.5.13

MATIC IT Graphic User

1.18.5.14 eal Time Data Server: start-up parameters

1.18.5.15 Controlled shutdown

s must be closed in the following order which is the opposite of their

•

• ion Operation Recorder

er

Plant Performance Analyzer

Graphic User Interface Run-Time: start-up parameters

Command Line: name of t\GRAPH\CO

Run Minimized: check this box if you want to run the SIMATIC IT Time module in a minimized mode.

1.18.5.12 Operations Data Display:

\ACTION.LOG\GEN dir

: check this box if you want to run theminimized mode.

Historian Data Display: start-up parameters

Command Line: name of the workspace file stored in the \plantname\\MMI\zonename\DATA\USER directory

OLE Server: check this box if you need to use the Historian Data Display module only as an OLE server, that is, to load Historian Data Display objects into SIInterface or other Windows OLE-compliant applications.

Run Minimized: check this box if you want to run the Historian Data Display module in a minimized mode.

R

Unit Name: name of the RTDS Unit to be used.

The following componentlaunch order:

Business Process Modeler

• Material Manager

Product

• Production Order Manager

• Personnel Manager Serv

•

• Batch COM Interface

• All custom/third-party applications

• PM COM Interface

• Production Modeler

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 79

The Production Modeler waiting timeout is five minutes maximum; therefore, all modules must the

following section and key:

[DELAY] ret cifies the number of attempts >

1.18.6

1.18.6.1 hat is a Plant?

factory, or a part of it, and is made up of supervisory workstations and s are logically represented as Units in the SIMATIC IT environment.

tomation P.M.C. data is emory areas. Siemens

ol Units in the SIMATIC IT

temporary memory area located on the PC, called the SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server, and ontrollers are

DS or Real Time Data Engine Units.

From a physical point of view a Plant is a directory on the PC hard disk, called Plant.PLT. This l subdirectories where configurations, programs and all files required to

build the supervisory and control applications of your automation system are stored.

pre

be closed within this time. To modify this timeout, add in the %ICUBECNF%\menu.ini file

ry=<integer that spe

Working with Plants

W

A Plant represents thecontrollers. These itemSIMATIC IT can handle several Units. If the Unit is a Siemens Orsi Auexchanged directly between SIMATIC IT applications and the P.M.C. mOrsi Automation P.M.C.s are logically represented as Contrenvironment. On the other hand, if the control unit is a third-party device connected to a marketcontrol network (Siemens, Allen Bradley, …), SIMATIC IT applications read and write data to a

data is exchanged with the external devices via appropriate drivers. In this case clogically represented as RT

directory contains severa

PLAEach Plant defined in the system is re sented with a NT icon in the Plant

From any workstation you can log on to more than one Plant, although not concurrently, and d by several workstations.

1.18.6.2

Management application window.

each Plant can be share

Creating a Plant

To create a Plant:

1. Select command File > New in Plant Management.

2. Enter the Plant name (maximum 8 characters) in the Plant name edit box. Click the Next button.

. Select the drive where you want to create the Plant. Click the Next button.

The Plant icon

3

4. Click the Finish button.

is added to the Plant Management window and the plantname.PLT ed on the selected PC hard disk. directory structure is creat

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 80

1.18.6.3

fter creating a new Plant you need to define all Units that are part of it. To do this you must first pen the Plant and then run the appropriate commands from the SIMATIC IT Management

. Double-click the icon

Opening a Plant

AoConsole environment.

To open a Plant:

1 of the Plant of interest in the Plant Management window

or

choose command File > Logon to SIMATIC IT Management

displayed and you can configure the default Unit, choosing one of the computer names previously defined in the network configuration.

1.18.6.4 ying a Plant

Plant directory to another directory with a different name:

1. Select Edit > Copy

Select the Plant icon and thenConsole.

2. If it is the first time you open a Plant, the SIMATIC IT Management Console dialog box is

3. Finally you enter the nsole environment which supplies all the SIMATIC IT Management Cotools required to manage a Plant.

Cop

To copy the

command in Plant Management.

2. In dialog box, enter the name of Plant in Plant Name box. Select the Next

e where you want to create the Plant. Select the Next button.

. Click the Copy button.

1.18.6.5

the Copy Plantbutton.

3. Select the driv

4

Renaming a Plant

To rename the Plant directory:

1. Select command Edit > Rename in Plant Management.

1.18.6.6

. Select the plant you want to remove.

2. Enter the new name of the Plant.

3. Click out of the edit box or press the ENTER key.

Removing a Plant

To remove a Plant:

1

2. Select command Edit > Delete in Plant Management.

3. The program asks you a confirmation Click the Yes button.

4. The program asks you another confirmation. Select the Yes button.

Important

Since you can cancel deletion at any moment, some directories might not be removed cManagem

ompletely. In this case the Plant icon is still displayed in the Plant ent window, but it is broken.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 81

1.18.6.7 lant

o close a Plant and go back to the P

Select command sess

2. The End session dialog box app

Select the Log O on to end t TIC IT ement Con to the Plant Management environment .

you choose any other option, you w

• end the current P ses ows operating system, or

end the Window ssion

1.18.6.8 Plant directory structure

Plant is a structur irectories a opied and named. Furtherm creat whole Plant and save it to diskette.

he main directory of the Plant, called Plant.PLT is further subdivided into subdirectories:

related to Projects

• MMI which stores all files related to supervisory Zones

here is also a number of subdirectories with .LOG extension which store configuration and

• OG

• ALARM.LOG

• DATA.LOG

• EVENT.LOG

Also the following SYSTEM subdirect

Plant configuration files (CONFIG);

Rea les (RTDS).

• orary files, w TIC IT Management e (TEMP)

text files created with the SIMATIC IT Management Console native Text Editor (TEXT);

rian DDE Interface (DDE).

e a third-party p s:

• ry SPC.LO Cube-SPC application.

Closing a P

T lant Management environment:

1. File > End ion or press keys ALT+ F4.

ears.

3. ff opti he current working session, quit the SIMAManag

sole environment and go back

If ill either

lant working sion and return to the Wind

• s working se .

A e of d nd subdirectories which can be deleted, cre ore you can e a backup copy of the

T

• APPLIC which stores all files

Tdata files:

ACTION.L

ories contain, respectively:

•

• Data Dictionaries (DATABASE);

• PMC configuration files (PMC_CONF);

• SIMATIC IT l Time Data Server and error log configuration fi

temp hich are removed each time you log on to SIMAConsol ;

•

• link group files, used to set variables via Histo

Wa

hen youplication

creat new Plant, the program also adds some directories related to

directo G stores log files generated by the

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 82

Note Cube-SPC is no longer supported from version 4.2 of SIMATIC IT Management Console and Historian.

A to ture

Th IC directo ich have the same name as the P ts created for the current Plant.

ry

1.18.6.9 PPLIC direc ry struc

e APPL ry is further subdivided into a number of subdirectories whrojec

Directo Subdire toryc Subdirectory ContentsAPPLIC ct name COMP Compiled files

m files, not managed by the user library files

ITER, LADDER and BLOCK DIAGRAM source

mpilation

ject me.DEC

COMP Compiled files

GEN System files, not managed by the user LIB User library files

CYCLED Files sent to the Recycle Bin URCES ITER, LADDER and BLOCK DIAGRAM source

ence output files and compilation ror files

for Real Time Data Engine brary files for Siemens Orsi P.M.C. SOFTCNT l monitor files created by ODS

1.18.6.10

MMI ctory is further subdivided into a number of subdirectories which have the same

Directory

Proje GEN Syste LIB User SOURCES

files TEXT Cross-Reference output files and co

error files Prona

RE SO

files TEXT Cross-Refer

erGLOBAL.LIB DE Global library files PMC Global li

Reserved for future use GEN.GLB Globa

MMI directory structure

The direname as the Zones defined in the current Plant.

Subdirectory Subdirectory Contents

MMI dule DATA System files, not managed by the user EVENT Files generated by the Events module TIC IT Graphic User

1.18.6.11 CTION.LOG directory structure Directory

Zone name ALARM Files generated by the Alarms mo

GRAPH Files generated by the SIMAInterface module

REPORT Files generated by the Reports module Third-party Files generated by third-party modules

module

ASubdirectory Contents

ACTION.LOG ARCH SIMATIC IT ODD archive files (current and backup) GEN SIMATIC IT ODD configuration and workspace files text files TEXT SIMATIC IT ODD

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 83

1.18.6.12 LARM.LOG directory structure Directory

ASubdirectory Contents

ALARM.LOG TEXT SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager text files

1.Directory

ARCH SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager alarm definition files and archive files GEN SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager server configuration files

18.6.13 DATA.LOG directory structure Subdirectory Contents

DATA.LOG C IT Plant Data Archive point definition files and archive

TEXT C IT Plant Data Archive text files

. VENT.LOG directory structure Di

ARCH SIMATIfiles

GEN SIMATIC IT Plant Data Archive server configuration files SIMATI

1 18.6.14 Erectory Subdirectory Contents

EVENT SIMATIC IT Event Manager archive files (e.g. events database) GEN SIMATIC IT Event Manager server configuration files

1.18.6.15 Archiving

1.18.6.16 Ar

SIM T des a Plant maintenance tool for:

•

tomatically

d with

1.18.6.17

If ySIM n the one urrently selected (this information is available in the status bar).

ation in the Backup Manager environment.

the Plants located on the current drive.

ve and Plant list boxes, respectively.

.LOG ARCH

TEXT SIMATIC IT Event Manager text files

chiving a Plant

A IC IT Management Console provi

Creating a backup copy of a Plant

• Creating a backup copy of a Plant au

• Displaying the contents of a backup file

• Restoring a previously-archived Plant

In a user-friendly environment, this tool is called Backup Manager and can be activatecommand Tools > Backup Manager from Plant Management or SIMATIC IT Management Console.

Archiving a Plant you are not logged on to

ou run command Tools > Backup Manager from Plant Management rather than from ATIC IT Management Console, you can create a backup copy of a Plant other tha

c

To archive a Plant to which you are not currently logged on:

1. Select command Options > Configur

2. The Configuration dialog box displays all

3. Select the drive and Plant of interest from the Dri

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 84

4. Click the OK button.

1.18.6.18

• (from SIMATIC IT Management Console)

more information, see Archiving a Plant you are not logged on to.

e saved into any directory of the current drive, on efault the backup file has the same name th Microsoft Windows standards.

ImportanIf you bac s.

Management or SIMATIC IT Management Console.

ImportantBefore acapplicatio

3. he backup file and click the Open button.

t box. By n:

1.18.6.19

an already selected file.

or SHIFT keys to select more than one file at the same time.

Plant files (data and configuration).

the None button to cancel all selections.

files (*.bak, *.bbk, *.old) ARM.LOG

and DATA.LOG directories, please check the Exclude backup source files box.

Then proceed as described in Creating a backup copy of a Plant.

Creating a backup copy of a Plant

You can create a backup copy of:

the Plant you are currently logged on to

• the Plant selected in the Plant Management window. For

The backup file has .ARQ extension and can ba remote drive, on Iomega® Zip® or on diskette. By das the Plant but you can enter any string compliant wi

t kup the Plant to diskette, it is recommended to use empty diskette

To create a backup copy:

1. Select the command Tools > Backup Manager from Plant

2. Select the command File > Backup in the Backup Manager environment.

tivating the backup command make sure that no SIMATIC IT n is running.

Select the pathname of t

4. The Backup dialog box displays all the files, which can be archived in the File lisdefault all Plant files are selected apart from some configuration files. In detail, you ca

- Select the files to be archived

- Select the Units to be archived

- Select the Zones to be archived

- Select the third-party applications to be archived.

Selecting the files to be archived

To select the Plant files that you want to archive:

1. In the Backup dialog box, select the file to be archived from the File list box. To cancel selection click

2. Hold down the CTRL

3. Click the Select All button to choose to archive all the

4. Click

5. By default, SIMATIC IT Management Console archives all backupstored in your Plant’s directories. To archive only the backup files found in the AL

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 85

By default the program archives all Units (project, database, hardware configuration files) and

1.18.6.20 Se

e:

. The Unit dialog box displays all the Units configured in the selected Plant in the Unit Backup list box.

lick the <-Remove button. The Unit name is move

Unit Back n select the Project, DataBase tion check boxes to archive the project, database and hardware

1.18.6.21 electing the Zones to be archived

o select the Zones that you want to archive:

e button.

. The Zones dialog box displays all the Zones configured in the selected Plant.

3. Zone name in the list box.

4. None button.

. To archive all Zones (default), click the Select All button.

1.18.6.22 Se archived

cha

To ns that you want to archive:

1. In the Backup dialog box, click the Third Party button.

2. plays all the third-party applications configured

3. order not to archive an application click the application name in the list box.

5. To archive all applications (default) click the Select All button.

the OK button. to return to the Backup dialog box.

copy

ctly:

. Select the File > command in the ager environment.

Select the backup file and click the Op

all Zones (alarm and trend workspace, graphic panels, reports, etc.).

lecting the Units to be archived

To select the Units that you want to archiv

1. In the Backup dialog box, click the Unit button.

2

3. To not archive a Unit, select the Unit name from the Backup Unit list box and cd to the Unit list box.

4. To not archive any Unit, click the <-Remove All button

5. For each Unit displayed in the and Hardware Configura

up list box, you ca

configuration files, respectively.

6. Click the OK button. to return to the Backup dialog box.

S

T

1. In the Backup dialog box, click the Zon

2

In order not to archive a Zone, click the

If you do not wish to archive any Zone, click the

5

6. Click the OK button. to return to the Backup dialog box.

lecting the third-party applications to be

By default SIMATIC IT Management Console archives all third-party applications but you can nge this configuration.

select the third-party applicatio

The Third Party Applications dialog box disin the selected Plant.

In

4. If you do not wish to archive any application click the None button.

6. Click

1.18.6.23 Checking the correctness of the backup

To check if the backup copy of a plant has been created corre

1 Test Backup Man

2. en button.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 86

3. The Test Archiv x cted or not for the backup copy.

4. Click the OK button.

.24 Creating a backup copy of a Plant automatically

nction to an event periodica

tomatically cre ckup copy of

n file in the dir environment F). Either use new one. For

formation, see Compiling the b

2. Open a Command Prompt session.

a and line and

e Integrity dialog bo displays whether errors are dete

1.18.6 Important

You can associate this fu lly triggered by the Event Manager.

To au ate a ba a Plant:

1. Compile the confvariable (e.g. ICU

iguratioBE.CN

ectory corresponding to the ICUBECNF the ARQINFO.INI default file or define a

more in ackup configuration file.

3. Type the Cube rq comm pass the following arguments:

Argument Example/Ddisk, where disk is the nais located.

me of the disk on which the Plan

f t to be archived

mode s the in the ARQINFO.INI default file.

of the ned INI file. Setup mode and loa nfiguration in th

rtant ents must be separated by a blank space.

. The Backup Manager is launched as a minized window. At the end of the backup execution (or in the event of errors), it closes automatically. If serious errors occur, they are notified via the SIMATIC IT Management Console Alerter.

reated in the directory specified in the backup configuration file. It is e_BackupTime.ARQ, according to the following

e: DDMMYY

- BackupTime: HHMMSS

MYPLANT_030802_122707.ARQ

ImportanThe automatic backup of the Plant should be executed while Historian is running.

t /DC: (C: is the name of the disk on which the Plant is located).

/Pplant, where plant is the name o the Plan . /Pplant3 (plant3 is the name of the plant to be archived).

/A, sets the automatic backup and loadconfiguration

/A

/Afile, where file is the name user-defi s /AmyIni.INI (myIni.INI is the name of the the automatic back ds the co e user-defined file). specified INI file.

Impo

Argum

Example 1 Cubearq /DC: /Pplant3 /A

Example 2 Cubearq /DC: /Pplant3 /AmyIni.INI

4

5. The backup file is ccalled by default PlantName_BackupDatformats:

- BackupDat

Example

t

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 87

1.18.6.25 ompiling the backup configuration file

The stru backup configuration file is the following:

C

cture of the

Keywords Type Description[OUT_PATH] Section that identifies the destination

directory for backup files pDir= yPath Path of the Backup Directory (e.g.

C:\BACKUP) [PlantName] Section that identifies the Plant Access LevelFiles=

archive them

Action Log F yes to archive files; no not to archive them Alarm Archiv yes to archive files; no not to archive them Batch Configura yes to archive files; no not to archive them DDE Configu i yes to archive files; no not to archive them Event Archiv ive files; no not to archive them

r to archive files; no not to archive them s to archive files; no not to archive them

Plant Data Arfiles= I/O Device Profiles and Catalogs=

yes/no yes to archive files; no not to archive them

Licenses Con yes to archive files; no not to archive them Messaging MNetwork ConfiPlant ConfiguPlant Data ArRecipe ConfiRTDB/IMC Co o yes to archive files; no not to archive them Statistical ArText Files= Third Party Applications= yes/no yes to archive files; no not to archive them

e to archive files; no not to archive them User alarms Workstation Files= Zones= yes/no yes to archive files; no not to archive them

Important The keyword Pl odified. It is necessary to insert the name of the Plant tha

For ex: [PLANT

ImportanWith referenc

• They are • They m

Backu BackupDirector

s Configuration yes/no yes to archive files; no not to

iles= yes/no e Files= yes/no

tion Files= yes/no rat on Files= yes/no e Files= yes/no yes to arch

Global Libra ies= yes/no yesGlobal Monitor Files= yes/no ye

chive configuration yes/no yes to archive files; no not to archive them

figuration Files= yes/no anager Templates= yes/no yes to archive files; no not to archive them guration Files= yes/no yes to archive files; no not to archive them

ration Files= yes/no yes to archive files; no not to archive them chive Files= yes/no yes to archive files; no not to archive them guration Files= yes/no yes to archive files; no not to archive them nfiguration Files= yes/n

chive Files= yes/no yes to archive files; no not to archive them yes/no yes to archive files; no not to archive them

Unit Data Fil s= yes/no yesconfiguration files= yes/no yes to archive files; no not to archive them Configuration yes/no yes to archive files; no not to archive them

antname should be mt you want to backup automatically, without the extension .PLT.

_CATE]

t e to the keywords:

written in English and are case sensitive. ust not be altered.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 88

• Their o

When you select command or each time you create a backup copy of a Plant the

s are sorted in descending order by date and for each file the following information

Field

rder is irrelevant.

1.18.6.26 Displaying the contents of a backup file

File > ViewBackup Manager window displays the files archived in the backup file.

By default fileis available:

Description

Name Date/Time Size Packed Ratio Percentage of compression

you can:

• he type of character used in the table

iles by user parameters

rted in descending order by date in the Backup Manager window, but ort order and criteria.

3. choose the sorting direction.

4. i

5. ialog box are automatically sorted according to the new

1.18.6.28 Se c

Bo ttings can be modified by the user.

nager environment. The Columns

Name of the archived file Date/time when the file was archived Original file size Packed file size

Path File pathname in the Plant directory

You can customize the information displayed; in particular,

• Sort the files by user parameters

• Select the fields to be displayed

• Change the width of table columns

Change t

1.18.6.27 Sorting the f

By default, files are soyou can change the s

To sort files by user parameters:

1. Select command View > Sort in the Backup Manager environment. The Sort dialog box appears.

2. Select the field used to sort the file list from the Sort items by drop-down list box.

Click the Ascending or Descending radio buttons to

Cl ck the OK button.

The files in the Backup Manager dcriteria.

le ting the fields to be displayed

By default, Backup Manager displays all the fields and in a system defined order, in the table. th these se

To choose the fields to be displayed:

1. Select command View > Columns in the Backup Madialog box appears.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 89

2. To eliminate a field from the display, select the field name from the Show the followingbox and click the <-Remove button (the Name field is

list mandatory and cannot be removed).

able select the field name in the Show the buttons to move the field towards

ick the Reset button.

utomatically displayed according to the

1.18.6.29

In column heading. The want.

Yo

The Columns window appears.

2. Select the name of the field of interest in the Show the following listbox and enter a new box.

fied.

to the columns in the Backup Manager

1.18.6.30

can select the font and size.

4. The selected font and size is applied to all the file names displayed in the Backup Manager

1.18.6.31 Restoring

1.18.6.32 Restoring a Plant

n be located on the local r on CD-ROM). Click the Open

button.

tore dialog box displays all files which can be restored. By d. In detail, you can:

to be restored

3. To display a field, select the field name from the Available Columns list box and click the Add-> button.

4. To change the order of the fields displayed in the tfollowing list box and click the Move Up or Move Downthe top or to the bottom of the list, respectively.

5. To restore all default configurations cl

6. Click the OK button.

7. The files in the Backup Manager dialog box are anew criteria.

Changing the width of table columns

the Backup Manager window move to the left or right boundary of thecursor becomes a line: drag the boundary until the column is the width you

u can also do as follows:

1. Select command View > Columns in Backup Manager.

value (pixel) in the Column Width edit

3. Repeat step 2 for all the columns to be modi

4. Click the OK button.. The selected width is applied window.

Changing the type of character used in the table

To change the type of character used in the table:

1. Select command Options > Font in Backup Manager.

2. The standard Font Windows dialog box appears and you

3. Click the OK button to confirm the options selected.

window.

To restore a Plant:

1. Select command File > Restore in Backup Manager.

2. Select the .ARQ file from which files are to be restored (the file cadrive, on a remote drive, on diskette, on Iomega® Zip® o

3. The File list box in the Resdefault, all Plant files are selecte

- Select the files

- Select the Units to be restored

- Select the Zones to be restored

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 90

- Select the third-party applications to be restored.

wn

1.18.6.33 electing the files to be restored

To choose the files that you ore:

e Restore dialog box list box. To cancel a selected file, click the file

2. To select/unselect severa hold down the CTRL or SHIFT keys while lick the left mouse b

3. Click the Select All butto

lick the None button to

1.18.6.34 Selecting the Units to be

To choose the Units that you

1. In the Restore dialog bo

2. The Unit dialog box disp the Restore Unit list box.

3. In order not to restore a U ore Unit list box and click the <-Remove button. Th

4. If you do not want to rest tton

5. For each Unit displayed i n select the Project, DataBase Configur ject, database and hardware es, respec

6. Click the OK button. to re

1.18.6.35 Selecting the Zones to b

that yo

1. In the Restore dialog bo

2. The Zones dialog box dis

3. In order not to restore a Z k the Zone name in the list box.

to rest

ll Zones (def

6. Click the OK button to re log box.

1.18.6.36

ions that you want to restore:

. In order not to restore an application, click the application name in the list box.

4. Select the name of the Plant where files are to be restored from the Plant Name drop-dolist box.

5. Click the OK button to start restoring the files.

S

want to rest

1. In th , click the file to be restored in the File name in the list box.

l files at the same time,you c utton.

n to restore all the files.

4. C choose to not restore any files.

restored

want to restore:

x, click the Unit button.

lays all the previously archived Units in

nit, select the Unit name from the Reste Unit name is moved to the Unit list box.

ore any Unit, click the <-Remove All bu

n the Unit Restore list box, you caand Hardware configuration fil

ation check boxes to restore the protively.

turn to the Restore dialog box.

e restored

To choose the Zones u want to restore:

x, click the Zones button.

plays all the previously archived Zones.

one, clic

4. If you do not want ore any Zone, click the None button.

5. To restore a ault), click the Select All button.

turn to the Restore dia

Selecting the third-party applications to be restored

To choose the third-party applicat

1. In the Restore dialog box, click the Third Party button.

2. The Third Party Applications dialog box displays all the previously archived third-party applications.

3

4. If you do not want to restore any application, click the None button.

5. To restore all applications (default), click the Select All button.

6. Click the OK button to return to the Restore dialog box.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 91

1.18.7 Working with Units

1.18.7.1

he software components that make up SIMATIC IT.

he table below summarizes the types of Units available:

Type

What is a Unit?

A logical Unit is the bridge between the physical architecture of the system, configured upon definition of the network devices, and t

Before executing a number of operations from SIMATIC IT Management Console, such as Database management or Project handling, you need to define the current working Unit: from that moment all operations will apply to that Unit.

T

Description

RTDS/IMC Us Used when you want to configure your workstation to exchange data with one or more third-party device networks and to simulate a virtual P.M.C.

Session Mana ed for particular uses. For more on, contact the Technical Support

Service ControlCORE you want to read/write from/to

C or an Open PMC Lite (in trollers based on TCP-IP).

Remote Contr Used to exchange data with a PMC (connected to an Arcnet network) via a

a bridge (thus, supporting both an Arcnet and an Ethernet adapter).

Control Unit Obsolete; maintained only for compatibility with previous versions. Used when you want to read/write from/to

available Siemens Orsi stems.

Real Time Dat onfigure your

a Engine

RTDS/IMC Extern Unit Used when you want to read from a RTDS active on a computer that is not present in the SIMATIC IT network configuration (Configuration > Network Configuration), but can be contacted on the physical network.

USER UNIT – orkstation Obsolete; maintained only for compatibility with previous versions.

– Obsolete; maintained only for compatibility with previous versions.

n one

te as ssociate more than one Real Time Data

er Unit

ger Unit Reservinformati

Unit Used whenan OpenPMgeneral, all con

ol Unit

SIMATIC IT multihomed workstation connected to an Ethernet network acting as

one of the Automation P.M.C. control sy

a Engine User Unit Used when you want to cworkstation to exchange data with one or more third-party device network.. Also allows you to define and execute your tasks in SIMATIC IT Real Time DatManager.

al Device User

Operator W

USER UNIT Host Computer

To each workstation and controller defined in the network configuration one or more thalogical Units can be associated.

For instance, each workstation can "host" one or more RTDS/IMC logical Unit, and thus operagateway to third-party field devices; you can also a

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 92

Engine Unit to the same workstation and thus use the same computer as a process engine for different projects.

to any physical device of the same type (e.g. you can associate a Control Unit to any P.M.C. defined in your network configuration).

1.18.7.2

nt Console d Plant.

ole provides all the tools required to design, and configure our control and supervisory system.

command File > New

Since logical Units are independent of the physical devices defined during network configuration, you can associate a logical Unit

Configuring a Unit

Unit configuration and management is performed in the SIMATIC IT Managemeenvironment. You access this environment immediately after logging on to the selecte

The SIMATIC IT Management Consy

To define a new Unit select in SIMATIC IT Management Console. izard’s prompts. Tips and Help are provided with each stage of the

RTDS/IMC User Unit

•

•

Real Time Data Engine User Unit

• RTDS/IMC External Device User Unit

NIT – Host Computer are not maintained only for compatibility with previous

ersions.

ing the Unit attributes

1. Select the icon of the Unit of interest in the SIMATIC IT Management Console window.

. Select command Edit > Modify. The Attributes dialog box appears and you can change the following attributes of a Control or User Unit:

and then simply follow the WWizard.

You can configure the following types of Units:

•

• Session Manager Unit

ControlCORE Unit

Remote CONTROL Unit

• CONTROL Unit

•

Note Units USER UNIT – Operator Workstation and USER Udescribed since they are by now obsolete andv

1.18.7.3 Modify

To change the attributes of a Control or User Unit:

2

- Locreg

- Database

- Project

- device name

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 93

1.18.7.4 Du

1.

2. Edit > Copy. The selected Unit is copied into the Clipboard.

t device name or change

1.18.7.5

w.

. Select command Edit > Rename

plicating a Unit

To make a copy of a Unit:

Select the Unit of interest in the SIMATIC IT Management Console window;

Select command

3. The Attributes dialog box appears and you can enter a differenother parameters (locreg, database, project, etc.)

Renaming a Unit

To assign a new name to a Unit:

1. Select the icon of the Unit of interest in the SIMATIC IT Management Console windo

2 .

1.18.7.6

2. Select

Removing a Unit

To remove a Unit:

1. Select the Unit of interest in the SIMATIC IT Management Console window.

command Edit > Delete .

Deleting a Unit causes the associated database and project to be removed as well.

1.18.7.7

1.18.7.8 hy use an RTDS/IMC User Unit?

RTDS/IMC User Unit

W

With an RTDS/IMC User Unit you can configure your workstation to:

• Exchange data with one or several third-party device networks. SIMATIC IT applications (SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface, SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager, SIMATIC IT Plant Data Archive, etc.) can read data from and write data to, the external devices via a temporary memory area called SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server.

and execute user-

Tip Communicati e to be configuredCommunicati

If yexc opment Environment) module.

Tip For more Guide.

• Simulate a virtual P.M.C.. From the PDE environment you can create defined control applications.

ons between SIMATIC IT components and third-party devices ar by the user. For more information, see manual Managing ons with External Devices User’s Guide.

ou configure an RTDS/IMC User Unit in programming mode, the Unit can be handled lusively by the PDE (Programmable Devel

information, see manual Control Environment Programming User’s

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 94

onfigu

To config

1. Selec

1.18.7.9 C ring the RTDS/IMC User Unit

ure a RTDS/IMC User Unit:

t command File > New in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

2. Selec

3. In the be associated to the U ing the workstation are a ss, which is displa evice name

. Enter the identifier of the logical Unit (alphanumeric string up to 15 characters) in the Logical Unit Name edit box. By default this identifier is the same as the computer name of the

5. ter a brief description in the Comment edit box.

6. to configure the Unit in either programming or supervisory mode.

1.18.7.10

Configure the Unit in programming mode if you need to use the PDE (Programming ) environment to create and test user control programs.

To configure e:

. In the Additional Attributes dialog box choose a project name to be assigned to the Unit ect name.

Unit from the Locreg listbox. The list shows all the syst gs and locregs created by the user.

1 Configuri

Configure t rver memory area is to be rea

C User Unit in supervisory mode:

1. Select the Monitoring only check box in the Additional Attributes dialog box.

aBase box or edit a new name.

assigned to the User Unit from the Locreg listbox. The list shows all the system locregs and locregs created by the user.

1.18.7.12 g the RTDS/IMC User Unit and the network device

To configure a RTDS/IMC User Unit and its network device:

1. Select command File > New

t the Unit type USER UNIT – RTDS/IMC and click Next>.

Attributes dialog box, select the device name of the workstation tonit from the Device Name list box. With this operation data concernssigned to the logical Unit (e.g. node number of the device, IP Addreyed by clicking the Additional Info button or moving the cursor over the d).

4

workstation.

(Optional) En

Click the Next > button

7. Click Finish to save this configuration.

Configuring the RTDS/IMC User Unit in programming mode

Development Environment

a RTDS/IMC User Unit in programming mod

1from the Projects box or edit a new proj

2. Select the locreg to be assigned to the User em locre

1.18.7.1 ng the RTDS/IMC User Unit in supervisory mode

he Unit in supervisory mode if the SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Sed/written only by SIMATIC IT applications.

To configure a RTDS/IM

2. Choose a database name from the Dat

3. Select the locreg to be

Configurin

in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

2. Select the Unit type USER UNIT – RTDS/IMC and click Next>.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 95

3. Enter the identifier of the logical Unit (alphanumeric string up to 15 characters) in the Logical Unit Name edit box. By default this identifier is the same as the computer name of the

4. In the Attributes dialog box, check the Device Configuration box. Select the New Device

nt edit box.

. Click the Next button.

Parameter

workstation.

or Modify Device option button. In the latter case, choose the name of the device you want to modify from the Device Name list box.

5. (Optional) Enter a brief description in the Comme

6

7. The Control Unit device dialog box appears. Enter following data:

Action

Device Nam Enter a symbolic name of device to be adcharacters). It is not allowed to use fo

e ded to the network (max.15 llowing characters @ # [ ] + - ! £ $ % &

CPU type iated with the device:

write d

ed on

rameters:

9. Click the Next > button to configure the Unit in either programming or supervisory mode.

1.18.7.13 Parameter

/ ( ) = ? ^. Select the type of CPU assocNone: Used exclusively for supervision tasks RTDS/IMC-n: Used to read or ata to non-proprietary PLC networks or other devices. Each type of RTDB_IMC CPU identifies the default locreg which will be assigned to all logical Units associated with this workstation (e.g. CPU type RTDS/IMC1 corresponds to locreg RTDS1). For more information on system locregs, see System Locregs for SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server. SPV-n: This CPU type is obsolete and is used only for old locregs basVMS systems

8. According to the network you select, you must insert different pa

- Arcnet

- Session manager

10. Click Finish to save this configuration.

Parameters (Arcnet) Action

Node A

Parameter

Enter the node number assigned to the device.

1.18.7.14 Parameters (Session Manager) Action

IP Address

Timeout

Enter the TCP/IP address of Channel A (and, if necessary, of Channel B) from the Unit you are configuring. For more information on IP Addresses, see Session Manager network parameters Enter the Timeout value(s). This value defines waiting time for receiving acknowledgements of messages and is registered in milliseconds (ms). Note If no value is entered, a default of 200 ms is automatically selected.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 96

1.18.7.15

1.18.7.16

Re

1.18.7.17

Reserved f use.

1.18.7.18 ControlC

1.18.7.19 Why use

A particular

Session Manager

Why use a Session Manager Unit ?

served for future use.

Configuring a Session Manager Unit

or future

ORE Unit

a ControlCORE Unit ?

new kind of control unit is the ControlCORE unit that can be aMC Lite. Its difference from a control unit is that it must belon

n OpenPMC or an Open P g to the Session Manager ne

A ControlC following icon

twork inside the network configuration.

ORE unit can be defined in hot backup. If so, it is represented by the

. A ControlCORE backup unit can only be of the Open PMC type.

1.18.7.20 onfiguring the ControlCORE Unit C

To configure a ControlCORE Unit:

1. Select the command File > New in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

. Select the Unit type ControlCORE or ControlCORE-BACKUP and click Next>.

Unit from the Device on are assigned to the

er of the device, which is displayed by clicking the Additional Info button or moving the cursor over the device name).

4. Enter the identifier of the logical Unit (alphanumeric string up to 15 characters) in the Logical ult this identifier is the same as the computer name of the

workstation.

the Comment edit box.

e.

1.18.7.21

o configure a ControlCORE Unit in programming mode:

se a project name to be assigned to the Unit t name.

2

3. Select the device name of the workstation to be associated to the Name list box. With this operation data concerning the workstatilogical Unit (e.g. device name, node numb

Unit Name edit box. By defa

5. (Optional) Enter a brief description in

6. Click the Next > button to configure the Unit in either programming or supervisory mod

7. Click Finish to save this configuration.

Configuring the ControlCORE Unit in programming mode

T

1. In the Additional Attributes dialog box choofrom the Projects box or edit a new projec

2. Select the locreg to be assigned to the Control Unit from the Locreg listbox. By default SIMATIC IT Management Console assigns a locreg which best suits the CPU of the P.M.C. being configured but you can choose any locreg created by the user.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 97

1.18.7.22 nit in supervisory mode

2.

the Locreg list box. By default, IMAT ement Console assigns a locreg which best suits the CPU of the device.

being configured but yo e any locreg created by the user.

23 Configuring the Contro

To configure a ControlCOR

1. Select the command Fil

Configuring the ControlCORE U

To configure a ControlCORE Unit in supervisory mode:

1. Select the Monitoring only check box in the Additional Attributes dialog box.

Choose a database name from the DataBase box or edit a new name.

3. Select the locreg to be assigned to the Control Unit fromS IC IT Manag

u can choos

1.18.7. lCORE Unit and the network device

E Unit and its network device:

e > New in SIMATIC IT Management C

trolCORE or C and click

onsole.

2. Select the Unit type Con ontrolCORE-BACKUP Next>.

the Attributes dialog x. Select the New Device or Modify Device option

4. In the Control Unit dev

Parameter

3. In box, check the Device Configuration bo button.

ice dialog box, enter following data:

Action

Device name following characters @ # [ ] + - ! £ $

To find out if the inserted device name already exists in the network,

Enter a symbolic name of device to be added to the network (max.15 characters). It is not allowed to use% & / ( ) = ? ^.

click the button. If so, the device configuration parameters Control Unit device dialog box will be replaced automatically.

Address Enter the TCP/IP address of Channel A (and, if necessary, of Chfrom the Unit you are configuring. F

in the

IP annel B) or more information on the IP

Addresses, see Session Manager network parameters. Timeout Enter the Timeout value(s). This value defines waiting time for receiving

s (ms). ected.

CPU type

OPEN PMC

5. r programming or supervisory mode.

Tip

Project De

acknowledgements of messages and is registered in millisecondNote If no value is entered, a default of 200 ms is automatically selSelect the type of CPU associated with the device: ALL IN ONE

OPEN PMC LITE

Click the Next > button to configure the Unit in eithe

6. Click Finish to save this configuration.

For more information about the ControlCore Configuration Tool, see manual velopment Environment (PDE) User’s Guide

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 98

1.18.7.24 emote CONTROL Unit

Control Unit ?

cnet/Ethernet bridge. This means that you can use a n Ethernet (TCP/IP) network (provided that it is properly

s

1.18.7.26

thernet adapter). This logical unit must be connected a PMC Bridge or External PMC Bridge network device.

File > New

R

1.18.7.25 Why use a Remote

The current version supports the ArSIMATIC IT workstation, connected to aconfigured), in order to exchange data with a PMC connected to an Arcnet network. The SIMATIC IT workstation must support both an Arcnet and an Ethernet adapter, in order to act aa bridge.

Configuring a Remote CONTROL Unit

A Remote Control Unit is used to exchange data with a PMC (connected to an Arcnet network)via a SIMATIC IT multihomed workstation connected to an Ethernet network acting as a bridge(thus, supporting both an Arcnet and an Eto

To configure a Remote Control Unit:

1. Select the command in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

. Select the Unit type Remote CONTROL UNIT or Remote CONTROL UNIT - BACKUP and click Next>. Note Since the same icons are used to identify Control Units, Remote Control

andings.

the Attributes dialog box, enter the following data:

Parameter

2

Unit icons are displayed in yellow, in order to avoid misunderst

3. In

DescriptionLogical Unit

l unit. Bridge Select a PMC Bridge or a PMC External Bridge

device (previously defined in Network Configuration). If the device you select is

s the highest priority will be enabled. Choose this option in order to use the bridge with lower priority as first choice.

remote PMC with which data is exchanged.

CPU type the type of CPU of the remote PMC device. Comment

5.

Important

To offer greatmore thanmust be asso

Name Enter the name which will be used to identify the logica

configured in backup, the check box Bridge B ha

Remote PMC Name of the

SelectOptional. Enter a brief description.

4. Click the Next> button to configure the Unit in either programming or supervisory mode.

Click Finish to save this configuration.

er flexibility SIMATIC IT supports associating the same P.M.C. to one logical Control Unit. However upon commissioning each P.M.C.

ciated to ONE logical Control Unit only.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 99

1. onfiguring a Remote Control Unit in programming mode

order to use the PDE grams.

o configure a Remote Control Unit in programming mode:

t name to be assigned to the Unit Projects

efault U of the P.M.C.

being configured but you can choose any locreg created by the user.

1.18.7.28 visory mode

To e:

2.

3. Select the locreg to be assigned to the Control Unit from the Locreg list box. By default ich best suits the CPU of the P.M.C.

r.

1.18.7.29

1.18.7.30

A c M.C. control systems. epending on the type of selected controllers, it is displayed and treated in a different way by

iving the user the perception of working in an unique environment.

18.7.27 C

You usually configure a Remote Control Unit in programming mode inProgramming Development Environment to create and test control pro

T

1. In the Additional Attributes dialog box choose a projecfrom the box or edit a new project name.

2. Select the locreg to be assigned to the Control Unit from the Locreg listbox. By dSIMATIC IT Management Console assigns a locreg which best suits the CP

Configuring a Remote Control Unit in super

configure a Remote Control Unit in supervisory mod

1. Select the Monitoring only check box in the Additional Attributes dialog box.

Choose a database name from the DataBase box or edit a new name.

SIMATIC IT Management Console assigns a locreg whbeing configured but you can choose any locreg created by the use

CONTROL Unit

Why use a CONTROL UNIT ?

ontrol unit represents one of the available Siemens Orsi Automation P.Dthe system, g

A control unit is represented by the following icon and can be one of thecontrollers: Tloop,PMC Series 5, PMC Series 8, PMC Series 10, PMC Series 15

following type of , PMC Series

es

A c con

20, PMC CP16. You can configure this type of unit only if your network configuration includone of the above mentioned PMC types.

ontrol unit can be in hot backup configuration: if so, it is represented by the following i

. A backup control unit can be:PMC Series 10, PMC Series 15, PMC Series 20. As for rk configuration includes one

Tip For more information on the different PMC types, see the relative manuals.

In addi e use of the advanc es provided by the PDE Programming Development Environment, to design and ex

Control Units, you can configure this type of Unit only if your netwoof the mentioned PMC types.

tion, if you configure a Control Unit in programming mode, you can maked featurecute control programs.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 100

Tip For more information, see the Control Environment Programming User’s Guide.

1.18.7.31 g the CONTROL Unit

To configure a CONTROL Unit:

Configurin

1. Select the command File > New in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

2. Select the Unit type CONTROL UNIT or CONTROL UNIT - BACKUP and click Nex

3. In the Attributes dialog box, select the device name of the P.M.C

t>.

. to be associated to the Unit from the Device Name list box (this box shows all the P.M.C.s defined during network

ng the P.M.C. are assigned to the logical s displayed by clicking the Additional Info

name).

alphanumeric string up to 15 characters) in the Logical s the same as the computer name of the P.M.C.

edit box.

7. Click Finish to save this configuration.

e P.M.C. to more than one logical Control Unit. However upon commissioning each P.M.C. must be a

1.18.7.32

ou usually configure a Control Unit in programming mode in order to use the PDE g Development Environment to create and test control programs.

To configure a Control Unit in programming mode:

. In the Additional Attributes dialog box, choose a project name to be assigned to the Unit

M.C. but you can choose any locreg created by the user.

1.18.7.33

check box in the Additional Attributes dialog box.

t Management Console assigns a locreg which best suits the CPU of the P.M.C.

being configured but you can choose any locreg created by the user.

configuration). With this operation data concerniUnit (e.g., node number of the device, which ibutton or moving the cursor over the device

4. Enter the identifier of the logical Unit (Unit edit box. By default this identifier i

5. (Optional) Enter a brief description in the Comment

6. Click the Next> button to configure the Unit in either programming or supervisory mode.

Important

To offer greater flexibility SIMATIC IT supports associating the sam

ssociated to ONE logical Control Unit only

Configuring a Control Unit in programming mode

YProgrammin

1from the Projects box or edit a new project name.

2. Select the locreg to be assigned to the Control Unit from the Locreg listbox. By default SIMATIC IT Management Console assigns a locreg which best suits the CPU of the P.being configured

Configuring a Control Unit in supervisory mode

To configure a Control Unit in supervisory mode:

1. Select the Monitoring only

2. Choose a database name from the DataBase box or edit a new name.

3. Select the locreg to be assigned to the Control Unit from the Locreg list box. By defaulSIMATIC IT

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 101

1.18.7.34 Configuring a CONTROL Unit and the network device

ice:

ew

To configure a CONTROL Unit and its network dev

1. Select the command File > N in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

k Next>.

name

5. ter a brief description in the Comment edit box.

nter following data:

Parameter

2. Select the Unit type CONTROL UNIT or CONTROL UNIT - BACKUP and clic

3. In the Attributes dialog box, select the Device Configuration check box.

Select the New Device or Modify Device option button. In the latter case, choose the of the device you want to modify from the Device Name list box.

4. Enter the identifier of the logical Unit (alphanumeric string up to 15 characters) in the Logical Unit edit box.

(Optional) En

6. Click the Next> button.

7. In the Control Unit device dialog box, e

Action

Device to /

Node A Node B

CPU type

8. button to configure the Unit in either programming or supervisory mode.

1.18.7.35

From ea station, it is possible to synchronize the date and time values of all PMCs onnecte te&time are

n

To perfo

1. Enter

2. Selec

3. Chec

4. Chec Time Alignment

5. Date& server

1.18.7.36 eal Time Data Engine User Unit

1.18.7.37

With a Real Time Data Engine

Enter a symbolic name of device to be added to the network (max.15 characters). It is not allowed use following characters @ # [ ] + - ! £ $ % &( ) = ? ^. Enter the node number assigned to the device. To be used only for P.M.C. controllers in backup. Enter the node number of the backup node. Select the type of CPU associated with the device.

Click the Next >

9. Click Finish to save this configuration.

P.M.C. date & time synchronization

ch workcsynchro

d to the SIMATIC IT network via a "master clock". By default, daized with the date&time configured on the network server .

rm P.M.C. data & time synchronization:

the System Configuration window.

t the Foundation Servers tab.

k the Time Alignment box.

k the Enable PMC box.

time will be aligned to the date&time configured on the current network

R

Why use a Real Time Data Engine User Unit?

User Unit you can configure your workstation to perform diverse devices (Siemens Orsi Automation P.M.C. or

third-party PLCs). You can define and execute your tasks within a highly advanced environment data processing tasks on data acquired by

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 102

called SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Engine Manager. Data is exchanged between SIMATIC IT applications via a temporary memory area called the SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server.

r’s Guide.

ment

cre

handl IC IT Real Time Data Engi ger. Since each Real Time Data e Project to more than one

p you need to u priate tool in the SIMATIC IT Real Time anager

1.18.7.38 Configuring the Real Time Data Engine User Unit

Unit:

1. Select command File > New

Tip

For more information, see manual Supervisory Environment Programming Use

You should use this Unit if you need to implement high-level data processing: the environoffered is extremely user-friendly and thus you no longer need to associate a project and a locreg to the Unit since these operations are executed automatically by the system upon

ation of the Unit.

SIMATIC IT automatically associates a project to a Real Time Data Engine Unit that can be ed only by the SIMAT ne Mana

Engine Unit handles a single Project you cannot associate the samReal Time Data Engine Unit.

The Real Time Data Engine Unit handles a 64Kb memory area called the SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server. This default size can be increased up to 512 Kb. To change the memory ma

se the appro Data Engine Menvironment.

To configure a Real Time Data Engine User

in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

ime Data Engine and click Next>.

3. In the Attributes dialog box, select the device name of the workstation to be associated to t box. With this operation data concerning the workstation g. node number of the device, IP Address, which is

.

name of the

6.

1.18.7.39

o configure a Real Time Data Engine User Unit and its network device:

and Fil

2. Select the Unit type USER UNIT – Real T

the Unit from the Device Name lisare assigned to the logical Unit (e.displayed by clicking the Additional Info button or moving the cursor over the device name)

4. Enter the identifier of the logical Unit (alphanumeric string up to 15 characters) in the Logical Unit Name edit box. By default this identifier is the same as the computer workstation.

5. (Optional) Enter a brief description in the Comment edit box.

Click Finish to save this configuration.

Configuring the Real Time Data Engine User Unit and the network device

T

1. Select comm e > New in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

2. Select the Unit type USER UNIT – Real Time Data Engine and click Next>.

Attributes dia nter the identifier of the logical Unit (alphanumeric string up to cters) in the

4. Check the Device C y Device option button. In the latter c o modify from the Device Name list box.

. (Optional) Enter a brief description in the Comment edit box.

3. In the log box, e15 chara Logical Unit Name edit box.

onfiguration box. Select the New Device or Modifase, choose the name of the device you want t

5

6. Click the Next button.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 103

7. The Control Unit device dialog box appears. Enter following data:

Parameter ActionDevice Name Enter a symbolic name of device to be added

characters). It is not allowed to use following characters @ to the network (max.15

# [ ] + - ! £ $ % & / ( ) = ? ^.

CPU type Select the type of CPU associated with the device: None: Used exclusively for supervision tasks

orks ntifies the default locreg

which will be assigned to all logical Units associated with this workstation (e.g. CPU type RTDS/IMC1 corresponds to locreg RTDS1). For more

ee System Locregs for SIMATIC IT Real

ocregs based on

1.18.7.40 RT Unit

1.18.7.41 Co RTDS/IMC-EXTERN DEVICE User Unit

RTDS/IMC-n: Used to read or write data to non-proprietary PLC networ other devices. Each type of RTDB_IMC CPU ide

information on system locregs, sTime Data Server. SPV-n: This CPU type is obsolete and is used only for old lVMS systems.

8. According to the network you select, you must insert different parameters:

- Arcnet

- Session Manager

9. Click Finish to save this configuration.

DS/IMC - EXTERN DEVICE User

nfiguring an

To configure a RTDS/IMC – EXTERN DEVICE User Unit:

1. Select command File > New in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

3. vice name of the workstation to be associated to the

4. ical Unit (alphanumeric string up to 15 characters) in the Logical

6. t > button.

se name from the DataBase box

8.

9.

2. Select the Unit type USER UNIT – RTDS/IMC – EXTERN DEVICE and click Next>.

In the Attributes dialog box, insert a deUnit in the Device Name box.

Enter the identifier of the logUnit Name edit box.

5. (Optional) Enter a brief description in the Comment edit box.

Click the Nex

7. In the Additional Attributes dialog box, choose a databaor edit a new name.

Select the locreg to be assigned to the User Unit from the Locreg listbox. The list shows all the system locregs and locregs created by the user.

Click Finish to save this configuration.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 104

1.19

1.19.1 n

1.19.1.1

sta thus obtain an up-to-date scenario of which

To work nodes in real time:

1. e. only if an Arcnet network has been defined during network

Paramet

Advanced Configuration

Networks and Communicatio

Monitoring network nodes

If you have configured an Arcnet network, either for supervision or control, you can display the tus of the network nodes in real-time and

workstations and P.M.C. controllers are currently connected to the network.

monitor the net

Select command Tools > Network Node Monitor from SIMATIC IT Management ConsolThis command is enabledconfiguration.

2. The Network Node Monitor application window shows the following information:

er DescriptionComputer Info – Node A node number assigned to the workstation or P.M.C.

controller

Selected Node Info when you select a node number from the grid, this box contains a brief description of the device type

. P.M.C. Series 8, P.M.C. Series 10, DOS Supervisor, etc.)

e replaced he channels used by each node (A, B or both).

ll single nodes are marked an asterisk. If a backup configuration is available, an asterisk is isplayed next to the master node.

1.19.1.2 Rebuilding the network configuration

re will delete the current network configuration, therefore it

he NETDEV.* files in the %\ICUBE.CNF directory.

undation Server (master server) without logging

ork

. Create a new network with all PCs and configure the IP Addresses of both Ethernet

n PMCs with their regular IP Addresses to the network configuration.

Computer Info – Node B node number assigned to the backup P.M.C. controller

connected (e.gDEC Station,

Furthermore, if you select the Displ. Ch. check box, the node numbers of the grid arwith the name of t

Ad

Important

The following proceduis strongly suggested to make a copy of it before proceeding

To rebuild the network configuration:

1. Delete t

2. Start SIMATIC IT Services on the primary Foon to a plant.

3. Enter the Network Configuration environment by selecting the Configuration > NetwConfiguration command.

4adapters.

5. Add all Ope

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 105

6. Log on to your plant, start the server modules and verify that all modules required by your

es on the auxiliary Foundation Server (slave server) without logging

. Wait several minutes and verify that the Slave has inherited the network configuration from

9. Shutdown and restart the Slave server, logging on to the plant.

ver.

synchronization before

nt.

Shutdown and restart the Client, logging on to the plant.

nfiguration > System the Start-Up tab and add

ssary, select the it the dialog box.

. ime alignment on client workstations

T network is automatically

However, in particular circumstances, the user can configure a different device as a reference omputer for time alignment.

o perform time alignment on client workstations:

the Foundation Servers tab.

. Check the Time Alignment box.

. Select the User Configuration option if you want to configure other devices (up to two) as

uration.

8. navailable, r.

Important

If, in either case, both Server 1 and Server 2 should be unreachable, the current network server will be used as a reference computer.

application on the server work properly.

7. Start SIMATIC IT Servicon to a plant.

8the Master.

10. On the slave server, start one of the modules that you have launched on the server (ex.SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server) and wait for it to be synchronous with that of the serThis will function as a backup module.

11. Proceed with the other backup modules, waiting for their complete launching the next module.

12. On all client workstations, start SIMATIC IT Services without logging on to a pla

13. Wait several minutes and verify that the Slave has inherited the network configuration from the Master.

14.

15. In SIMATIC IT Management Console environment select the Cocommand: the System Configuration dialog box appears. Selectthe applications previously removed from the Start-Up area. If neceAutomatic Log-On to Current Plant check box and click OK to ex

1 19.1.3 T

By default, time on the client workstations connected to the SIMATIC Ialigned to the time configured on the network server .

c

T

1. Enter the System Configuration window.

2. Select

3

4. Select the Foundation Servers option if you want to use the current network server as a reference computer for time alignment.

5reference computers for time alignment.

6. In the Device 1 combo box, select the first device from those defined in the current Network Config

Note If you select an OpenPMC device type, time alignment will be performed using this device as the reference.

7. Select the second workstation (optional) from the Server 2 combo box.

Time will be aligned to the time configured on the Device 1. Should this become uthe Server 2 computer, if defined, will become the new reference compute

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 106

1.19.1.4

ment environment, you can start some tools allowing you to carry out figurations, relative to the TCP/IP protocol and the RIS Inter-Process

ommunication.

ImportanUse of these t users only. It is recommended that you contact Siem S MES Technical Support Service for any additional informatio

1.19.1.5

1.19.1.6 nication Service

rocess Communication layer (RIS=Redundant IPC vice is used for client/server communication and requires the TCP/IP

proto

this service are:

dundant supervision networks (please contact Siemens A&D AS MES

s service, you need to perform the following operations, on ALL SIMATIC IT

etworking

1.19.1.7

ow to configure networking using RIS IPC in case of a non-redundant redundant network, see Configuring RIS parameters. For more

ant network with two Historian servers in hot backup.

s use standard Windows naming services.

one IP address ound to each adapter, and can have more than one adapter installed.

ImportanIf you have more than one IP address bound to a single adapter, it is always advisable to modify the IP address order in the control panel, by setting the IP address on which you want workstations to communicate as first in the list of IP attributes for a card.

Advanced configurations

From the Plant Manageadvanced conC

t tools is reserved to experens A&D A

n.

RIS

RIS Inter-Process Commu

SIMATIC IT Services offers an Inter-PService). This IPC ser

col.

The main features provided by

• Very fast detection of network failures.

• Support of reTechnical Support Service for more information)

To be able to use thiworkstations:

1. Install and configure the TCP/IP protocol

2. Configure n

Configuring networking using RIS IPC

This topic explains hnetwork. In case of ainformation, see Configuring a redund

SIMATIC IT IPC service

Note All workstations belonging to the SIMATIC IT network can have more thanb

By properly configuring HOSTS files, you can establish on which logical subnet or physical network the communication will flow.

t

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 107

t ImportanIf you havIT network co d above are always mandatory.

Important

If you are the supervisory subnet), you MUST N dresses are dynamically assigned.

If y ervices configured for the supervisory network, it is not alway (each single case should be evaluated).

Yo E utility to set IP parameters independently from the IPC type

Th scribe a networking configuration at a Windows level, to best support all s of SIMATIC IT:

• configuration with preferential network set for backup

• iguration with no preferential network.

• backup with two clients.

1.19.1.8 Ex

As n adapter installed with the following bound IP addresses:

•

•

As s an adapter with the following bound IP addresses:

•

•

•

y setting the server HOSTS file as follows:

an s:

e one or more OPMCs, you MUST type IP addresses in the SIMATIC nfiguration but, anyhow, configurations showe

using workstations that are DHCP clients (forOT fill in the HOSTS file since IP ad

ou have Wins, DNS or other naming ss necessary to fill the HOSTS files

u must always run TCPTUNused.

e following examples desupervision communication

Two servers in hot-backup communications.

Two servers in hot-backup conf

A single server without

ample

sume that a server (SRV1) has a

172.31.2.1

10.10.4.1

sume that a client (CLI1) ha

172.31.2.2

10.10.4.2

200.200.100.2

B

• 172.31.2.2 CLI1

• subnet mask: 255.255.0.0

d the client HOSTS file as follow

• 172.31.2.1 SRV1

• subnet mask: 255.255.0.0

all communications between SIMATIC IT Historian components will flow on subnet: 172.31.0.0

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 108

1.19.1.9 Ex

As as two adapters installed with the following bound IP addresses:

•

•

As o adapters with the following bound IP addresses:

•

•

By file as follows:

•

an llows:

•

the rkstations will flow on the Subnet set in the file.

By oned above, SIMATIC IT Services does NOT use the IP ad onfiguration.

Fo names of all of the workstations belonging to the same network is eno system to work.

1.19.1.10 Ex ot-backup configuration with preferential network set for backup communications.

1. s for the two backup servers are SRV1 and SRV2 and CLIx (CLI1, CLI2,etc.) for each client workstation.

ter) connecting each r)

are:

1.1.2

31.1.3

00.200.2

4. e file: HOSTS (%\winnt\system32\etc) as follows:

.3 SRV2

OSTS file will be:

- 200.200.200.4:CLI1

ample

sume that a server (SRV1) h

172.31.5.1

200.200.100.1

sume that a client (CLI1) has tw

172.31.5.2

200.200.100.2

setting the server HOSTS

172.31.5.2 CLI1

d the client HOSTS file as fo

172.31.5.1 SRV1

communication between wo

setting the operations mentidresses set in the Network C

r this reason, setting just theugh to allow the

ample - Two servers in h

Assume that the computer name

2. Assume that the two servers each have a network adapter (A adapother as a preferential network for backup communications, and another adapter (B adapteto link to clients.

3. Then assume that the IP addresses

- SRV1 (A adapter): 172.3

- SRV2 (A adapter): 172.

- SRV1 (B adapter):200.2

- SRV2 (B adapter):200.200.200.3

- CLI1: 200.200.200.4

- CLI2: 200.200.200.5

Edit, on all workstations, th

The SRV1 HOSTS file will be:

- 172.31.1

- 200.200.200.4: CLI1

- 200.200.200.5: CLI2

The SRV2 H

- 172.31.1.2:SRV1

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 109

- 200.200.200.5:CLI2

The client HOSTS files will be:

- CLI1:

s a matter of fact, HOST files declare:

the IP address of the preferential network (so communications among them will always flow

1.19.1.11 xample - Two servers in hot-backup configuration with no preferential network

. Assume that the computer names for the two backup servers are SRV1 and SRV2 and CLIx

following:

- SRV1 :200.200.200.2

00.200.5

3. c) as follows:

- 200.200.200.3: SRV2

0.200.5: CLI2

00.200.4: CLI1

- 200.200.200.5: CLI2

- 200.200.200.2: SRV1

- 200.200.200.3: SRV2

- 200.200.200.5: CLI2

- CLI2:

- 200.200.200.2: SRV1

- 200.200.200.3: SRV2

- 200.200.200.4: CLI1

A

•on that network) on 2 servers,

• the secondary network on clients

E

1(CLI1, CLI2, etc.) for each client workstations.

2. Then assume that the IP addresses are the

- SRV2 :200.200.200.3

- CLI1: 200.200.200.4

- CLI2: 200.2

Edit, on all workstations, the file: HOSTS (%\winnt\system32\et

The SRV1 HOSTS file will be:

- 200.200.200.4: CLI1

- 200.20

SRV2 HOSTS file will be:

- 200.200.200.2: SRV1

- 200.2

- 200.200.200.5: CLI2

Client HOSTS files will be:

- CLI1:

- 200.200.200.2: SRV1

- 200.200.200.3: SRV2

- CLI2:

- 200.200.200.2: SRV1

- 200.200.200.3: SRV2

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 110

- 200.200.200.4: CLI1

1.19.1.12 nts

ame for the server is SRV1 and for each client workstation is

2. Assume that the IP addresses are:

. Edit, on all workstations, the file: HOSTS (%\winnt\system32\etc) as follows:

The SRV1 HOSTS file will be:

- CLI1:

1.19.1.13 Co network with two Historian servers in hot-backup

Generally, at least two network adapters are required for each SIMATIC IT workstation.

If the priority communication channel (Ch. A) fails and a secondary (backup) communication tions switch to the applications on the backup automatically when the priority channel is

ing of communications on Ch. A, a problem on the backup s causing a brief disconnection of communications on this channel, and if problem on the priority channel occurs, the switching to Ch. B occurs in any

at will be notified to the user munications on Ch. B. This event is highlighted e graphic panels.

1.19.1.14 rian servers in and one client

ImportanThe follow procedure cannot be used in an upgrade from a non-redundant to r ning application.

ave th

Example - A single server without backup with two clie

1. Assume that the computer nCLIx (CLI1, CLI2, etc.).

- SRV1 :200.200.200.2

- CLI1: 200.200.200.4

- CLI2: 200.200.200.5

3

- 200.200.200.4: CLI1

- 200.200.200.5: CLI2

The client HOSTS files will be:

- 200.200.200.2: SRV1

- 200.200.200.5: CLI2

- CLI2:

- 200.200.200.2: SRV1

- 200.200.200.4: CLI1

nfiguring a redundant

channel (Ch. B) has been defined, all communicachannel. The secondary-priority switching occursrestored.

Note If, during the correct functionbackbone occurconsecutively a case. However it is preceded by a brief network interruption thapplications before the establishment of all comto the user by the appearance of "hashes" on th

Example of a configuration of a redundant network with two Histohot-backup configuration

t ing

edundant network on a SIMATIC IT run

Suppose you h e following configuration:

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 111

• Master, Slave and dapters installed (Adapt1 and Adapt2).

• 2 active Hubs (one for network 1 and the other for network 2).

•

•

r for each Adapt1 of all PCs)

k 255.255.255.0

Note In multi-homed systems it would be possible to have more IP Addresses assigned to each ter. In this case ust select the address you want to use for supervision

communication as pr

s on the network:

In SIMATIC IT Management Console environment, select the Configuration > System command: the System Configuration dialog box appears. Select the Start-Up tab and

Automatic Log-On to Current lant check box and click OK to exit the dialog box. Close SIMATIC IT Management

2.

timeouts

1.19.1.15

e system comes provided with the RIS Configuration Wizard. Two types of configuration can be performed: automatic and custom. A custom configuration can be either non-redundant or redundant.

ImportanSince thespossible mMES Techni

To configure the RIS parameters:

.

. From the RIS Configuration dialog box, click the RIS Configuration button: this calls up the RIS Configuration Wizard.

3. Choose the type of configuration you want to perform:

- Default configuration

- User-defined (Custom) configuration

Client PCs having two single-channel Ethernet a

• All Adapt1 adapters connected to Hub 1 and all Adapt2 adapters connected to Hub 2. Adapt 1 and 2 will be used for supervision communication.

To stand on different networks, both adapters must be configured on each PC as follows:

Adapt1:

- IP Address: 179.29.254.x (x is a different numbe

- Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

• Adapt2:

- IP Address: 200.200.1.y (y is a different number for each Adapt2 of all PCs)

- Subnet mas

adap you mimary.

Perform the following actions on all SIMATIC IT workstation

1.

remove all applications from the Start-Up area. Deselect thePConsole.

Set a redundant configuration via RIS Configuration Wizard

3. Optimize TCP/IP

4. Rebuild the network configuration

Configuring the RIS parameters

To configure RIS parameters, th

t e configurations must be carried out very carefully in order to avoid alfunctions, it is recommended that you contact Siemens A&D AS

cal Support Service

1. From the Plant Management environment, select command Tools > Advanced > R.I.SConfiguration.

2

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 112

1.19.1.16 Configuring the RIS parameters (Default)

. Click Finish to complete RIS configuration.

1.19.1.17 Configuring the RIS parameters (Custom)

from the RIS Configuration wizard:

. Select the Custom option.

2. Click Next.

3. Choose the type of custom co

To execute: Select a non-redundant configuration the Non Redundant button

step 4. a redundant configuration select the Re

seconds you (recommendthe basis of the network’s reliability) and click Next.

. The Insert the Port Number dialog box is displayed. Enter the port number of your choice ck Next to confirm your entry.

he Add button. To render your entries then OK.

For Non t configuration, skip dire 7.

ly fo ation): The IP Address File dialog box is displayed to define the name – IP address.

rk configuration is Yes The IPADDR.INI file (static

Click Next to confirm your selection. Move on to step 7.

7. (For both Redundant and Non Redundant The Summary Table dialog box is displaye ou have made for the R m

To configure the default RIS parameters from the RIS Configuration wizard:

1. Select the Automatic option.

2. Click Next.

3. The Default Parameter Settings dialog box is displayed.

4

To configure the custom RIS parameters

1

nfiguration you want to perform:

and click Next. Move on to

dundant button, enter the number of want to set as the timeout in TimeoutSec

ed: >=3; this value must be evaluated on

Move on to step 4.

4and cli

5. If you want to change the default IP address, click the Default IP Address Configurator button: a dedicated dialog box is displayed. Enter the Computer name and the addresses of your choice for Channel 1 and Channel 2. Click teffective, click the Apply button andFor Redundant configuration, move on to step 6.

Redundan ctly to step

6. (On r Redundant configur

, allowing you to choose how

If you select: No

Then The netwo used.

configuration) is used..

configuration):

d, summarizing all the choices yIS parameters. Click Finish to co plete RIS configuration.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 113

1.19.1.18 IPADDR.INI

This file is generated by the system automatica manner whatsoever. It is used in certain circumstances addresses.

1.19.1.19 Adding a new FAT Server

1. Click the Add new button: this calls up the

2. In field FAT Server:, enter the name of the OK.

3. This returns you to the Default settings tab at the end of the list in the FAT Server: area.

Note To remove a FAT Server from the list in the FA r to be removed to k the Remove butt

1.19.1.20 TCP/IP

1.19.1.21 Configuring the TCP protocol

When using SIMATIC IT Services and the TCP perly configured in order to be able to take advantag unication layer (RIS=Redundant IPC Service).

To this end, the system provides an ad-hoc tool, called TcpTune.

To perform TCP protocol configuration:

1. From the Plant Management environment, s d > Network Tune.

2. From the TcpTune dialog box, click:

Button

lly and must not be edited in any to map computer names to IP

Procedure Add a new FAT server dialog box.

FAT Server to be added and click

: the FAT Server has been added

T Server: area, click the FAT Serve select it and clic on.

/IP protocol, Windows has to be proe of the new Inter-Process Comm

elect command Tools > Advance

Description

RecommendedTo launch auto s are automaticabest performan

for all users. matic configuration. The parameterlly configured in order to provide for ces when working with the system.

Reserved for expert users only. l configuration. You can configure

d save their value by clicking button button Default to restore the default alue for the current parameter.

come effective only

To start manua all parameters anUpdate. Click configuration v

3. Click Exit to quit. All changes applied will be after restarting the computer.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 114

Note You can generate a dump file of the current configuration by clicking button Info and then button Save, in the Network Configuration dialog box. You will be prompted to enter the name of

ues will be saved.

1.19.1.22 Protocol

the file where configuration val

Configurable TCP/IP parameters Parameter Description

SIMATIC IT S Delay applied when notifying a connection failure to backup applications. This notification occurs whenever the "alive message" transmission between the two backup servers fails.

or internal use only NetBT Sessions SessionKeepAlive Determines the transmission interval

(in milliseconds) of the keep-alive package. This allows the system to

By reducing the transmission interval,

connection failure is also reduced. TCP/IP Protocol TcpMaxConnectRetransmissions Determines how many times TCP

retransmits an unanswered request for a new connection. TCP retransmits

they lue

expires. Changes to this value allow you to reduce the interval required to detect a connection failure, thus, the client switch-over occurs in a shorter time.

TcpMaxDataRetransmissions Determines how many times TCP

TCP retransmits data segments until they are acknowledged, or until this value expires. This parameter should be configured together with TcpMaxConnectRetransmissions in order to reduce the interval required by the client to perform a switch-over.

rmines how often TCP sends CP sends

ons to verify that connection (i.e. with no data ission) is still active.

idle connections are still active. This prevents TCP from inadvertently disconnecting active lines.

Sets DisableDHCPMediaSense to 1 Windows contains the "Media

ervices HeartBeatFailTimeout

AdiMaxTimeoutRetrasmit F

detect the so-called "orphan sessions", i.e., sessions considered active by a server application, even if the corresponding client is disconnected.

the time required to detect a

new connection requests untilare answered, or until this va

retransmits an unacknowledged data segment on an existing connection.

KeepAlive Time Detekeep-alive transmissions. Tkeep-alive transmissian idletransm

KeepAlive Interval Determines how often TCP repeats keep-alive transmissions when no response is received. TCP sends keep-alive transmissions to verify that

DHCP Media Sense Disabled:

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 115

Sensing" feature. This feature can be used on a Windows-based computer with TCP/IP to detect whether or not

e network. For example, assuming a 10bt or 100bt physical media, Ethernet network adapters and hubs typically have a "link" light to

etwork adapter to detect this you can configure this by

editing the registry. See Microsoft Windows article

ails.

1.19.1.23 outs

1.

2.

3. e dialog box.

1.19.1.24

1.19.1.25 verview of CAB Protocol Configurator

Introduction CAB Protocol Configurator is a tool used to configure the IPC communication channel for CAB.

changed only if the features offered by the HTTP or HTTPS protocol are required.

ConfiguratTwo ty n can be set using CAB Protocol Configurator:

• de ndatory)

specific subnet configuration (optional).

the network media is in a "link state". A "link state" is defined as the physical media connecting or inserting itself on th

indicate the current connection status. This is the same condition in which Windows can detect a link. Whenever Windows detects a "down" state on the media, it removes the bound protocols from that adapter until it is detected as "up" again. There may be situations where you may not want your nstate, and

Q239924 for more det

Optimizing TCP/IP time

To optimize TCP/IP timeouts:

In the %\ICUBESYS\BIN directory, double click the TCPTUNE.exe file.

The TcpTune dialog box appears: click the Automatic Tuning button.

Click OK to exit th

4. Shutdown and restart the workstation.

CAB Protocol Configurator

O

CAB Clients will use the configuration set via CAB Protocol Configurator on CAB Runtime Server Engine to select the communication channel to be used for the connection betweenclients and servers present on the Plant.

The default protocol is Standard IPC: it must be

ion types pes of configuratio

fault configuration (ma

•

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 116

Running the tool Cab

1.19.1.26 he default settings

Introduction A minimum default configuration must be defined:

launched for the first time;

The default configuration defines the communication protocol that is used in the absence of a specific subnet configuration for any request not contemplated in the subnet configuration and, if

ry; the Web Server. The supported communication protocols are IPC, HTTP and

RequirementsMin

• Fat Server.

Procedure 1. n > Cab Configuration. This calls up the CAB

Protocol Configuration dialog box, with the focus on the Default settings tab.

2. In field Protocol, select the type of protocol you require (default: IPC). Should you choose

d

y are listed).

rver

To run CAB Protocol Configurator, operating in Plant Management, select Configuration > Configuration.

Defining t

• when CAB Protocol Configurator is

• if the configuration database has been removed.

necessaHTTPS. The default configuration also defines a list of reference FAT Servers used for the connection.

for minimum default configuration imum default configuration requires:

• Selecting the default communication protocol (IPC,HTTP,HTTPS);

Defining at least one

• (Only if HTTP or HTTPS has been selected as the default communication protocol) Specifying the IP address of the Web Server where the SITISAPI Extension that provides support to the HTTP or HTTPS protocol is installed.

In Plant Management, select Configuratio

either HTTP or HTTPS, enter the address of the Web Server in field Web Server IP.

3. In the FAT Server: area, check to see whether the FAT Server(s) you require are listed, anwhether they are displayed in the desired order (FAT Servers are processed sequentially in the same order as that in which the

Important The minimum default configuration requires that at least one FAT Se be entered. In the case of an empty FAT Server list, the system will return to its initial condition without any configuration whatsoever.

4. If necessary, temporarily remove all FAT Servers from the displayed FAT Server list byclicking the undesired items and clicking the R

emove button. to permit the insertion of the

5. If necessary, add a new FAT Server.

FAT Servers in the desired order. Likewise, if you need to remove one or more FAT Servers from the FAT Server list, click the FAT Server(s) to be removed to select it and click the Remove button.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 117

6. Click the OK or Apply button in the CAB Protocol Configuration dialog box so that the changes made become effective.

1.19.1.27

.

55.0.0

TP

ocol, adopting the machine with IP 100.100.100.2 as ISAPI Provider server.

When computer Cli1 connects, it will use standard IPC as the communication protocol.

Ree been defined.

Procedure

. Click the Subnet settings tab of the CAB Protocol Configurator dialog box.The Subnets: essed during querying, those subnets for

ch with the Web Server and the first time, the list will be empty).

. To add a new subnet configuration, click the Add new button. This calls up the Add a new

4. in fields IP Address and Subnet Mask. Enter the communication protocol to be used in field Protocol and the reference Web Server in field Web Server IP and click OK: this returns you to the Subnet settings tab.

Defining specific subnet settings

Purpose Permits defining a list of subnets, identified by means of an IP address and a subnet mask

If a communication request coming from a CAB Client concerns a subnet specified in this configuration, the communication system will use the specified protocol and the reference WebServer (if present) for that particular subnet.

Example of behaviour Configuration:

Cli1 Ip 172.31.5.0

Mask 255.2

Cli2 Ip 200.200.100.100

Mask 255.255.0.0

The Subnets area of the Subnet settings tab lists only one subnet entry, i.e.:

Ip Address 200.200.0.0 Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 Web Server 100.100.100.2 Protocol HT

Therefore:

• When computer Cli2 connects, it will use the HTTP prot

•

quirement for defining subnet settings To define specific subnet settings, the default settings must already hav

1. Upon completing the default configuration, click the Apply button to confirm the changes made in the Default settings tab.

2area lists, in the same order in which they are proc

een defined, eawhich a particular configuration has bProtocol that will be used (the

3subnet dialog box.

Enter the data required for the new subnet

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 118

5. The new subnet will be added at the bottom of the list in the Subnets: area.

Notes s occur while saving the changes

may be discarded or not to e ter two subnets that are identical, the second coinciding .

1.19.1.28 CAB Protocol Configurator

N tting is required to pe

his message is displayed the first time that the configurator is started or if the database ontaining the configuration data has been lost.

ade by clicking the Apply button. Then, if necessary, enter the specific settings for nets.

regarding the default settings will not be saved properly.

fault settings have not been saved.

elaunch the configuration tool, correct the default settings and reattempt to save the changes

The subnet settings have not been saved properly. he subnet settings have been saved only in part: this may mean that there is a duplicate

rk that has been discarded automatically and the settings of which have not been saved.

ade that were written

The subne d

-saved.

1.19.2

1.19.2.1 Client/Server Architecture

k fered by this operating system. Therefore you can implement a powerful client-server

lant resident on the server workstation from a number of client workstations, defined in your network configuration.

6. The changes made will become effective only after clicking the OK or Apply button in the CAB Protocol Configurator dialog box.

Dedicated message boxes will be displayed should any errormade. In particular, in the case of a wrong configuration, some data saved: for example, if you attempt nsubnet will be automatically deleted

Troubleshooting for

o default setting has been found on the local system. A default sermit proper operation; please type a default setting.

Tc

If you are using CAB Protocol Configurator for the first time, enter a default setting and save the changes mthe sub

Due to an unexpected error, some changes

The changes made to the de

Rmade.

Tnetwo

Close the application and relaunch it to view the status of the changes msuccessfully and, if necessary, add new subnets, removing any duplicate ones.

t settings have not been changed. CAB Protocol Configurator has been started, but only the default settings have been viewed bythe user. In this case, the subnet settings remain unchanged: therefore, they will not be modifieand then re

Client/Server Architecture

SIMATIC IT has been built on the Windows operating system and makes full use of the networservices ofarchitecture and access the P

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 119

Furthermore a distributed client-server architecture makes it possible to subdivide the cessing workload among different computers since SIMATIC IT compro ponents can run on any

Importan

When SIMuser currently logged oThis impli part of a Workgroup, it is extremely important r of the SIMATIC IT network.

ng operations must be performed on the server workstation in order to configure a lient-server architecture, after having defined the network and created the Plant:

;

ese operations are to be executed in the Plant Management environment.

shared:

workstation, even those on which the Plant is not located.

t ATIC IT is used in a Client /Server architecture, it uses the Windows

n. Thus, it is subject to Windows security management. es that, if Windows users are to keep user definition congruent on each compute

The followic

• on the workstation where the Plant is located:

- you must share the Plant

• on the client workstations:

- you must connect to the remote Plant.

Th

1.19.2.2 Sharing a Plant

In order for client workstations to log on to a remote Plant, the Plant on the server workstation must be

To share a Plant:

1. Select the Plant icon in the Plant Management window.

2. Select command File > Share .

A s ith the standard Windows iconhared Plant is represented w in the Plant Management

Importan

You are strondirectory from

> Stop Sharing

window. When you share a Plant, the whole Plant directory is actually shared using the Plant name as share name.

t gly recommended not to share/unshare the drive and/or Plant an external file manager tool (e.g. Windows Explorer).

To cancel Plant sharing, choose command File in the Plant Management window.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 120

1.19.2.3 Connecting to a remote Plant

To log on to a remote Plant from a client workstation, you must first connect to the workstation where the Plant is located.

To connect to a remote Plant:

1. In Plant Management, expand the plant tree to find the Plant of interest.

2. Select the plant icon .

You can then open the Pla on the remote workstation.

1.19.2.4 Emergency configura ions

In addition to hot-backup co sole provides other tools to overcome a possible failure of the server workstation (i.e. the workstation where the Plant is located), so that, in the event that the server workstation crashes or is disconnected from the network, client workstations still have access to Plant data and are able to provide supervisory functions.

Management Console, in the event that the PLANT on the server workstation ecomes unavailable after the client workstation has already logged on.

Each client workstation configured in Advanced mode can supply some or all of the following functions:

r than the Plant server workstation)

alarms (only if the SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager server module

IMATIC IT Management Console copies to the client workstation drive the following files:

•

es are maintained in alignment with the corresponding files on the server orkstation. SIMATIC IT Management Console replicates such files to all client workstations

e aded from the local drive and not from the network,

ch makes access to information much faster.

nt of interest

tion for SIMATIC IT client workstat

nfiguration, SIMATIC IT Management Con

To make use of this feature you need to configure the client workstations in advanced mode; that is, create an "image" of the Plant on the client drive. This configuration will be deployed by SIMATIC IT b

• displaying graphic panels

• displaying historical trends (only if the SIMATIC IT Plant Data Archive server module is running on a workstation othe

• displaying and acknowledgingis running on a workstation other than the Plant server workstation)

S

• compiled graphic panels

Historian Data Display workspaces

• AMD workspaces

• functional keyboard configuration

The above filweither when they connect to the Plant , each time the Unit databases or the Zone files are updated ,and every 12 hours.

Note Even during normal operation of the SIMATIC IT Management Console server workstation, client workstations have an advantage from the advanced configuration, becausworkspaces and configuration files are lowhi

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 121

1.19.2.5 Configuring a client workstation

select the files to be aligned on the client workstation and to define their update

To select files to be aligned:

1. On the clie nd Configuration > System in SIMATIC IT Manag

2. Click th ation tab in the System Configuration window.

3. Check ox. Please note that this box is disabled on a server workstation! The Advanced area is enabled.

4. Click the Files tab. In the Drives box select the drive where the plant of interest is located.

5. Select the zones to be replicated on the local machine from the Remote zones list box and click the Add-> button.

ed to the Local zones list box.

ent Console replicates all the files (compiled graphic

To remove some zone files from the replicate list: cal zones list box.

st box.

. Click the < Remove button. The selected file types are moved to the Remote files list box.

To define the file align

lso configure alignment intervals.

n, select command Configuration > System in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

k the tion tab in the System Configuration window.

3. Check th led on a server workstation! The anced area is enabled.

4. Click the Configuration tab.

5. Select: Option

It is possible tomode.

nt workstation, select commaement Console.

e Plant Configur

the Advanced b

6. The selected zones are mov

7. By default, SIMATIC IT Managempanels, AMD and Historian Data Display workspaces, functional keyboard configuration)related to the selected Zones.

1. Select the Zone of interest from the Lo

2. Select the file type from the Local files li

3

ment mode: s and on event (i.e. each time data changes). By Files can be aligned both at pre-defined interval

default files are aligned on event, but you can a

1. On the client workstatio

2. Clic Plant Configura

e Advanced box. Please note that this box is disabAdv

DescriptionUpon interval alignment box Align files automatically every 12 hours. At pre-defined time alignment Align files at pre-defined time intervals.You must

enter the exact time when file alignment must start.

1.19.2.6 Disabling file alignment

You can disable the alignment of Plant files on the client workstation according to the following criteria:

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 122

• If you want to disable the alignment of files each time data changes:

1. On the client workstation, select command Configuration > System in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

ote that this box is disabled on a server workstation! The

5. Check the Disable upon change alignment box. In this way, files will be automatically by the user.

• odic alignments, edit the BCKUPMNG.CNF file (stored in the ion where the master Plant is located) and set the er to 1.

You can define a subset of files to be replicated on the client workstation, by setting appropriate

o do this, you must edit the BCKFILT.INI file located in the drive:\ICUBE.CNF directory of the aster Plant is located.

For each local plant, a dedicated section is available. The [PLANTn] keyword must be replaced hose files will be replicated. Each pathcode refers to a file type.

Delete the pathcodes you do not need.

[PLANT1]

r?

rw

1025 = *.wk?

*.wkg

Pathcode

2. Click the Plant Configuration tab in the System Configuration window.

3. Check the Advanced box. Please nAdvanced area is enabled.

4. Click the Configuration tab.

aligned only at the intervals configured

If you want to disable all peridrive:\ICUBE.CNF directory of the workstatDISABLE_PERIOD_ALIGNMENT paramet

1.19.2.7 Filtering files to be replicated

filters.

Tworkstation where the m

with the name of the Plant w

225 = *.g

516 = *.g

1793 =

Definition

225 = *.gr? graphic panels 516 = *.grw graphic workspaces 1025 = *.wk? 1793 = *.wkg

t, SIMATIC IT Services provides some e Groups.

alarm workspaces data workspaces

1.19.3 Security Management

1.19.3.1 Security Management

In addition to account and access level managemenadditional security features. For further information, se

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 123

1. Enter the System Configuration window.

3. eed according to your needs.

1.19.3.2

IMATIC IT Services provides some security options, which help you to manage user rights.

ou can enable/disable for each user account:

Ho

2. Select the Foundation Servers tab.

Then proc

Disabling hotkey combinations

S

Y

• Hotkey combinations:

tkey combination Description

ALT + TAB Commonly used to switch forward between programs. ALT + SHIFT + TAB Commonly used to switch backward between programs.

isplay the Start menu and to move the focus to taskbar. ALT + ESC Winkey

CTRL + ALT + information, see Disabling Ctrl+Alt+Del.

ur computer and to monitor

1.19.3.3

ws security allows you to disable the sequence of the CTRL ALT DEL keys only after placing the DLL called MSGINA.DLL (Graphical Identification and Authentication).

he DLL provided by SIMATIC IT Services is called orsigina.dll. There are other commercial replace this DLL.

re, SIMATIC IT Management Con of this DLL and will ask r if he can replace it with its own o

To disable this sequence of keys:

ult box. The Disable CTRL+ALT+DEL check box will be activated.

eck the Disable CTRL

Windows L

When you quit SIMATIC IT M t Console with option Automatic Windows Logon, you can configure the user name d for the automatic logon, next time you restart the system.

CTRL + ESC Commonly used to dCommonly used to display the next window. Commonly used to shortcut access the Start button or other Windows NT functions .

DEL Commonly used to begin the process of logging on or off. For more

• Task Manager utility (used to control the programs running on yoyour computer’s performance)

Disabling Ctrl Alt Del

Windore

Tproducts, which can

Therefothe use

sole will verify the presencene, if necessary.

1. Check the Subst defa msgina.dll (Need NT restart)

+ALT+DEL box. 2. Ch

1.19.3.4 Automatic ogon

anagemen and password which will be use

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 124

To configure the automatic W ogon:

. Enter the System Config

2. Select the Security tab.

3. Enter the following data i indows Logon area:

Field

indows l

uration window. 1

n the Automatic W

DescriptionDefault User U t to Windows. Default Domain DDefault Password P ows.

C o 14 characters, and is case-sensitive. Confirm Pass ord Type again the password to check if you entered it

correctly.

1.

personation occurs when one user takes on the security attributes of another.

en implemented yet.

1.19.4 External components

1.19.4.1 mponents to the Client menu

ts to the Client menu:

. Enter the System Configuration window.

Third Party Applications tab.

n.

n d d-On Application option and

. In the Add on dialog box, select the directory where the third-party component file (.ADN extension) is stored. This file is supplied with the third-party component. Select Open button.

onent name to the Client menu in SIMATIC IT Management

tant If you want to remove a previously installed third-party component click the Remove b es created in the Plant and used by the component, click the

1.19.4.2 Structure of .ADN files

s comes provided with an example file (GENERIC.ADN, found in the BIN directory) to aid the user in s addition of third-party applications (and their relativ es).

Important

nique name identifying the user accounomain in which the account participates. assword required for the user to log on to Windan be up t

w

19.3.5 Impersonate User

Im

This option has not be

Adding third-party co

To add third-party componen

1

2. Select the

3. Click the Add butto

4. In the Add Applicatioclick OK.

ialog box, select the Third Party Ad

5

6. Click OK to add the compConsole.

Impor

utton. To delete the directoriDirectories button.

SIMATIC IT Servicetructuring an .ADN file to permit the e resourc

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 125

Structuring and editing .ADN files must be performed solely by expert users. Removing an .ADN file results in the elimination of the associated third-party application and its resources.

ontents of example file GENERIC.ADN are given below, with a description of its main .

Sections and keys:

Third-Party application

ame=GNR Name of the Third Party application’s license

f the executable user wants the application to

PlantDir=GENated to the Third-Party

application. orkingDir=C TE\PROVE Working directory of the application.

Any input parameters required by the

Unpported by a particular Unit.

ZoneInfo=NO Indicates if the application must be supported by a particular Zone.

s ires a

GMS=Yes Indicates whether the application must be integrated with GUI

MaxInst=2 Maximum number of instances of the launched at the

RESNO=n s associated to the h resource, a [Resource

Info] section must be added at the end of the .AND file.

Important

The followavailable languages, add the same keys with ESP = <string in Spanish>, FRA = <string in French>, DEU = <string in Ger compiling the .ADN files.

[Short Description]

ENG=Generic App

ITA=Appl. Generica

The ckeys

[Application Info]

ID=33 Numerical identifier of the

N

Path=C:\ICUBESYS\BIN\GENERIC.EXE Complete path oStartUp=Yes Indicates if the

be configured for Automatic Startup. ERIC The name of a directory (if present) inside

the Plant that is dedic

WIn

:\SputPar=

application itInfo=NO Indicates if the application must be

su

ToolButton= Not used Licensed=Ye Indicates whether the application requ

license

application that can be same time Number of resourceapplication. For eac

ing sections contain keys ENG and ITA. To view the keys in the other

man>, when

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 126

[Extended Description]

ENG=Generic Application

ITA=Applicazione Generica

ENG=Generic

ITA=Applicazione nder Client

[Menu Help] ENG=Starts a generic third party application String that described the menu item in

English String that described the menu item in Italian

[Resource Info 1] ID= Numerical identifier of the application’s

resource ENG= of the resource in English ITA= source in Italian

Importan

There will be fo] sections as there are specified in key RESNO of section [Application Info]. For example, if RESNO = n, there will be n [Resource Info] sections.

1.19.4.3

The third-party modules have been developed by Siemens A&D AS MES in co-operation with ticular requirements of an automation system and thus are system.

Important

[Menu Item] Third Party Application Menu item that will appear under Client

menu in English di Terze Parti Generica Menu item that will appear u

menu in Italian

ITA=Lancia una applicazione di terze partigenerica

[PlantDir Description]

ENG=Generic Application Files

ITA=File per Applicazione Generica

Name Name of the re

……….

[Resource Info n]

ID=

ENG=

ITA=

t as many [Resource In

Starting the third-party modules

other companies in order to meet partightly integrated into the SIMATIC IT

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 127

To start th - sole you must add the modu Adding third-party module

1.19.4.4

Custom components are general-purpose programs that can be added to Client menu in

To add custom components to the Client menu:

plications tab.

3. Click the Add button.

the Add Application ect the Custom/Standard Application option and ck OK.

e Add Custom Application dialog box, enter the following data:

Par r

ird party modules from SIMATIC IT Management Conle name to the Client menu. For more information, see

s to the Client menu.

Adding custom components to the Client menu

Management Console.

1. Enter the System Configuration window.

2. Select the Third Party Ap

4. In cli

dialog box, sel

5. In th

amete DescriptionMenu Item omponent. This

nt menu. He Strin which will be displayed in the

status bar. Optional. Command Line Name of the executable program, without path. Working Directory tored. Add custoapplicatio

ponent be

startup. Then, if you want

this component to the Startup Configuration. For more information, see Starting SIMATIC IT components automatically.

6. Click OK and then click Close to add the component name to the menu.

7. To change the configuration parameters of the component, click the Modify button.

To delete the custom component, click Remove.

Troubleshooting Tools

1.20.1 Alerter service

cally generates diagnostic messages concerning the activity of rt is generated, a message box appears and prompts you to

expandi d double-clicking Alert Service. The Messages dialog box lists

Name to be assigned to the user cname will be displayed in the Clie

lp g Brief description

Directory where the component files are sp Check this box if you want to insert the com application to startu

ns m

name in the list of the components that can activated upon systemto start the component automatically, you must add

1.20

The SIMATIC IT system automatiyour workstation: each time an aleeither view or ignore the message.

You can later view these messages with command Services > Alerter in SIMATIC IT Management Console or by selecting the Services tab in SIMATIC IT Management Console,

ng the System folder anthe most recent messages generated during the current working session.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 128

Check the Show only errors box to display only messages concerning the failure of some operations. If you clear this box, the system also lists warning and general diagnostic messages.

1.20.2 Log File Viewer

1.20.2.1 Ov e f Log

lated to operations performed on your workstation.

hen you start the Log File Viewer, the contents of the system log file are displayed in the Log ile Viewer window.

You can vie

• Application log files

• Lo

You can view log files only if your user name has been associated to the Administrators group (or to an equivalent group owning the Access to Administrative Tools resource).

Structure of log file messages

Each message displayed in the Log File Viewer window contains the following items:

• event type (icon and d

date and time when the message was generated

• name of the application which generated the message

• name of the connected user

• PID

•

The first column also displays an icon, indicating the message’s level of priority or urgency. The

Icon

Click OK to close the dialog box.

ervi w o File Viewer

The SIMATIC IT Log File contains all error and warning messages re

WF

w:

g files created on other workstations

1.20.2.2

escription).

•

• message with the event description

• computer name of the workstation on which the message was generated

(Process identifier)

• TID (Thread identifier)

Process

following icons are possible:

Label Message description

ERROR Local error (i.e. one that is easy to recover from, as it will only affect the current routine or function)

WA NING A problem that is not actually an error (e.g. unexpected Rparameters or conditions)

INFO An informational message that reports neither problems nor errors

SUCCESS AUDIT Access to the system completed successfully

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 129

FAILURE AUDIT Access to the system failed

USithout affecting anything else

ER (Intended for internal use) An event that can easily be filtered out w

DEBUG (Intended for internal use) An event that can easily be without affecting infos, warnings, or errors

filtered out

OMANDAT RY Text that must appear in the trace file, regardless of the current trace filter (e.g. headlines)

FATAL ERROR

1.20.2.3 Starting the Log File Viewer

Log File Viewer, depending on the environment in which you are currently working, d as follows:

An error that will affect the whole system and likely prevent proper recovery

To start the procee

Environment SelectPlant Mana ment ge Tools SIMATIC IT Management Console

Tools > Log File Viewer Or

> Log File Viewer tab

> Tools > Log File Viewer

1.20.2.4

To update the list of messages with the most recent messages generated by the system:

1. Select command File > Refresh, press key F5 or click the Refresh button

Updating log file messages

in the in Log

2. ssages is updated with the most recent messages generated by the system.

1.20.2.5 Displaying details of a message

ay the details of a log message:

1. Select the me

2. Double click th

The Event Pr rs.

e t event in the list, click

the

File Viewer toolbar.

The list of me

To displ

ssage of interest in the Log File Viewer window.

e message.

3. operties dialog box appea

4. To view the d tails of the event which precedes or follows the curren

or buttons to view the previous or the following events respectively.

5. To copy the details of the event into a .txt file, click the button.

To go back to the Log File Viewer window click the OK button.

displayed:

Parameter

6.

For each message, the following details are

Description

File Name of the log file Date Date when the message was generated. Time Time when the message was generated. User Name of the connected user

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 130

Event Type Event identifier. This code is assigned by each SIMATIC IT application and

Application Process Name Computer Computer name of the workstation on which the message was generated PID TID Description plication

er window

cannot be modified by the user. Name of the application which generated the message Name of the process/server

Process identifier Thread identifier Message written by the ap

1.20.2.6 Environment: Customize the Log File View

To customize the Log File Viewer window:

1. Select the View > Customize command in Log File Viewer or click the Customize button

in the toolbar, the Customize dialog box appears.

In the Log File Viewer window, 2. select the desired caption field and drag and drop it into the

ion field is impossible to drag and drop.

wn in the Customize dialog box.

. Repeat for every field you want to hide.

6. To undo the operation, select the fields into the Customize dialog box and drag and drop

1.20.2.7 Environment: Arranging windows

ime, it may be useful to arrange them in the

foll

Command/Button

Customize dialog box.

Note Only the Applicat

3. The field disappears from the main window and it is sho

4

5. The system keeps these settings also after the file is closed.

them to the Log File Viewer window.

When you open several windows at the same tworking area.

These windows can be arranged in the Log File Viewer window by selecting/clicking the owing commands/buttons.

Description

W > Cascade izes and arranges the active trend windows on the

W ontally ssigns the same size to the trend windows displayed on

Wind y

Window > Arrange Icons ttom of the Log File Viewer window.

Window > Wi

indow Resscreen one on top of the other, in such a way that the title bar of each window is visible.

indow > Tile Horiz Athe screen and arranges them horizontally.

ow > Tile Verticall Assigns the same size to the trend windows displayed on the screen and arranges them vertically. Arranges the minimized windows in the bo

ndows Opens the Windwindows to org

ows dialog box and allows to select the anize.

View > Synchornize

windows

Moves the selection of every active window to event with more similar time than the selected window.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 131

1.20.2.8 Environment: Arranging the selected windows

tton in

w list box shows a list of all the activate windows currently present in Log

w in the Select window list box and choose:

Select Button

The Windows dialog box allows you to arrange only the desired windows selecting them fromthe Windows List.

Perform the following operations:

1. Select the Window > Windows command in Log File Viewer or click the Windows buthe toolbar, the Windows dialog box appears.

2. The Select windoFile Viewer.

3. Select the desired windo

To

Activate display the selected window in the foreground with respect to the other windows found in Log File Viewer.

OK Close windowTile Horizont

non selected windows. Tile Vertically Assign the selected windows on the screen with the same

s them horizontally and minimizes the s.

1.20.2.9

ne or more) bu

hide a message:

. Select the messa

f the fol

og File Viewer.

- Press the DEL key.

age is hidden but, if you refresh or filter the file, it is displayed again.

1.20.2.10

Th o hide the selected item, never cancel or remove it. To show

• nd in Log File Viewer or the Filter button in the toolbar and

In

Enable and

Accept the changes and exit. Close the selected window.

ally Assign the selected windows on the screen with the same dimensions, arranges them horizontally and minimizes the

dimensions, arrangenon selected window

Environment: Hiding messages

You can perform this operation only in the files saved by the user (not in the system file or in the third-party application files). This command allows you to hide the selected item (o

t

To

1 ges you want to hide.

2. Do one o lowing operations:

- Select the View > Hide command in L

Or

- Select Hide button in the toolbar.

The selected mess

Environment: Showing hidden messages

e Hide functionality allows you tthe hidden messages:

• Select the File > Refresh command in Log File Viewer, press the F5 key or select theRefresh button in the toolbar.

Select the View > Filter commaapply a filter to the file.

both cases, the hidden messages will be shown again.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 132

Environment: Co1.20.2.11 nfiguring the message display time

File Viewer to display the log file messages.

r

local time

r or

You can configure the date/time used by Log

Messages can be displayed either according to the default date/time of your workstation oaccording to the date/time configured by the user.

1.20.2.12 Environment: Setting the

To set the local time:

1. Select command View > International in Log File Viewe click the International button

in the toolbar. The International dialog box appears.

Select

2. Click one of the following radio buttons

ToFile Time Zon ording to the time zone of the

s were generated Other Time • Local Ti e local time zone • World Time me shifting

configured by the user in the combo box.

3. Click the OK button to exit.

1.20.2.13

Now it is possible to order each column separately by clicking the caption field of the column. In this way, you can nding or ascending order. .

With comm g the Filter button

e Display log file messages acccountry where such message

Zone: me Zone Display log file messages according to th

Zone Display log file messages according to the ti

Applying filters

By default, SIMATIC IT Management Console displays all the columns regarding the event.

sort it in desce

and View > Filter or clickin in the toolbar, you can set different filt eters in the Filter dialog box:

• Filtering

Filtering by priority level

•

•

To restore default configurations, click the Default filter button.

plied to the list and display all messages contained in the

er

ering param

by date

•

• Filtering by application

Filtering by advanced criteria

Filtering by description

To remove the filter currently ap

current log file, click the Default filt button in the Log File Viewer toolbar.

1.20.2.14 Filtering

To filter the events by description:

by the description

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 133

1. Select command View > Filter or click the Filter button in the Log File Viewer toolbar; the Filter dialog box appears.

Check the Message check box to expand the field and show the filter criteria.

Select:

2.

3.

Check box If Message Text Case Sense March whol word only You want to match only the whole word and not part of it

4. Click the Filter button to apply the filter.

Note To reset all the filter fields, click the Default filter

You want to write the exact text You want to match only the case you entered

e

button in the Log File Viewer

her.

1.20.2.15

ate:

mand View > Filter or click the Filter button

toolbar.

Remember that the filters can be combined toget

Filtering by date

To filter the events by d

1. Select com in the Log File Viewer toolbar; the Filter dialog box appears.

vent to display all messages starting from the first contained in the log file or Events On to set the date and/or time starting from which messages are to be displayed.

ote In both cases, to modify the date, type it directly or select the day, month and year in the alendar below. To modify the time, click the appropriate arrow of the spin button to increase or

ter.

set all the filter fields, click the Default filter

2. Check the Date check box to expand the field and show the filter criteria.

3. In the From button choose First E

4. In the To button choose Last Event to display all messages up to the end of the log file or Events On to set the date and/or time starting from which messages are to be displayed.

Ncdecrease this value.

5. Click the Filter button to apply the fil

To re button in the Log File Viewer toolbar.

Remember that the filters can be combined together.

1.20.2.16

To

1. on

Filtering by priority level

filter the events by priority level:

Select command View > Filter or click the Filter butt in the Log File Viewer toolbar;

ria. Click the ning, Information,

Audit Succes, Audit Failed, Debug, User, Mandatory). For more information, see Structure of log file messages.

he filter.

he Default filter

the Filter dialog box appears.

2. Check the Priority Level check box to expand the field and show the filter critecheck boxes relative to the types of interest (Fatal Error, Error, War

3. Click the Filter button to apply t

Note To reset all the filter fields, click t button in the Log File Viewer toolbar.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 134

Remember that the filters can be combined together.

filter the events by advanced criteria:

1.20.2.17 Filtering by advanced criteria

To

button 1. Select command View > Filter or click the Filter in the Log File Viewer toolbar;

. Check the Advanced Criteria check box to expand the field and show the filter criteria.

the Filter dialog box appears.

2

Parameter DescriptionProcess User Computer the workstation on which messages were generated

3. Click th n to apply the filter.

Note To e filter fields, click the Default filter

Name of the process/server User name Computer name of

e Filter butto

reset all th button in the Log File Viewer toolbar.

ether.

1.20.2.18 iltering by application

n:

click the Filter button

Remember that the filters can be combined tog

F

To filter the events by applicatio

1. Select command View > Filter or in the Log File Viewer toolbar;

2. plication check box to expand the field and show the filter criteria. The list box

eft side shows all the available applications, click the

the Filter dialog box appears.

Check the Ap

or on the l buttons to add the selected appli tion or all the applications respectively. To delete them from the list

ox on the right side,

ca

b click the or buttons to remove the selected application ications re

r fields, click the Default filter

or all the appl spectively.

3. Click the Filter button to apply the filter.

Note To reset all the filte button in the Log File Viewer toolbar. Remember that the filters can be combined together.

e in the log file

To quickly find messages in the log file, use command press CTRL+F or click the

1.20.2.19 Finding a messag

View > Find

Find button in the Log File Viewer toolbar.

In the Find dialog box, check the find criteria you want to apply:

• Priority Level

• Application

• Advanced Criteria

• Message

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 135

When the search options aclose the window without searchin

re set, click the Find Next button to start the search or Close to g.

y or click the

t bu

To continue the search, select the View > Find Next command, press the F3 ke

Find Nex tton in the Log File Viewer toolbar. The system will display the next ccurrence that matches with the search criteria.

ess the SHIFT + F3

eys or click the Find Previous button

o

To search the previous item, select the View > Find Previous command, pr

k in the Log File Viewer toolbar. The system will display the previous occurrence that with the search criteria.

1.20.2.20

To find an occurrence by priority level:

lick the check boxes relative to the types of interest (Fatal Error, Error,

tton to start the search.

. The system highlights the row that matches with the search criteria.

1.20.2.21

o find an occurrence by application:

bled the Application check box to expand the field and show the ows all the available applications, click the

matches

Priority Level search option

1. In the Find dialog box, enabled the Priority Level check box to expand the field and showthe search criteria. CWarning, Information, Audit Succes, Audit Failed, Debug, User, Mandatory). For more information, see Structure of log file messages.

2. Click the Find Next bu

3

Application search option

T

1. In the Find dialog box, enasearch criteria. The list box on the left side sh

or buttons to add the selected application or all the applications respectively.

To delete them from the list box on the right side, click the or buttons to remove the selected application or all the applications respectively.

to start the search.

3.

1.20.2.22 Advanced Criteria search option

To fin

enabled the Advanced Criteria check box to expand the field and

Parameter

2. Click the Find Next button

The system highlights the row that matches with the search criteria.

d an occurrence by advanced criteria:

1. In the Find dialog box, show the search criteria.

DescriptionProcess Name of the process/server User Computer

User name Computer name of the workstation on which messages were generated

2. Click the Find Next button to start the search.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 136

3. The system highlights the row that matches with the search criteria.

1.20.2.23

occurrence by message:

. In the Find dialog box, enabled the Message check box to expand the field and show the filter criteria.

Check b

Message search option

To find an

1

2. Select: ox If

MessageCase SenseMarch w want to match only the whole word and not part of it

3. Click ystem highlights the row that matches

1.20.2.24 Working with log files

1.20.2.25 Op

Wh the log file ge

• To open a ng appli

• To o

Th

1.20.2.26

o view archived log files:

Log File in Log File Viewer.

. Choose the name of the archived file of interest in the Open dialog box.

. Click the OK button.

he system displays the names of all log files located in the SIMATIC IT configuration directory iles located in any directory of the local

1.20.2.27

. Select command File > Application log file. The Select Private log file dialog box appears.

pplication .

Log File option in the File menu is unchecked.

Text You want to write the exact text You want to match only the case you entered

hole word only You

the Find Next button to start the search: the swith the search criteria.

ening a log file

en you access the Log File Viewer the system displays, by default, all messages stored innerated by the system (the System Log File option in the File menu is checked).

n application log file, see Viewi cation log files.

pen a generic log file, see Viewing archived log files.

e File menu also displays the last four opened files.

Viewing archived log files

T

1. Select command File > Generic

2

3

T(by default ICUBE.CNF). But you can view log fworkstation and on any workstation configured in the SIMATIC IT network.

Viewing application log files

To view application log files:

1

2. Select the name of the application which generated the messages from the Adrop-down listbox

3. The Log File Viewer shows the selected file and the System

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 137

4. Click the OK button.

All messages stored in the selected log file are displayed in the Log File Viewer window. tions such as Alarms, Historical Trends,

1.20.2.28

To

2.

tion in the Computer list box.

Or

ork configuration from the Select computer list box

(Note This list is composed by the computer names set in Plant Management.)

1.20.2.29 Saving a log file

You can save the log messages currently displayed in a file with .LOG extension using Sav er toolbar. By

s sav te workstation, but ose another di

export, e.g. save, the list using the Log File Viewer

or clicking the Expo

Private log files are generated by SIMATIC IT applicaGraphic User Interface, Real Time Data Server, etc.

Viewing remote log files

view remote log files:

1. Select command File > Select computer in Log File Viewer; the Select Computer dialog box appears.

Do either of the following:

- Type the computer name of the worksta

- Select the computer name defined in the netw

3. Click OK to continue.

All messages contained in the remote log file are displayed in the Log File Viewer window.

command File > default the file i

e as or clicking the Save As button in the Log File Viewed in the ICUBE.CNF directory on the local or on a remo

you can cho rectory.

You can also File > Export List command in

rt List button in the toolbar. The Save As dialog box appears and it is ossible to save the list as a file with .csv or .txt extension. By default the file is saved in the

directory on the local or on a remote workstation, but you can choose another

1. Select the command File > Print or the Print button in the Log File Viewer toolbar, the Print dialog box appears.

- Choose Selection the selected events

3. Click the Custum dialog box allows you to select the columns you want to print:

- Choose Visibl File Viewer visible columns. (The area below is totally

pICUBE.CNF directory.

1.20.2.30 Printing a log file

To print a log file:

2. In the Print range area:

- Choose All to print all the displayed events.

to print

ize button, the Page Setup

e Columns to print the current Log disabled)

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 138

- Choose Selec e list box. To

select them, us

t Columns to print only the visible columns on the right sid

e the following buttons: to add the selected event to the list box,

to add all the events to the lsit box, to remove the selected event from the

list box, to remove all the events selected from the list box.

- Click the Default button to print the default events.

t settings and come back to the Print dialog box.

1.20.2.31 Ov ng the system log

ImportantThis tab is

low down the system. rties of the log file

ith command File > Properties. In the Properties dialog box, select the Log Setting tab, here you can

• Configure the overwriting mode

iguration by clicking the Default button, that is:

1.20.2.32

ImportantThis tab is

command File > Properties in Log File Viewer, in the Properties dialog box, select the Log Setting tab.

ox, or click the ze is 256 Kb and can be incremented by 64 Kb

1. Importan

This tab is nabled only when the System.log file is activated.

To configure the overwriting mode of the system log file:

- Click OK to accept the prin

4. Click OK to print and exit.

erwriti

enabled only when the System.log file is activated.

The file containing the system log can become quite large and this might sIn order to prevent the file from becoming too large, you can define the propeww

• Configure the log size

You can restore the default conf

• file size 256 kb;

• file is overwritten only if necessary (Overwrite if necessary)

Configuring the log size

enabled only when the System.log file is activated.

To configure the maximum log size:

1. Select

2. Enter the maximum size (Kb) of the log file in the Maximum log size combo barrows of the spin button. The default siblocks up to 5120 Kb.

20.2.33 Configuring the overwriting mode

t e

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 139

1. Select command File > Properties in Log File Viewer, in the Property dialog box, select the Log Setting tab.

2. In the Log Size area, click one of the following radio buttons to configure the overwriting

Select

mode:

To

Overwrite eve

Overwrite event

Start overwriting messages after the configured number of days es the maximum size,

Do not overw file reaches the tered.

e

1.20.2.34 Important

This tab is e System.log file is activated.

The File > Properties command displays the Properties dialog box, in the General tab you nt log file:

Field

nts as needed Start overwriting messages when the log file has reached the maximum configured size.

s older than…days has expired. However, when the file reach

messages will no longer be registered. rite events Prevent the file from being overwritten. When the

maximum size, messages will no longer be regis

3. Click the OK button to confirm this operation or the Restore Defaults button to maintain thold configuration.

Displaying information on the log file

enabled only when th

can see the following information about the curre

Description

Log Name Size Created Modified Last Abnormal Te ted

Server Versio ystem information File Version Maximum Nu be stored in the file

1.20.2.35 Removing log messages

To remove messages contained in the system log file:

1. Select the File > Properties command or click the Properties button in the Log File Viewer toolbar.

2. In the Properties dialog box, select the Log Setting tab.

3. Click the Clear Log button to clear the log file. The system shows a dialog box to confirm this option.

4. Select Yes to clear or No to return to the previous dialog box.

5. Click OK to accept and exit.

You can create a backup copy of the file before removing the messages.

Name of the current log file Dimension of the current log file Date/time when the file was created Date/time when the file was updated

rmination Date/time when SIMATIC IT Management Console terminaabnormally

n Reserved sReserved system information

mber of Events Maximum number of messages which can

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 140

Important Messages contained in log files saved by the user can be neither edited nor deleted.

1.20.2.36 Configuring Categories

A category is a parameter which defines the importance of each message and is used by the ether the message should be archived or not. The higher the number, s priority.

SIMATIC IT applications assign an appropriate category number to each message according to threshold value for each SIMATIC IT application, above which efault threshold value is 500.

you choose a category value greater than or smaller than the default value, the number of ed into the system log decreases or increases, respectively.

nly for messages archived in the system log file but not in the log ions. Therefore, private log files contain all error messages

nt of their category.

o restore the previous category configuration, click the Restore button.

1.

o define the category value:

rs.

. Select the Categories tab.

nter the category value in the Category drop-down list box.

5. Click OK to accept the changes and exit or Restore to undo the changes and restore the old configuration.

mand File > Properties in Log File Viewer or click the Properties button in the

the application of interest from the Application drop-down list box.

3. Click the Save As button to save the new configuration in a file with .CNF extension (the default file is SYSTEM.CNF) and then select the Save button to go back to the Properties dialog box.

4. Click OK to exit.

system to determine whthe higher the message’

its severity. You can configure athe message is archived. The d

Ifmessages archiv

You can modify the category ofiles created by SIMATIC IT applicatgenerated by the application independe

T

20.2.37 Defining the category value

Important This tab is enabled only when the System.log file is activated.

T

1. Select command File > Properties in Log File Viewer or the Property button in the toolbar. The Properties dialog box appea

2

3. Select the application of interest from the Application drop-down list box.

4. Double click the application name and e

1.20.2.38 Disabling message archiving for an application

To disable the archiving of messages for a specific application:

1. Select comtoolbar. The Properties dialog box appears.

2. Select the Categories tab and then

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 141

1.20.2.39 Loading a category configuration file

To load a category configuration file:

> Properties in Log File Viewer or the Properties button in the s dialog box appears.

NF file.

xtension, stored in the ICUBE.CNF directory (or any other directory guration files) are listed.

n button.

6. d file is loaded.

7. i ton in the Properties dialog box to exit.

1. Select command File toolbar. The Propertie

2. In the Properties dialog box, select the Categories tab

3. Click the Load button to load a previously saved .C

4. All files with .CNF epreviously configured to hold SIMATIC IT confi

5. Select the file of interest in the File name window and click the Ope

The selecte

Cl ck the OK but

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 142

Text Editor

2 Text Editor

2.1.1 Overview of Text Editor

With the Text Editor you can create and edit text files of the following types:

• text file (.tx

• Iter sourc

• server con

Important

I rt the Text Ed agement Console and then edit urce file, the f ss the Points Database (such as

g, inserting vari t available. These functions are provided only if you use the Text Editor within one of the SIMATIC IT programming environme r SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Engine). The Match Brace command available in all environments.

In the latter c ical of a source program editor ess to the Points Database, ...)

The Text Editor window has two areas: the upper area is reserved for the user for text editing bottom area, also called Output Window , is used by Text Editor to r error messages.

ss the Text Editor from SIMATI ct command Tools

>Text Editor

2.1 Overview

t)

e files (.src, .inc)

figuration files (.txt, .csv)

f you stao

itor from SIMATIC IT Manan Iter sbrowsin

unctions used to acceables, ...) are no

nts (PDE o however is

ase the Text Editor provides additional features typ(acc

operations whereas thedisplay search results o

2.1.2 Starting the Text Editor from SIMATIC IT Management Console

To acce C IT Management Console, sele

.

In the Text Editor app ou are currently connected appears in

lication window, the name of the Plant to which ythe Project bar.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 143

Text Editor

2.2

2.2.1 new file

hen you start the Text Editor, the program opens by default an empty text file called Text1.txt.

Working with text files

Creating a

WYou can later save the file with a different extension.

To create a new file:

1. Select command File > New in Text Editor.

2. In the File type dialog box, select one of the following options:

- Server Configuration

3. Click OK. An empty page appears. The Textn.eee label is displayed in the title bar, where n siv on of the selected file.

Opening a file

To open a file in T

. Select command File > Open

- Text

- Iter Source

is a progres e number and eee corresponds to the extensi

2.2.2

ext Editor:

; the Open dialog box appears.

lt, all the files with .txt extension stored in the \Plant Name\TEXT directory are listed; ration can be modified by the user. For more information, see Choosing

the default file type.

Select the file ny other directory, either on rkstatio

. Click OK to open the selected file.

mands Save

1

2. By defauhowever, this configu

3. you want to edit from the default directory or from ayour wo n or on a remote workstation.

4

2.2.3 Saving a file

To save the current file, choose com or Save as from the File menu.

ved in text format, but you , see Choosing the default file type.

r more information on how to save the files in ile type and Configuring the Save options.

2.2.4

File > Print

You can save the file in any supported format; by default the file is sacan change this configuration. For more information

Files are saved in standard Ansi format. FoUnicode format, see Choosing the default f

Printing a file

To print the file you are editing, choose command in Text Editor. The standard Windows dialog box for setting printing attributes is displayed.

re printing, select command File > Print Preview

To preview the text befo

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 144

Text Editor

To choose the default printer, select command File > Print Setup. The standard Windows dia

2.2.5 Cl

select command File > Close or click the Close button in the dow.

Editing text files

2.3.1 Standard

The following

Command

log box for choosing the default printer is displayed.

osing a file

To close the file you are editing, upper-right corner of the document win

2.3

Editing operations

standard commands can be selected from the Edit menu:

Description

Cut Deletes the selected text and copies it into the Clipboard.

Copies the selected text into the Clipboard

Copy

Paste Copies the text from the Clipboard to the file, starting from the cursor position.

Delete Removes the selected text

Selects all the file Select All

nd also:

A

Edit > Undo Cancels the most recent command or action executed

Ed edo Repeats the most recent co

it > Rmmand or action executed

2.3.2 Tabs and spaces

o insert/remove g commands are available:

and

T spaces and tabs, the followin

Comm DescriptionEdit > Insert Space

e Space f the selected

ted line/s

rresponds to ser (by number is 4).

Inserts a space at the beginning of the selected line/s

Edit > Eras Removes a space at the beginning oline/s

TAB Inserts a TAB at the beginning of the selecor at the cursor position

Important

Each TAB co the number of spaces configured by the udefault this

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 145

Text Editor

To set tabs:

1. Select command Tools > Editor Options and click the Editor tab.

2. In the Tab Settings area, enter the number of spaces that defines a TAB in the Tab Stops box.

OK.

he Insert s to define SPACE or TAB, respectively, as the efault character used to fill the space between column zero and the beginning of the text in ach row. This option is required since the Text Editor allows you to start writing text on a row

from a column other than zero.

2.3.3 Advanced Editing operations

g options are available on the Edit menu:

Command

3. Click

Click t Spaces or Keep Tabs buttonde

The following advanced editin

DescriptionAdvanced > MUpper Case

Replaces the selected text with uppercase letters

ed > Mase

ext with lowercase letters

Fill ted block with user-defined text Delete Row e text from the cursor position up to the end

An

ake Selection

Advanc ake Selection Lower C

Replaces the selected t

Fills the selecRemoves all thof the line

d also:

Edit > Undo Cancels the most recent command or action executed

Edit > Redo ats the most recent command or action executed

lecting a h

o select a horizontal block of text:

1. the row you want to select.

2. Drag down up to the number of rows you want.

g a v

o select a vertical block of text:

1. Move the pointer to the beginning of the text you want to select.

3. Release the ALT key and the mouse button.

Repe

2.3.4 Se orizontal block of text

T

Move the pointer to the beginning of

2.3.5 Selectin ertical block of text

T

2. Hold down the ALT key and drag up to the block size you want.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 146

Text Editor

2.3.6

- ginning of the text you want to select.

- Hold down the d drag up to the block size you want.

se the A

2. Select command

3. In the Fill dialog b

Filling a selection

To fill a selection:

1. Select a vertical block of text:

Move the pointer to the be

ALT key an

- Relea LT key and the mouse button.

Edit > Fill.

ox, enter:

Parameter DescriptionText Alphanumeric string to be used to fill the field.

If the block you select already contains characters, these are replaced with the text entered by the user.

ithin a string, type the # symbol where the number (any number of digits) is to be inserted.

ber sign # (i.e. \#) to display the #

Automatic incmatically incremented in

Start from Step Leading zero

to reach the digit indicated in the subsequent escription below.

Number of digits o be inserted, including leading zeros.

ava

Main Curso

Press

The string is truncated if it is longer than the selected field or block size. The string is always aligned to the left.

To insert a number in any position w

Type the \ character before the numcharacter instead of a digit.

rement Click this check box only if a right-aligned number is to be inserted at the end of the string. The number will be autoeach record. First number to be incremented. Step to be applied to increment the number. If you click this check box, the program will insert as many leading zeros as required Number of digits field. See d

Total number of digits t

4. Click OK.

2.3.7 Keys ilable in Text Editor

r Movement Keys

ToPAGE DOWN ne window down PAGE UP Scroll the file one window up END Move the pointer to the end of the line, including spaces and TABs HOME Move the pointer to the beginning of the line or to the first character

CTRL + CTRL + inter CTRL + CTRL + CTRL + PAGE CTRL + PAGE

Scroll the file o

other than space or TAB Scroll the file up but not move the pointer Scroll the file down but not move the poMove the pointer right to the first valid character Move the pointer left to the first valid character

DOWN Move the pointer to the bottom of the window UP Move the pointer to the top of the window

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 147

Text Editor

CTRL + HOME Move the pointer to the beginning of the file T Move the pointer to the end of the file

Main Editin

Press

C RL + END

g Keys

ToDEL Delete character after the pointer BACKSPACE Delete character before the pointer CTRL + BACKCTRL + Y SHIFT + arrow

2.4 Finding and replacing text

2.4.1 Finding and repla

SIMATIC IT Text Edito commands of a common indows editor.

2.4.2 Fi

To

1. Select command Edit > Find

SPACE Delete the current line See CTRL + BACKSPACE

keys Select a horizontal block of text

cing

r provides all the standard Find and Replace W

nding text in the current file

find text in the current file:

in Text Editor. The Find dialog box appears.

2. Enter the text to be found in the box.

3. Select the follow

Find What

ing options, if required:

Option DescriptionMatch Whole Word Only If y

worMatch Case If you check this box, the Text Editor will find only text with the

specified capitalization (case-sensitive). n Up ext Editor will search text only from

o the beginning of the document. Direction Do ch text only from

4. After setting the options of interest:

Click

ou check this box, the Text Editor will find only complete ds

Directio If you click this button, the Tthe current line t

wn If you click this button, the Text Editor will searthe current line to the end of the document.

ToFind Next or the first occurrence of the text Set Bookmarks on All Insert a bookmark next to each line that matches the specified

search criteria.

matches the search criteria, click the

Start searching f

To find the next text occurrence that button in the toolbar.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 148

Text Editor

2.4.3 in file

urrent file:

t Editor; the Replace dialog box appears.

. Enter the text to be replaced in the Replace With box.

4. Select the following options:

Option

Finding and replacing text the current

To find and replace text in the c

1. Select command Edit > Replace in Tex

2. Enter the text to be found in the Find What box.

3

DescriptionMatch Whole Word Only If you check this box, the Text Editor will find only complete

Case nd only text with the specified capitalization (case-sensitive).

aced only in the selected file placed in the whole file

5. Click the Find Next button to find the first occurrence of the text and then click Replace. Or Replace All button to replace all the occurrences of the text at a time.

2.4.4 Finding text in more than o

d the same text in more than

. Select command File > Find in Files

words Match If you check this box, the Text Editor will fi

Replace in Selection The text is replReplace in Whole File The text is re

click the

ne file

To fin one file:

in Text Editor; the Find in Files dialog box appears;

the In folder box, select the folder where the files have to be searched. Click the button

1

2. Enter the text to be found in the Find What box.

3. In the Files/file types combo box, insert the file names or the file types where text has to be searched.

4. In

to use the browser.

5. Select the following options:

Option DescriptionMatch Whole Word Only If you check this box, the Text Editor will find only complete words Match Case Text Editor will find only text with the specified

tive). Look in subf subfolder.

search in specific files.

e Name list box. You can choose ies. Click the Add button to insert each file in the Selected Files tton if you want to insert all the files stored in the current directory in

the Selected Files box.

me and line number are reported.

If you check this box, the capitalization (case-sensi

older If you check this box, the Text Editor will also search in the

6. Select the Advanced>> button if you need to

7. Select the file/s where text has to be searched from the Filfiles from various directorbox. Click the Add All bu

8. Click Find.

Search results are displayed in the Output Window. For each text occurrence, the corresponding file na

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 149

Text Editor

To view the text in the file where it has been found:

1. Double click the line in the Output Window, or right-click the Output Window and choose

at the corresponding line.

Important The Output Window must be enabled for the search results to be displayed. For more information, see Displaying/hiding the Output Window.

2.4.5 Finding and replacing text in more than one file

To find and replace text in more than one file:

command Go to Tag from the shortcut menu.

2. The file containing the selected text is opened

1. Select command File > Replace in Files ; the Replace in Files dialog box appears

2. Enter the text

.

to be found in the Find What box.

box.

Option

3. Enter the text to be replaced in the Replace With

4. Select the following options:

DescriptionMatch Whole Wo If you check this box, the Text Editor will find only

complete words Match Case If you check this box, the Text Editor will find only text

with the specified capitalization (case-sensitive).

5. Select the file/s where text has to be searched from the File Name list box. You can choose files from various directories. Click the Add button to insert each file in the Selected Files

ant to insert all the files stored in the current directory in

search a single text occurrence at a time. The following buttons are available:

Click

rd Only

box. Click the Add All button if you wthe Selected Files box.

6. Click Find to

ToSkip t occurrence. Replace Replace All the current file. Skip File

the next file.

2.4.6

r you have entered.

Search menu to locate a line

To add/remove a bookmark:

Not replace the current text and go to the nexReplace the current text. Replace all the text occurrences in Not replace any text occurrence in the current file and open

Locating text in the file

To quickly locate text in the current file, you can choose:

• command Edit > Go To to locate the line numbe

• commands Previous Bookmark or Next Bookmark from the previously marked with a bookmark.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 150

Text Editor

1. Go to the line to be marked.

Select command Edit2. > Bookmarks > Toggle in Text Editor

o add more bookmarks:

Find

T

1. Select command Edit > in Text Editor.

2. Enter the search attributes.

4. All the lines that match the search criteria are marked.

To remove all bookm s > Clear All.

2.5 Customizing the working environment

owing/hiding

de the too

Select comm

3. Click the Add Bookmark button.

arks, select command Edit > Bookmark

2.5.1 Sh toolbars

To show/hi lbars, perform the following operations:

and ToView > Toolba > bar

have

View > ToolbarsView > Status Show/hide the status bar.

ut Window

ow:

To s

Se s keys ALT+7

To clear the contents of the Output Window:

ears.

mand Clear.

rs System Information Show/hide the System Information bar. This displays the name of the Plant to which you logged on.

> Standard Show/hide the Standard toolbar. Bar

2.5.2 Showing/hiding the Outp

By default the Text Editor shows the Output Window when you create a new file or edit an existing file.

To hide the Output Wind

1. Right click the Output Window. A shortcut menu appears.

2. Select the Hide command.

di play the Output Window:

lect command View > Output Window or pres

1. Right click the Output Window. A shortcut menu app

2. Select com

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 151

Text Editor

2.5.3 Choosing the default file type

erent file type supported by the Text Editor.

xtension, so that all operations are automatically executed on the file ows:

- Text (.txt)

. Click OK.

2.5.4

By default all files are saved in standard Ansi format, but the Text Editor also supports the Unicode format.

he defau

1. Select command

2. In the Options dia

the Save area

- Ansi

- Unicode

2.5.5 Configuring the Save options

Backup copy

When you save a file the Text Editor creates by default a backup copy with .old extension. To enable/disable this option do as follows:

1. Select command Tools > Editor Options in Text Editor.

2. In the Options dialog box, click the Editor tab.

3. In the Save Settings area, check/uncheck the Enable Backup box.

4. Click OK.

Automatic saving

Each time you execute a find and replace operation on a file, all files currently open are automatically saved so that the program can search the last version of the files.

To enable/disable this option do as follows:

When you start the Text Editor, all operations (creating, opening, deleting, saving, ...) are executed by default on .txt file types. You can however configure a diff

To change the default file etype you choose, do as foll

1. Select command Tools > Editor Options in Text Editor.

2. In the Options dialog box click the Files tab.

3. In the File Type area choose one of the available options:

- Source Iter(.src, .inc)

- Server Configuration (.csv, .txt)

- All Files

4

Choosing the default save format

To choose t lt saving format, do as follows:

Tools > Editor Options in Text Editor.

log box click the Files tab.

3. In choose one of the following options:

4. Click OK.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 152

Text Editor

1. Select command Tools > Editor Options in Text Editor.

2. In the Options dialog box, click the Editor tab.

3. In the Save Settings area, check/uncheck the Save Before Running Tools box.

ing Files box to display a message before automatically

5. Click OK.

2.5.6 Setting Colours

rent colour for each of the following items:

Item

4. Check the Prompt Before Savsaving each file.

You can choose a diffe

Description

Bookmark Comment Current Tag

Files) Output Wind

Source Text Source Keyw Reserved keyword in a .src file String Text surrounded by inverted commas Text SelectioUser-defined

1. Select command Tools > Editor Options and click the Colors tab.

2. Select the item you want to configure from the Set Colors for list box.

tte. You can choose a

2.

nd thus display it in a different colour.

To

1. tions and click the User Keywords tab.

2. word box.

. Choose the keyword type:

- Iter RTDS (Iter source file) used for RTDS

4. Click the Add button to insert the keyword in the Keyword List.

Bookmark Comment inserted by the user in an Iter file. Line found during file searching (command File > Find in

ow Window where the results of a Find in Files or Replace in Files command are displayed. Text in a document.

ord

n Selected text Keywords User-defined keyword in a .src file

3. Select the colour to be assigned to the item from the colour paledifferent colour for the Text and the Background of each item.

4. Click OK.

5.7 Defining user keywords

You can define significant text in your document as a keyword a

define user keywords:

Select command Tools > Editor Op

Enter the text in the Key

3

- CSV (Server configuration file)

- Iter PMC (Iter source file) used for PMC

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 153

Text Editor

5. Repeat steps from 3 to 5 to insert other keywords.

2.5.8 the default font

o set a new default font:

2. The standard Windows dialog box for configuring font type and size is displayed.

lect the attributes of the default font for your documents and click OK.

2.5.9

the Find dialog box, you can

rch options:

. Select command Tools > Editor Options and click the Search tab.

Option

6. Click OK.

Setting

By default the text you type in a Text Editor document appears in Courier New with size 10. However you can select any Windows supported font as default font.

T

1. Select command Tools > Editor Options and click the Fonts tab.

3. Se

Configuring the search options

You can configure some options as default for all your searches. In change these choices.

To configure the sea

1

2. Select the following options:

DescriptionMatch Whole Word Only If you check this box, the Text Editor will find only complete

s Match Case If you check this box, the Text Editor will find only text with

Direction Up n, the Text Editor will search text only

Direction Dorrent line to the end of the document.

Prompt before resuming search eginning of file

When the program reaches the end of the document it asks you if y tinue searching at the beginning of it. Select YIf you d o have this confirmation prompted, unchec

word

the specified capitalization (case sensitive). If you click this butto

from the current line to the beginning of the document. wn If you click this button, the Text Editor will search text only

from the cu

from end or b ou want to cones to continue No to end the search.

on’t want tk the box.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 154

Hot Backup

3 Hot Backup

3.1 Overview

3.1.1 Hot Backup

IMATIC IT Historian provides a number of tools that help you overcome emergency conditions; IMATIC IT server

es (Alarm Manager, Plant Data Archive, Event Manager, etc.) are running.

Plant and/or server dule files on to an additional server workstation (called "Auxiliary Master") in a completely

orkstation becomes nt workstations connect automatically to the Auxiliary Master workstation,

here the Plant and/or server modules, which were in "slave" status, start running in "master"

rvers

3.1.2 Useful tips on hot backup

oment in he slave

Important It is strongly r o master server first, and then start the slav

dify and delete points.

• If the master stops working during slave alignment, the slave cannot switch to master since r is re-

Ssuch as the failure of the server workstation where the Plant and the Smodul

One of these tools is known as "hot backup" and allows you to replicatemotransparent mode.

In the event that the Plant, or a server module on the Primary Master wunavailable, the cliewmode.

For a detailed description of the procedures required to configure a pair of SIMATIC IT sein hot backup, see Configuring hot backup for SIMATIC IT plants and applications.

• The slave server is automatically aligned by the master server.

The Backup Switch Tool indicates when the slave server is synchronous, that is, the mwhen the files and the memory areas have been aligned. Immediately afterwards tserver is ready to accept manual switching.

ec mmended to start and configure the e server, in order to have correct alignment of the latter.

• During alignment you cannot:

- recreate, edit and delete the server configuration.

- insert, mo

- restart alignment.

the configuration files have not been thoroughly aligned. In this case, when the mastestarted, slave alignment will be correctly completed.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 155

Hot Backup

3.1.3 o ackup status

itch Tool you can monitor the status of the Plants and of the server odules running on the pair of workstations configured in hot backup (primary and auxiliary

hoose command Tools > Backup Switch Tool in SIMATIC IT Management Console. The hich represent the pair of workstations, and their

g:

Icon

M nitoring the b

With the Backup Swmmaster).

CBackup Switch dialog box shows two icons, wcomputer names.

Icons are displayed next to each workstation and to each module, with the following meanin

Meaning

Module/Plant in Master status is running

Master module is in asynchronous status (i.e. it is being initialized).

Module witch to Master /Plant in Slave status is running and ready to s

Moto M

dule/Plant in Slave status is not synchronous (i.e. not yet ready to switch aster)

Transition status (from Slave to Master when a manual switch is performed, from Master to Slave upon reconnection of two Masters)

Module/Plant not running

odule name in the Backup Switch window to

atus types and their meaning in relation to the

Status

Additional information is available if you display the Module/Plant status.

3.1.4 Backup status

Right-click the computer name or the server-mdisplay the status of the Plant/module.

The following table lists the various stPlant/module in backup mode:

DescriptionMaster The Plant/module in Master status is

running. Slave The Plant/module in Slave status is running.No active The Plant/module has not been started yet.

s being aligned by the

Backup switch Master/Slave switching

Error ation is not running. Master initializ

the Slave. Unknown

In the following additional information is available:

Slave asycr The Slave module iMaster module.

ing The application is instatus. The applic

ing The Master is starting up and is not yet ready to align Due to network errors, it is impossible to determine the server status.

the case of a server module,

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 156

Hot Backup

• Application name

• switching mode (automatic / manual);

ackup;

3.2

3.2.1 lants and applications

ImportantTo configu the following configurations are MANDAT

• SIMATis located;

• SIMAT ccessories (e.e. RTDS communication drivers) must be installe isk partition and in the same path, both on the Primary Master and the

-backup configuration to operate correctly you need to follow these procedures arefully step by step:

1. Create the Plant on the SIMATIC IT server that will be configured as Primary Master.

tion Servers, by entering their computer names in

6.

oring it on the Auxiliary Master.

Please remember that you will have to update the computer names of all SIMATIC IT Real

Master workstations with command File >

Share

• computer name of the pair of workstations configured in hot b

• status of the Plant located on each workstation.

Configuring servers in hot backup

Configuring hot backup for SIMATIC IT p

re server workstations in hot backup,

ORY:

IC IT components must be running on the same workstation on which the Plant

IC IT and all its ad on the same d Auxiliary Master.

For a hotc

2. Define the hot backup servers as Foundathe Foundation Servers list.

3. Configure the hot backup servers as Primary and Auxiliary Master, by entering their computer names in the Primary and Auxiliary Master list.

4. Configure the SIMATIC IT server modules which will support hot backup.

5. Complete the SIMATIC IT system configuration on the Primary Master computer.

Start the SIMATIC IT server modules on the Primary Master computer.

7. Complete the Plant backup configuration by:

- Creating a backup copy of the Plant on the Primary Master

- Rest

Time Data Server/IMC Units on the Auxiliary Master.

8. Share the Plant on both Primary and Auxiliary

in Plant Management.

s, projects).

9. In this manner, files will be automatically copied between Primary and Auxiliary Master computers.

10. Configure, if required, additional files to be automatically replicated (e.g. zone

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 157

Hot Backup

3.2.2 Configuring hot-backup servers as Primary and Auxiliary Master

It is recommended that the above workstations are chosen from among the previously-

. Enter the System Configuration window.

ckup tab.

d, your SIMATIC IT workstation has probably IC IT

. Select the computer name of the workstation to be configured as Primary Master from the

he workstation to be configured as Auxiliary Master from the

6. ed computer names in the Primary Master-

7.

Important You can confi ers, provided that the same computer

3.

Enter the System Configuration window.

2. Select the Modules Backup tab.

es to be removed from the Primary Master - Auxiliary Master list box.

3.2.4

. Enter the System Configuration window.

. Select the Modules Backup tab.

imary Master from the

4. Select the computer name of the workstation to be configured as Auxiliary Masterfrom the Auxiliary Master list box.

To configure hot backup you need to define two computers in the network acting as:

• Primary Master

• Auxiliary Master

configured Foundation servers .

1

2. Select the Modules Ba

3. Please note that if this command is disablebeen configured in stand-alone mode. For more information, see Enabling SIMATstand-alone start-up.

4Primary Master drop-down list box.

5. Select the computer name of tAuxiliary Master drop-down list box.

Click the Add button to insert the selectAuxiliary Master list box.

Click OK.

gure several pairs of hot-backup servname is not used more than once in different pairs.

2.3 Removing hot-backup servers

1.

3. Select the pair of computer nam

4. Click the Delete button.

5. Click OK.

Modifying hot-backup servers

1

2

3. Select the computer name of the workstation to be configured as PrPrimary Master drop-down list box.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 158

Hot Backup

5. Click the Change button to insert the selAuxiliary Master list box.

ected computer names in the Primary Master -

6. Click OK.

3.2.5

server modules:

rical Archiving Management)

SIMATIC IT Event Manager (Event Management)

-> button to move the selected applications in the Selected Applications list box.

d Primary and Auxiliary Master workstations,

3.2.6

e ary and Auxiliary Master workstations.

ole and run the

Configuring SIMATIC IT applications hot-backup

SIMATIC IT provides hot-backup facilities for the following

• SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager (Alarm Management)

• SIMATIC IT Plant Data Archive (Histo

•

• SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server

• SIMATIC IT Report Manager (Report Manager)

1. Enter the System Configuration window.

2. Select the Modules Backup tab.

3. Select the applications to be configured in backup in the Application List list box.

4. Click the Add

5. Click OK.

Then start the server modules on both Primary and Auxiliary Master. The modules assume master and slave status on the configurerespectively.

Configuring the Plant hot backup

In order for your hot-backup configuration to operate correctly you need to create the samPlant on both Prim

1. On the Primary Master workstation start SIMATIC IT Management Cons

Backup Manager tool (command Tools > Backup Manager in Plant Management or SIMATIC IT Management Console).

2. Archive the Plant. For more information, see Archiving a Plant.

Restore the Plant on the Auxiliary Master workstation. For more information, see Re3. storing a Plant.

command File > Share

Then you must share the Plant on both Primary and Auxiliary Master workstations with

in Plant Management.

Upon completion of the above operations SIMATIC IT Management Console begins replicating formation on how file replication is

the following files to the Auxiliary Master. For more inperformed, see Replication of files between primary and auxiliary masters.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 159

Hot Backup

3.2.7 eplication of files between primary and auxiliary masters

the auxiliary master,

• Zone directories, and, for each Zone:

Compiled Graphic Panels

•

1. Select command Configuration > System from SIMATIC IT Management Console and then choose the Plant Configuration tab.

oxes you want to replicate. The cture allows you to easily navigate between files in the current Plant.

e from a minimum of 30 minutes to a maximum of 24 hours, and can be

ImportanAll those fbe copied m rmation, see Copying Plant directories.

3.2.8 Copying Plant directories

y functions, are to be replicated on the

You must copy and restore files manually each time the files of interest change, in order for the Primary and Auxiliary Master to be maintained in constant alignment

R

The primary master replicates automatically databases and Zone files towhich guarantee the provision of supervisory functions in backup mode:

•

AMD Workspaces

• Historian Data Display Workspaces

• Unit Databases

Replication is performed:

• every 12 hours, if no changes are applied

• upon event, that is, each time the Unit databases or the Zone files are updated

Moreover, the user can configure the replication of additional Zone and Project files at customized intervals, as follows:

2. In the Files replication area, check the Zone and Project btree stru

3. Click the arrow buttons in order to increase / decrease the Replication period, i.e., the time interval at which files will be copied from the primary to the auxiliary master. The replication period can rangincremented by 30 minute intervals.

4. Click Apply to save changes and OK to quit the dialog box.

t iles for which it is not possible to configure automatic replication must

anually between Plants. For more info

If programming functions, in addition to supervisorAuxiliary Master, you must copy the relative files/directories to the Auxiliary Master workstationand keep them aligned with any changes made (on the Primary Master). SIMATIC IT Management Console does not perform this operation automatically.

To copy Plant files to the Auxiliary Master, use the Backup Manager tool in Plant Management or SIMATIC IT Management Console.

Important

.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 160

Hot Backup

3.3 Master-slave switching

3.

ot backup guarantees complete supervisory functions of the SIMATIC IT server modules in the vent that one of the applications becomes unavailable.

g a lant and one or more server modules.

r status performs all functions, that is, reads, handles and archives data, and maintains the slave server in alignment. The slave server module is notified of all the changes that occur on the master and waits for a possible failure of the master module.

As the slave configuration and data files mirror the corresponding files on the master, and aster and slave modules are kept constantly aligned, in the event of master failure, the slave

In the event of master-slave switching, SIMATIC IT clients previously connected to a master er Plant, as soon as

n log on ONLY to a Plant currently in master status.

)

ents and Plants in hot backup configuration can assume one of the llowing states:

• master: standard operation mode. Only one server module is running.

• master with synchronous slave: both master and slave server modules are running. The slave is completely aligned and ready to switch to master status.

• master with asynchronous slave: the master module starts running again after a network interruption and the slave is not aligned, or, master-slave alignment is in progress.

An asynchronous slave cannot switch to master until it has been completely aligned, whether the request is issued by the Backup Switch Tool (user request) or by SIMATIC IT (failure of the master module).

3.3.2

• the master Plant or the workstation where the Plant is located becomes unaviable

• a network error occurs

3.1 Overview of master-slave switching

He

The SIMATIC IT Management Console hot backup feature also handles more complex situations such as the subdivision of the network into two separate subnets, each comprisinP

During normal operation, only the server module in maste

mcan immediately replace the master and all its functions.

The time required to align the slave is variable since it depends on the size of the configuration and data files.

Plant which is no longer available, automatically log on to the new mastswitching has completed successfully.

Please note that a SIMATIC IT client ca

Client modules (SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager Display, SIMATIC IT Historian Data Display, etc.also connect automatically to the corresponding server modules in master status, as soon asmaster-slave switching has completed successfully

SIMATIC IT componfo

Plant Master-Slave Switching

Master-Slave switching occurs automatically when:

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 161

Hot Backup

Important

Upon Planlocated on

3.3.3

ated crashes, the slave Plant takes on its role and becomes the master.

isk tion

System > Workstation tab, and check the box Enable Switch Primary Master Disk Notification). Otherwise master-slave switching occurs but the

ster,

3.3.4 ble

d

Then you start the DEMO Plant on the OMEGA workstation (which becomes the MASTER) and DA workstation (this Plant becomes the SLAVE).

Should the DEMO Plant in MASTER status suddenly become unavailable (because the , etc.) the DEMO Plant on the LAMBDA

3.3.5

If a network error occurs between two SIMATIC IT server workstations, and communications between Plants configured in hot backup are no longer possible, then there will be two Plants in

tion and on the Auxiliary Master workstation, respectively. When communications between SIMATIC IT servers are re-

orkstation maintains the MASTER status,

3.3.6 Ap r-Slave Switching

tion on which the Plant is located becomes unavailable

a network error occurs

t startup, the Plant which is first activated assumes Master status, be it the Primary Master or on the Auxiliary Master workstation.

When the master disk is unavailable

When the Plant currently in master status becomes unavailable or the workstation where the Plant is loc

This switching is notified to all client workstations with a message (Switch primary master dsuccessfully terminated), ONLY if this option has been configured on each client worksta(select command Configuration >

operator is not notified.

When the former master starts working again, the former slave Plant which has become mamaintains this status.

Example: when the master disk is not availa

Scenario

You have configured a pair of workstations (e.g. OMEGA and LAMBDA) as Primary Master anAuxiliary Master.

the other DEMO Plant on the LAMB

OMEGA workstation crashes or shutdown is performedworkstation assumes MASTER status.

When the DEMO Plant on the OMEGA workstation again becomes available, it assumes SLAVE status, and the DEMO Plant on the LAMBDA workstation maintains the MASTER status.

When a network error occurs (Plants)

master status, running on the Primary Master worksta

established, the Plant located on the Primary Master windependent of previous configurations.

plication Maste

Master-Slave switching occurs automatically when:

• the master Plant or the worksta

•

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 162

Hot Backup

ication start-up, the SIMATIC IT server application which is first activated assumes master status (and maintains this status), be it located on the Primary Master or on the Auxiliary Master workstation.

e Master status, you need to perform this operation manually from the Backup Switch Tool environment.

3.3.7

In un , the slave server

the role of master.

hen the previous master is reactivated, it automatically assumes the role of slave, while the erform this operation

manually using the Backup Switch Tool.

3.3.8 Example: when the master application is not available

Scenario

You have configured a pair of workstations as primary and auxiliary master (in this example, OMEGA and LAMBDA, respectively). Then you start SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager (AM) and SIMATIC IT Plant Data Archive (PDA) modules on OMEGA and they assume MASTER status, whereas the SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager and SIMATIC IT Plant Data Archive modules on LAMBDA assume SLAVE status.

Important Upon appl

Note To configure the server module running on the Primary Master to assum

When the master application is unavailable

the event that the SIMATIC IT server application currently in master status becomes available, or the workstation where the module is running crashes

application automatically assumes

Wcurrent master maintains this role. To restore the initial roles you must p

Should the SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager module currently in MASTER status become suddenly unavailable, the SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager module in SLAVE status running on LAMBDA assumes the role of MASTER.

When the SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager on the OMEGA workstation is again available, it assumes the role of SLAVE, whereas the SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager running on LAMBDA maintains MASTER status.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 163

Hot Backup

3.3.9 When a network error occurs (Applications)

If a network error occurs between two SIMATIC IT servers, and communications between r possible, then applications in synchronous

When communications between SIMATIC IT servers are re-established, applications configured on the primary master will maintain their MASTER status, whereas applications configured on the auxiliary master will assume SLAVE status.

selecting option Master on Auxiliary Master (Configuration > System , button Advanced) for each server application you want to configure in

this way.

running on the auxiliary master workstation will rver application running on the primary master

3.3.10 nhancing master-slave alignment

d.

is possible to speed up data alignment between Primary and Auxiliary Master computers, thus

arried out by advanced users only, familiar with network protocols n

s A&D AS MES TSS tss.simatic-it@siemens.com

3.4 Manual switching

3.4.1

Under normal operation, master-slave switching occurs automatically in the event that the master status workstation where the Plant and modules are located becomes unavailable or the modules are stopped.

so switch the Plant and module status manually by using the Backup

3.4.2 a ter-slave switching of Plants

ual master-slave switching of Plants:

1. Select the command Tools > Backup Switch Tool in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

top of the workstation icon in the Backup

t they will assume when switching occurs. (Global Switch Mode options are not yet enabled).

o confi

applications configured in hot backup are no longeslave status will switch to master status.

You can change this by> Modules Backup tab

If you choose this configuration, the modulemaintain the MASTER role, whereas the seworkstation will switch to SLAVE.

E

SIMATIC IT backup servers regularly exchange large amounts of data to keep Plants and archives constantly aligne

Itreleasing supervisory and control networks from alignment traffic, by implementing and configuring a dedicated point-to-point Ethernet network.

This configuration should be cand their configuration. Hence, it is recommended that for any question or for more informatioabout different client / server network configurations you contact Siemen

Manual switching of Plants and modules

However, you can alSwitch Tool.

M nual mas

To carry out man

2. Double-click the computer name displayed on Switch dialog box.

3. The Global Switch Request dialog box lists the Plant names and the status tha

4. Click OK t rm switching.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 164

Hot Backup

Switching is executed only if the workstations configured in backup are operating normally.

ing of SIMATIC IT components

To carry out manual master-slave switching of SIMATIC IT components:

Tools > Backup Switch Tool in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

3. The Single Switch Request dialog box lists the module names, the status that they will assume when switching occurs, and the computer name of the workstation on which they are runni witch Mode options are not yet enabled).

OK

cuted ly if the workstations configured in backup are operating

Important

3.4.3 Manual master-slave switch

1. Select command

2. Double-click the SIMATIC IT component name in the Backup Switch dialog box.

ng. (Global S

4. Click to confirm switching.

Important Switching is exenormally.

on

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 165

Tag Management

4 Tag Management

4.1 Overview

4.1.1 Overvie

A points (i.e. tags) datab ary) is automatically associated to each logical Un

r le and point have the same meaning, and are used with

taapplicatio ed via the Unit to which the datab

When the ame is associated with a al rea managed by the Unit.

This mem it is called "SIMATIC IT Real Tim r on the P.M.C., if you use a Siemens

SIMATIC have access to the variables d.

Structure of the Points Database

Main table

• AM table

• PDA table

Maximum size of the Points Database

The maximu ry) is defined as follows:

ents 1.000.000

Arrays 20.000

w of the Points Database

ase (also called data diit of any type.

ction

Note Th oughout this document, the terms variabout distinction.

This da base contains the definition of all the variables that will be handled by SIMATIC IT ns: all read/write operations on these variables will be performase is associated.

variables are inserted into the database, their symbolic nphysic register of the memory a

ory area can be located either on the computer (in this case, e Data Server"), if you use third-party external devices, o Orsi Automation proprietary control network.

IT components (Alarms, Historical Trends, Graphic Panels, etc) located in any memory area, either centralized or distribute

4.1.2

The Points Database is made up of various tables, as follows:

•

• GUI table

• RTDS table

4.1.3

m size of the Points Database (Data Dictiona

Variables/array elem

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 166

Tag Management

Elements in each array

Note: These are "theoretical" limits. In fact, the actual size of each Data Dictionary is d

D

le

ta eters of all the points.

me

32.767

determine by the corresponding Locreg size.

4.2 Points atabase tables

4.2.1 Main tab

The Main ble contains fields required to configure the basic param

Field Na DescriptionREAL NAME a

types (e.g. P sters.

SYMBOLIC NAME atabase variable. Cannot be longer than 32 characters.

Alarm Manag

Register name associated with a physical address of the memory aremanaged by the Unit. Registers can be of different permanent, F field, …). For more information, see User regiSymbolic identifier assigned to the d

er raphic SIMATIC IT G

User Interface the point is configured, but no server is using it.

Plant the point is configured and at least one server is using it. Data Archive RTDS

the configuration of the point is no longer present, but at

least one server is still using it.

C (Code) A the variable is the array header

the variable is the element of an array an array loaded from a .DEF file or the n converted into an array. In both cases

e is 1 and the variable is converted into a normal array after vironment.

riable is scalar. mension or Array size or index number of an array element. This field is used only for

(array element). ing Level) Access level assigned to the variable. The access level defined in the

resource Set variables from SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface . Any user of this resource will be able to change

er

the e module to control write access to

For more information on variable setting from SIMATIC IT Graphic User ide.

. (Default t is assigned to a variable when defining ta

manual Project Development Environment (PDE) User’s Guide.

COMMENT Pr. (Comment Primarlanguage)

Comment assigned to the variable, usually in the language most familiar to the database user.

Code assigned to the variable. The following codes are available:

E I the variable is variable was scalar and had beethe array sizentering the Array Management enIf no code is displayed in this field, the va

DIM. (DiIndex) SL (Sett

Points with code A (array header) and E

Database Editor is used with the

the variable value from a SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface graphicpanel, provided that the access level of the resource is equal to or greatthan the level assigned to the variable. This value must be included between 1 and 30 and will be used bySIMATIC IT Graphic User Interfacvariables.

Interface, see manual SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface: User’s GuInitialization value, i.e. a value thaDEF. VAL

Value) the application program within PDE and SIMATIC IT Real Time DaEngine. For more information, see

y

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 167

Tag Management

COMMENT Sec. Comme(Comment Secondary language)

nt assigned to the database variable, in a language other than that used in the primary comment. This field is optional and is added to the

4.2.1.1 AM ta

The AM

If you ri sponding ToolTip is displayed.

Field Name

database only if the appropriate option is chosen upon database creation. .

ble

table contains fields required to configure the alarms.

ght click the column header, the corre

DescriptionGROUP Name of the group(s) the point is associated with. For more info

on how to associate a point to a group of alarms, see Associating an alarm group to a point.

rmation

SERVERS PY (Priority) ARCH (Archivable flag)

hivable; Yes = archivable

LOAD. MODE (Load mode)

e the existing graphic panel; ew graphic panel;

AL. (Alert) t enabled; Yes = Alerter enabled PRN (Printable) ble; Yes = printable

ssage) 1 or

Neg. Logic nt to invert the alarm activation mode. omment)

MESSAGE 1 r’s console. This message is

System from SIMATIC IT

MESSAGE 2 ded. This message is displayed if you have selected option Comment Display – Second Comment with command Configuration > System from SIMATIC IT Management Console. Otherwise MESSAGE 1 is displayed.

Name - Alarm WAV File)

(with .GRC extension) and/or of the sound associated with the alarm.

For more information on the configuration of alarms, see Configuring alarms.

4.2.2 GUI table

The G re the graphic object attributes.

mn hea e corresponding ToolTip is displayed.

Field Name

Name of the server that manages the alarm Priority level of the alarm (from 1 to 5) No = not arc

Sub = replacAdd = add a nNo = Alerter noNo = not printa

A.M.(Add me No = no comment added to alarm message defined in MESSAGE MESSAGE 2; Yes = comment added to alarm message defined in MESSAGE 1 or MESSAGE 2. Check the box if you wa

COMM (C Reserved for future use. Alarm message displayed on the operatodisplayed if you have selected option Comment Display – First Comment with command Configuration >Management Console. Otherwise MESSAGE 2 is displayed. Second message ad

PANEL / WAVE (Graphic Panel

Name of the graphic panelfile (with .WAV extension)

UI table contains fields required to configu

If you right click the colu der, th

Description

D. 1 (Digital Color 1) TRUE e int has the status TRUE in place of the

ON default string

Colour shown when the point is in the status ON String displayed when th po

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 168

Tag Management

D. 2 (Digital CFALSE

MAX. VAL. (M Value)

Maximum value the point may assume.

A. 1 (Analogic Color 1) Colour shown when the point exceeds the HH threshold s

alogiTH. H (Threshold H)A. 3 (AnalogiTH. L (Threshold Value of L threshold A. 4 (AnalogiTH. LL (Threshold LL) Value of LL threshold A. 5 (AnalogiMIN. VAL. (Minimum Va

Minimum value the point may assume.

DE erved for future use) Percentage by which the point’s increase rease may vary (with respect to the range)

T. ce Colo

For more information on graphic-object attributes, see Graphic object attributes.

4.2.3

he PDA table contains fields required to configure the point to archive.

Field Name

olor 2) Colour shown when the point is in the status OFF String displayed when the point has the status FALSE in place of the OFF default string

aximum

TH. HH (Thre hold HH) Value of HH threshold A. 2 (An c Color 2) Colour shown when the point exceeds the H threshold

Value of H threshold c Color 3) Colour shown when the point exceeds the L threshold

L) c Color 4) Colour shown when the point exceeds the LL threshold

c Color 5) Colour shown when the point is lower than the LL threshold

lue) LTA (res

or decr) ColourC (Tra used for the line that draws the point’s trend or that

represents the element in the chart

PDA table

T

If you right click the column header, the corresponding ToolTip is displayed.

Description

SERVERS Servers that manage the alarm TYPE CL (PDA Class) Sampling class type (from 1 to 4) MAX. VAL. (Maximum Value)

Maximum value the point may assume.

MIN. AL. (Minimum Value) DELTA EXTExternal)

Delta for external compression.

MI EXT. (External)

Minimum interval (in seconds) between two samples passed to the external compression algorithm.

MA . EXT. External)

s) between two samples passed to the orithm.

DELTA INT. (Delta Internal)

Delta for internal compression.

MIN. INT. (MiInternal) MAX. INT. (Maximum Internal)

Maximum time (in seconds) between two samples passed to the internal compression algorithm.

ENG. UNIT (Engineering Unit)

Measurement unit of the archived point.

Point type.

V Minimum value the point may assume.

. (Delta

N. Minimum

X (Maximum Maximum time (in secondexternal compression alg

nimum Minimum interval (in seconds) between two samples passed to the internal compression algorithm.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 169

Tag Management

For more information on the configuration of historical points, see Configuring a point to be

4.2.3.1 RTDS table

The RTDS table contains fields required to configure communications between SIMATIC IT a third-party PLC network, in order to read/write field variables

e

archived.

Real Time Data Server and

Field Nam DescriptionINTERFAC Name of the interface used to handle communi (Interface Na

cations between

y defined upon driver installation and must be also , see

CL (RTDS Cl applied by the edefined classes are

available and each class corresponds to a different sampling time: 0 = variables are not read at predefined intervals by the interface but

= 2 seconds

4 = 10 seconds 5 = 30 seconds 6 = 60 seconds

assigned by default to the variable if the d (e.g. due to network communications

failure, SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server and interfaces ).

USER 1

USER 2 bles via third-

USER 3

4.3

abase Editor

e the Data Dictionaries associated to the various Units defined in your Plant. From the ase Editor you can edit only one database at a time.

ement Console:

me) SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server and a third-party PLC network, in order to read/write field variables. This name is usuallspecified during RTDS configuration. For more informationConfiguring SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server.

ass) Time class value. The time class is the frequencyinterfaces to read values from the network. Six pr

only upon a specific request of a SIMATIC IT component. 1 = 1 second 23 = 6 seconds

SAFE VAL. Safety value, that is, value value cannot be read from fiel

communications failureThis field contains information required to access variables via third-party interfaces (e.g. PLC variable name) This field contains information required to access variaparty interfaces (e.g. PLC node number) This field contains information required to access variables via third-party interfaces

Database Editor

4.3.1 Starting the Dat

SIMATIC IT Management Console provides the Database Editor tool to create, update and managDatab

From SIMATIC IT Manag

1. Select a Unit in the tab.

it > Database Editor 2. Choose command Un

or

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 170

Tag Management

expand the Unit and click icon .

The Database Editor can also be called from various SIMATIC IT environments, such as PDE

rver configuration

4.3.2

riables are added, save the database with command File > Save

(Project Development Environment), SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Engine (SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Engine Manager) and the Alarm Manager / Plant Data Archive seutility.

Typographical conventions used in the database grid

Points in the Database Editor grid are sorted by default in descending order by field REAL NAME.

To re-sort Points when new va

Points are displayed in the grid with different colours according to their status, as follows:

Color

DescriptionBlack Grey Blue

Black blue Green

hese colors are assigned by the Database Editor but can be changed by the user, if required.

Th laced on the left side of the grid is used to display icons with the following

Normal point Read-only point Locked point (i.e., the database program cannot shift the allocation of the variable to another register/bit of the same type). Read-only locked point Bookmark

TFor more information, see Changing colors.

e column pmeaning:

Icon Description

N in the database ew point, i.e. not yet saved

Pnot yet

oint already defined in the database, modified in the current session and saved.

Invalid point, i.e. not saved since it contains errors.

P ase is s

oint marked for deletion. The point will be removed when the datab aved.

Array element

Open array

Closed array

Scalar variable converted into an array

een i

The column with the

If the left column is empty, the point has already been saved in the database and has not bmodified by the user in the current work ng session.

header is used to display icons with the following meaning:

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 171

Tag Management

Icon Description

Point already defined in the database, modified in the current session and not saved until all servers have read and updated database info.

Pre

4.3.3

4.3.3.1

e > Open in the Database Editor window. The standard browser dialog

4.3.3.2 ked to a particular Unit

Open Unit DB in the Database Editor. The Open Database ars.

the Units list box select the Unit of which you want to open the database. The dialog

inked to the selected Unit.

4.

4.3.4.1 s

able views, which can be used to configure the se grid.

he views which best suit the database structure. The

n, see Cu

In addition, the use d in the database grid when clickin

4.3.4.2 User View

Views 1 to 3 the database grid allow you to insert the fields you want, in the order that you want.

You can:

• Create a Use

ssign a

oint marked for deletion. The point will be removed when all servers have ad and updated the database info.

Opening a database

Opening a database (Database Editor)

Select the command Filbox appears.

Opening a database lin

To open a database that is linked to a specific Unit:

1. Select the command File > Linked to Unit dialog box appe

2. In displays the Unit Type, the name of the Database and the Project relating to the selected Unit.

3. Select the OK button to open the database l

3.4 Working with views

Database table view

The Database Editor provides some predefined torder in which fields are displayed in the databa

By default the Database Editor shows tpredefined views available, correspond to the tables that make up the database structure. You can modify the position, label and width of the fields in each view. For more informatio

stomizing a view.

r can create customized views, which will be displayeg tabs View 1, View 2 and View 3, respectively.

s

in

r View

• A User View

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 172

Tag Management

• Delete a

Customize a User View

4.3.4.3 Creating a User view

To create a User view:

1. Select command Tools > Views Management in the Database Editor.

2. Click the log box.

3. In the Fil

4. In the Database Fields list box select the fields you want to add to the View and click the

User View

•

Create User Views tab in the Views Management dia

e Name box insert the name of the new View.

button.

e Vie remove a field from the

ie

5. In th w Fields box are displayed the fields you have chosen. To

View F lds box reselect it and click . To remove all the fields click the

e to confirm your settings. The Close button allows you to e

a User view

Clear button.

6. Click Sav xit the dialog box.

4.3.4.4 Assigning

o assign a User view:

ls > Views Management in the Database Editor.

. Click the Assign User View tab in the Views Management dialog box.

. From the Available User Views list, select the user view you want assign to the View1 tab.

in the View1 field in the Current

for View 2 and View 3, if necessary.

o

. Right-click the View1 tab in the Database Editor. The Select View (VIEW1) dialog box

2. Select the view you want from the list and click OK.

4.3.4.5

2.

4.

T

1. Select command Too

2

3. Select the View1 tab.

4

5. Click the Apply button. The Close button allows you to exit the dialog box.

6. The assignment you have just made is displayed Assignment area.

7. Repeat steps from 3 to 6

Y u can also assign a User view as follows:

1appears.

Deleting a User view

To delete a User view:

1. Select command Tools > Views Management in the Database Editor.

Click the Delete User Views tab in the Views Management dialog box.

3. In the Views list box select the view you want to delete.

Click the Delete button. The Close button allows you to exit the dialog box.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 173

Tag Management

4.3.5 Working with points

4.3.5.1

o manage points (i.e. scalar variables) you need to enter a dedicated environment, with

Managing Points

T

command File > Points Management in Database Editor.

To handle scalar variables in guided mode, select commands Edit > Point > Add or Edit >

> Modify Point .

• ode)

•

•

File > Save

The following operations can be performed in the Points Management environment:

Inserting a new point (in guided m

• Inserting a new point (in manual mode)

Modifying a point (in guided mode)

Modifying a point (in manual mode)

• Modifying a group of points

• Deleting a point

• Duplicating a point

• Duplicating serveral points

• Correcting errors

• Converting a scalar variable into an array

• Setting in read-only mode

To save any changes applied to variables in Points Management you need to choose command

. In any case the Database Editor program prompts you to save changes when

ImportanAll the chaservers (A Archive, RTDS). For more information, see

uration.

4.3.5.2

o insert a new point in guided mode:

ew point is to be inserted.

you quit the Points Management environment.

t nges applied to the database should be updated on the SIMATIC IT larm Manager, Plant Data

Updating the SIMATIC IT servers config

Inserting a new point (guided mode)

T

1. In the database grid, move to the row under which the n

2. Select command Edit > Point > Add . The Add Points dialog box is displayed.

Parameter DescriptionReal name typ

locreg type associated with the database. Register identifier. Registers and es may vary according to the

Click button to display all registers and related types (Integer, Real, Character, Logic):

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 174

Tag Management

• Alarm (A) • Field (F) • Not Permanent (R) • Permanent (P) • Backup (B) • Input (I) • Output (O) Symbolic identifier of the vaSymbolic name riable. Alphanumeric string up to 32

Scess level defined in the Database

s from SIMATIC IT ource will be able to

r than the level assigned to the

For more information on variable setting from SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface, see manual SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface: User’s Guide.

L

another register/bit of the same type.

) iable, usually in the language most

Comment (Secondary language)

Comment assigned to the database variable, in a language other than that used in the primary comment. This field is optional and is added to the database only if the appropriate option is chosen

Points Num

re inserted in the database when you select command File > Save

characters. Access level required to set the variable value in SIMATIC IT etting level Graphic User Interface. The acEditor is used with the resource Set variableGraphic User Interface . Any user of this reschange the variable value from a SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface graphic panel, provided that the access level of the resource is equal to or greatevariable.

ocked If you select this check box the point is locked, that is, the database merge program cannot shift the variable allocation to

Comment (Primary language

Comment assigned to the varfamiliar to the database user.

upon database creation. ber Number of points to be inserted

3. Click the OK button.

. The points a

You can then insert the other parameters to configure the point according to your needs, i.e.:

To handle communication with the PLC network

re a poiint to be archived

re graphic object parameters

4.3.5.3 new point (manual mode)

w point in manual mode:

base grid move to the row under which the new point is to be inserted.

RETURN key to insert an empty point.

3. Move to the REAL NAME field of the first point you have inserted and enter the register type and progressive number (e.g. F10, P5, A30). You can also enter only the register type and then perform an automatic allocation. For more information, see Automatic allocation.

•

• To configure an alarm

• To configu

• To configu

Inserting a

To insert a ne

1. In the data

2. Press the

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 175

Tag Management

4. Enter the symbolic identifier of the variable in the SYMBOLIC NAME field (maximum 32 use

lues in all the remaining fields of the point. Click the various tabs (AM, te the point configuration. For more information on the values to be

oints Database.

serted in the database when you select command File > Save

characters). To enter several names which begin with the same characters you can automatic fill. For more information, see Automatic Filling.

5. Enter the required vaPDA, GUI) to compleinserted, see Structure of the P

. The points are in

4.3.5.4 u on

hanks to the automatic allocation tool you do not need to view the locreg map to discover

n array in guided mode (for more information, see Inserting a new point e point or see Modifying the field values of an array element (guided mode) t free register of the selected type is automatically assigned to the point

rray is saved in the database.

anual mode, you must proceed as follows:

1. In the Points Management window insert one or more empty points: move to the row under ss the RETURN key as many times as the

2. Enter the register type (e.g. RI,PF) in the first REAL NAME field of the point(s) to be

.). You can also indicate the register number and/or bit number from which

3. Drag the cursor to select all the REAL NAME fields of the points to be allocated.

4. Selec llocation

A tomatic allocati

Twhich registers of a certain type are still free.

If you add a variable or a(guided mode) for thfor the array), the firswhen the variable or the a

If, on the other hand, you insert a point in m

which the new point is to be inserted and prenumber of points to be inserted.

allocated. If you want to allocate a bit, the register type identifier must be followed by a dot (e.g. RI. PIallocation must start (e.g. RI10 PI.[5]).

. t command Edit > Auto A

5. All the selected REAL NAME fields are filled with free register numbers of the selected type.

If the RE in a valid identifier, tomatic

Allocation ock and continues with all subsequent points of

f somew with a valid register identifier different from the first, allocation con

Bit allocation starts from the first free bit of either the first free or partially used register, if you do ot indicate any register number.

4.3.5.5

u just specify RI. in the first POINT field of you indicate RI11. as the first

ot all the bits of register R10 were used.

AL NAME field of the first selected point is empty or does not conta allocation is not performed. au

starts from the first point of the selected blthe block, for which the REAL NAME field is empty.

I here in the block there is a pointtinues using the latter register type.

n

Example of automatic allocation

If bits 0 to 3 of register RI10 are already used, and yoyour block, bits allocation will start from RI10.[4]. However, if POINT field value of your block, allocation starts from bit RI11.[0], even if n

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 176

Tag Management

4.3.5.6

r, in a block f selected points. In this way it becomes extremely easy, for example, to assign different

names to each element of an array.

o perform Automatic Filling in a block of selected points:

e filled (e.g. SYMBOLIC NAME) for all the points of

Automatic Filling

The Automatic Fill tool inserts a string followed, if required, by a progressive numbeo

T

1. Drag the cursor to select the field to binterest.

2. Select command Edit > Fill Selection . The Fill Selection dialog box appears;

Parameter

DescriptionText be used to fill the field.

if it is longer than the selected field or block size. The ng is always aligned left. he block you select already contains characters, these are replaced with

e the number (any number of digits) is to be inserted. Type the \ character before the number sign # (i.e. \#) to display the #

ead of a digit. Enable Auincrement Start from ented Step Step to be applied to increment the number Leading Z

Digits

ImportanIf the selectefilling prog

4.3.5.7 xample of Automatic Filling

Example1 de up of 10 characters and 8 rows in the SYMBOLIC NAME field. meters in the Fill Selection dialog box.

•

Leading zero:

• Number of digits: 3

LIC NAME field will be filled with the following strings:

Alphanumeric string to The string is truncatedstriIf tthe text entered by the user. To insert a number in any position within a string, type the # symbol wher

character insttomatic Check this box only if a right aligned number is to be inserted at the end of

the string. The number will be automatically incremented in each point. First number to be increm

ero If you check this box, the program will insert as many leading zeros as required to reach the digit indicated in the subsequent Number of digits field. See description below. Total number of digits to be inserted, including leading zeros.

t d block contains read-only fields, these are not processed by the

ram.

E

You have selected a block maThen you set the following para

• Text: valve

• Enable Automatic increment:

Start from: 2

• Step: 1

•

The eight rows of the SYMBO

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 177

Tag Management

• valve002

• valve003

•

valve007

• valve008

Example2 ected six rows of the SYMBOLIC NAME field. Then you set the following

arameters in the Fill Selection dialog box:

Leading zero:

The six rows of the SYMBOLIC NAME field will be filled with the following strings:

valve0010KK_A

• valve0012KK_A

4.3.5.8

1.

• valve004

valve005

• valve006

•

• valve009

You have selp

• Text: VALVE#KK_A

• Enable Automatic increment:

• Start from: 4

• Step: 2

•

• Number of digits: 4

• valve0004KK_A

• valve0006KK_A

• valve0008KK_A

•

• valve0014KK_A

Modifying a point (guided mode)

To modify a point in guided mode:

Select command Edit > Point > Modify in Database Editor. The Point Viewer dialog

2. ns:

Click

box appears.

Modify the values of the fields of interest. You can use any of the following butto

To

Move to the previous point

Move to the next point

Update the database fields with the new values inserted into the fields.

Reset the previ

ously displayed settings.

nal record values, not yet acquired by the servers. View the origi

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 178

Tag Management

(for arrays only) Expand the array

(for arrays only) Collapse the array

uncheck the Present box.

e

3. If you want to remove some tables from the point definition, click the relative tab and

4. Click Update to update the point definition.

To apply the changes you have entered use the File > Sav command.

1. Move to the point of interest in the database grid.

Type the new values in the fields. To move between fields press the TAB key.

To apply the

4.3.5.9 Modifying a point (manual mode)

To modify a point in manual mode:

2.

changes you have entered use the File > Save command.

4.3.5.10 Modifying

To modify a

. Select the block of points you want to modify.

oint >Modify

a group of variables

group of variables:

1

2. Select command Edit > P . The Point Viewer dialog box appears.

5.

To apply the changes you have entered use the File > Save

3. Select the tables of interest.

4. Modify the fields you want.

Click OK.

command.

4.3.5.11 Deleting a po

poi d choose command

> Point > D

int

To remove a nt from the database, select a point in the database grid an

Edit elete .

If the point is old e delete icon , that is, it had already been saved in the database, th ( ) is splayed in the is only logically

deleted and will osen.

then it is po d Edit > Point > Delete.

ed in the database but not yet saved (icon

di first column next to the REAL NAME field. In this way the point be removed from the database when the Save command is ch

Until ssible to restore the point by selecting it and choosing comman

If the point is new, that is, it has been insert in the first column), the point is actually removed and it will not be possible to restore it.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 179

Tag Management

4. Duplic

To dupli

. Select a point in the grid.

3.5.12 ating a point

cate a point:

1

2. Select command Edit > Point >Duplicate The Add Points dialog box appears.

Athe sample point, but the REAL NAME field is empty.

Enter an appropriate value in the REAo

licating several points

3. new point is inserted after the selected one. This point has the same fields and values as

4. L NAME field. You can use the dynamic allocation ption.

4.3.5.13 Dup

To duplicate several points:

1. Select a point in the grid.

2. Select command Edit > Point > Duplicate .

3. The new points are inserted after the last points present in database. These points have the same fields and values as the sample point, but the REAL NAME field is empty.

4. e value in the REAL NAME field. You can use the dynamic allocation

4.3.5.14 Co

By ve the new and the modified points in the database.

ields present incorrect values, they are listed at the bottom of the window with related error messages.

orrect a

ify th w.

2. Save the

3. The field values now display the changes made.

4.3.5.15 Displayin

To display the errors found after saving the database, select command View > Errors View.

4.3.5.16

Yo iable into an array with dimension 1. The size of the array can be

the database grid.

. Select command Edit > Change Scalar to Array or press key F8.

3 into the CODE (C) field.

Enter an appropriatoption.

rrecting errors

selecting the Save command you sa

If one or more points are not correct i.e. if some f

To c ny fields that contain incorrect values:

1. Mod e incorrect values displayed at the bottom of the windo

database again.

s that previously contained incorrect

g errors

Converting a scalar variable into an array

u can convert a scalar varsubsequently modified in the Arrays Management environment.

To convert a scalar variable into an array:

1. Select the point to be changed in

2

. The I character is inserted

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 180

Tag Management

4. nvironment with command File > Arrays Management . Enter the Array Management eThe converted array is displayed as a blue folder.

. increase the dimension). The folder colour changes to

ou can restore the initial status (that is, re-convert the array into a scalar variable) with Array to Scalar (keys Shift+F8), if the database was not saved. s not possible.

4.3.5.17

You can execute filters on the values of any field (both in read and in write mode) in the grid of the Database Editor.

cific conventions when applying a filter can aid you considerably in searching for a string in the database. In addition, you can perform two types of queries:

Single-field queries

le-field queries

u can f k of points.

In addition mmands, the Database Editor provides a number of you to quickly locate a point in the database. Points can also be sorted for display

the Points Management window of Database Editor.

4.3.5.18 Conventions used for finding strings

The fol the database.

To search for

5. Modify the array as required (e.gyellow and the I code is replaced with the A and E codes in the database grid.

Ycommand Edit > ChangeOtherwise this operation i

Find and Replace

Adopting spe

•

• Multip

Yo ind and replace text throughout the entire database or in a selected bloc

to the usual Find and Replace cotools to help in

lowing conventions can be applied to search any string in

Do as follows

Partial strings Enter the first characters of the string followed by wildcards * (any number of characters) or ? (one character).

in the database which begin r of characters. Type TIC405?

to find all strings in the database which begin with TIC405 and are followed by one character.

Substrings Enter the substring to be found within a longer string . You can use e character). For instance

type *TIME* to find all strings which contain the TIME substring.

4.3.5.19

To execute a single-field query:

1. Move the cursor to any point of the field to be used for the query in the Database Editor grid

For instance, type TIC405* to find all strings with TIC405 and are followed by any numbe

wildcards * (any number of characters) or ? (on

Single-field queries

(for instance, click any point of the SYMBOLIC NAME field).

2. Select command Edit > Find . Enter the following parameters in the Find dialog box.

Parameter DescriptionFind what Text to be found in the database, in the field displayed in the title bar

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 181

Tag Management

(it is the field where the cursor is positioned). Match whol

Match Case e

Negative Logic If you check this box, the Database Editor will find text which does you entered in the Find what edit box.

Direction Up

Direction D n If you click this radio button, the Database Editor will find text only in the points which follow the point where the cursor is positioned.

3. After setting the parameters of interest:

e word only If you check this box, the Database Editor will consider the text inserted in Find what as a word and not a part of word. If you check this box, the Database Editor will find only text with thspecified capitalization (case sensitive).

NOT match the text If you click this radio button, the Database Editor will find text only in the points which precede the point where the cursor is positioned.

ow

Click ToFind Next Start searchin xt Mark All In ma hes the specified search

criteria.

4. After finding the first point that matches the search criteria, the Find dialog box disappears

able in the Points Management toolbar):

g the first occurrence of the tesert a bookmark next to each point that tc

automatically. To find more points that match the same criteria, click one of the following buttons (avail

to find the next point

to find the previous point.

ltiple-field queries 4.3.5.20 Mu

To execute a multiple-field query:

1. Select command Search > Advanced Find . The Advanced Find dialog box appears.

2. You can perform complex searches by using the database fields of the various tables. These

- the Main table

GUI

- the PDA table

3. You can also select some additional options:

Select

tables are:

- the RTDS table

- the AM table

- the table

To

Direction - Up Search text from the current record up to the beginning of the file. Direction - Down Search text from the current record up to the end of the file.

c ox Find text which does NOT match the text you entered in the field box. heck b

check ase sensitive). box Find only text with the specified capitalization (c

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 182

Tag Management

icon

elds. The most common and some advanced operators are available.

Choose a relational operator which will be used to search numeric fi

4. Click the Mark All button to insert a bookmark next to each record which matches the

5. Click h matches the search

To find more records which match the same criteria, click one of the following buttons (available in the Points Management toolbar):

specified search criteria.

Find Next to run the search. After finding the first record whiccriteria, the Advanced Find dialog box disappears automatically.

to find the next record

to find the previous record.

4.3.5.21 Finding and replacing text

Find and Replace command, as the Find command, can only search a single field at a time.

To find and replace text:

and Edit > Replace

You can find and replace text in the whole database or in a selected block of points. The

1. Select a block of points for the field of interest (e.g. SYMBOLIC NAME) or move to any point of the field of interest to search the whole database.

2. Select comm . Enter the following parameters in the Replace dialog

Parameter

box:

DescriptionFind what Text to be found in the database, in the field displayed in the title bar (it is the

Replace wMatch whole only Match Cas cified

case. Replace in Text is replaced only in the selected block (button Selection) or in the whole

database (button Whole Database).

Click

field where the cursor is positioned). You can search for partial strings. ith Text which will replace the text found.

word If you check this box, the Database Editor will consider the text inserted in Find what as a word and not a part of word.

e If you check this box, the Database Editor will find only text with the spe

3. After setting the parameters of interest:

ToFind Next atabase. Replace Replace the current text ed in the Replace with box. Replace All Replace the current text with the text specified in the Replace with box, either in

the current selection or in the whole database.

Search text in the current selection or in the whole dwith the text specifi

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 183

Tag Management

4.3.5.22 Converting text to uppercase/lowercase

ercase or all lowercase letters you can use commands Upper Case or Lower Case in the Edit menu.

A block is a set of cont same type.

4.3.5.23 Locating a point in

The Database Editor p a point in the database, in addition to

Using bookmarks If you have added bookmarks to your database file, you can locate the marked points by electing commands Bookmarks > Previous or Bookmarks > Next on the Edit menu. For ore information, see Inserting and removing bookmarks.

Using line numbers

To convert a selected text block to all upp

iguous fields of the

the database

rovides a number of tools to help you to quickly locate the usual Find and Replace commands.

sm

Each point in the database file is associated with a line number, which is displayed in the

Pointer bar of the Database Editor window. Select command Edit > Go To to display the Go To dialog box and enter the line number to be located in the Line Number box.

4.3.5.24 Sorting points

Points displayed in the Points Management window of Database Editor can be sorted by:

To sort poin

• real name

• symbolic name

ts by Select command

Real name Search > Sort > by Real Name

Symbolic name e Search > Sort > by Symbolic Nam

serting/removing Bookmarks 4.3.5.25 In

mark one or more points in your database which you need to locate ng a Find command, or manually.

Adding a boose grid.

2.

3. r (usually green, but you can customize this option).

Removing a bookmark 1. Move to a point previously marked in the database grid

Bookmarks are used to quickly. You can add bookmarks either while runni

kmark manually 1. Move to the point to be marked in the databa

Select command Edit > Bookmarks > Toggle.

The Title column next to the point is marked with a different colou

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 184

Tag Management

2. Select command Edit > Bookmarks > Toggle.

3. The bookmark is removed.

Removing > e.

. All bookmarks previously inserted, either manually or automatically, will be removed.

4.3.5.26

rent database to a database that has the same rmat.

ion and must be se Editor creates

n EXPORT file it also generates the relative indexes.

t same file.

rs.

- Selected: the points selected in the grid.

ints to which a bookmark has been associated.

base: all points in the database.

oints heck boxes determine the subset of records which will be

exported, as follows:

- Selec ram will only export those records which contain these configurations

- Unsel which DO NOT contain these config

- Undet export all records, whether or not the

nter the ximum 8 characters).

5. Click the ck box to choose not to copy array headers and array elements into the n ents of a selected array are copied to d does not contain all the array elem

6. In the Wr if you want to either overwrite

7. Click OK

8. You can e file with .XDB extension from the Points Management or Database agem

all bookmarks 1. Select command Edit Bookmarks > Remov

2

Exporting points

You can copy a block of points from the curfo

Export databases are equal to a standard database but have .XDB extensassigned a name different from that of the source database. When the Databaa

Since new points can be appended to an existing EXPORT database, it is possible to exporpoints several times to the

Before running the Export command you must save all changes in Points Management window. Then proceed as follows:

1. Select command Tools > Export points. The Export dialog box appea

2. In the Extract Points area choose the set of points to be exported:

- Marked: the po

- Whole data

3. Check the configurations (AM, PDA, GUI, RTDS) you want to export within the Filter Pby Configuration area. These c

ted: the prog

ected: the program will only export those recordsurations

ermined (selected but shadowed): the program willy contain these configurations.

4. E name of the export file in the File Name edit box (ma

Skip Arrays cheew database. If you do not check this box, all the elem the new database, even if the block of points selecte

ents.

iting mode area check the box Overwrite or Append the destination database or add points to it.

open thMan ent by choosing command File > Open.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 185

Tag Management

4.3.5.27

compilers in the PDE or-Real Time Data ents when incomplete variable definitions are detected.

of all the program variables and registers which do not ciated with the Unit.

To import a definition file, perform the following steps:

generated when compiling the d in other Projects,

> Modify in SIMATIC

3. ile from the Definitions Files list box.

is

he Import program behaves as follows:

I

Importing points from a .DEF file

Definitions files (.DEF extension) are created by Engine Manager environm

Therefore each .DEF file contains a listhave a corresponding definition in the database asso

1. In Points Management, select command Tools > Read Definitions Files.

2. The Read Definitions Files dialog box lists all the .DEF filesProject associated with the current Unit. To display .DEF files generateyou must associate a different Project to the Unit (use command Edit IT Management Console).

Select the f

4. Click OK to import the files.

For each definition stored in the .DEF file the Database Editor creates a new point, whichadded after the point where the cursor is positioned.

T

f you import The program adds

At

NAME field and the variable type (integer, float, character, etc) in the REAL NAME field (if this information was available in the program). The type is preceded by a question mark which must be replaced by the user with the register type of interest (e.g. P to allocate a permanent register, F to allocate a field

A register field. The user must insert the variable name in the SYMBOLIC NAME field.

f you impor CODE (C) field is empty, whereas it contains the I letter if you import an ar ways has size 1.

To explode e. display the A and E letters in the CODE field), you

ust enter the Array Management environment with command File > Arrays Management

variable which does not exist in he database

A point which contains the variable name in the SYMBOLIC

register, etc.) A point which contains the register name in the REAL NAME

I t a scalar variable, theray. The imported array al

the elements of the array (i.

m.

he imported comes yellow (standard colour) when you modify the a

t if you merge this database

T array folder is displayed in blue but berray (e.g. increase its size).

4.3.5.28 Locking a point

You can lock a point or a block of selected points: this implies thawith another, the program cannot shift the allocation of the selected point to another register/bit of the same type. For more information on merging databases, see Merging databases.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 186

Tag Management

To lock a point (or a block of selected points):

Select a point or block of points in the Points Management window. 1.

2. k Select command Edit > Point > Loc .

usually blue. However you can modify this default colour. For more information, see Changing colors.

4.3.5.29 Unlocking a point

cted points):

t or block of points in the Points Management window. Locked points

3. Locked points are displayed in a different colour,

To unlock a point (or a block of sele

1. Select a locked poinare displayed by default in blue.

2. Select command Edit > Point > Unlock .

Unlocked points are displayed in the standard text colour (usually black), but you can change lors.

4.3.6 Working with arrays

4.3.6.1 Managing Arrays

s you need to enter the Arrays Management environment, with command File

> Arrays Management

it. For more information, see Changing co

To manage array

in Database Editor.

ds Edit >Add Array

To handle an array in guided mode, you can:

or Modify Array or Element • Select comman , or

In Add Array or Point Viewer dialog boxes are displayed.

ny changes applied to arrays become permanent as soon as they are performed, and no s required.

re option (Tools menu > Settings command > >Enable Restore check box) in Arrays

anagement, the following message will be displayed: Database modified, confirm changes?

nges applied during the current working session.

Select command View > Point Viewer •

all cases the

Aconfirmation i

However, if you select the Enable RestoWorkspace tab > Arrays Management areaM

Click Yes to save all cha

Click No to reject changes, and to restore the database status prior to any changes applied

4.3.6.2

o add an array:

during the current session.

Adding an array

T

Select command Edit > Add Array in Arrays Management. The appears. Enter the following data:

Add Array dialog box

Parameter

DescriptionFirst Register Identifier of the first register of the array (e.g. FF25).

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 187

Tag Management

The register types available depend on the locreg

previously assigned to the database: click button to display all registers and related types (Integer, Real, Character, Logic).

Symbolic Name Symbolic identifier of the variable. Alphanumeric string up to 32 characters.

Setting Lev Access level required to set the variable value in SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface. This value is assigned to each element of the array.

Dimension n of the array (i.e. number of elements it can

Locked s locked, that is, the database merge program cannot shift the variable allocation to another register/bit of the same type.

Comment (Planguage) displayed only beside the array header. Comment (Secondary la

Alphanumeric string used to define the array contents. It is displayed only beside the array header.

g to your needs:

mmunication with PLC network

to configure an Alarm

• to configure a point to be archived

rs

4.3.6.3

Double click the array name: all the elements of the array are listed. Select the element to be modified.

3. Select command Edit > Modify Array or Element

el

Dimensiohold). If you select this check box each element of the array i

rimary Alphanumeric string used to define the array contents. It is

nguage)

You can then insert the other parameters to configure the point accordin

• to handle co

•

• to configure graphic-object paramete

Modifying the field values of an array element (guided mode)

To modify the field values of an array element in guided mode:

1. In the Arrays Management window, select the array to be modified.

2.

; the Point Viewer dialog box appears.

n of the buttons displayed next

5. If yun

Important

You are not allowed to change the register type, the element index or the Locked check box.

4.3.6.4 Buttons

ns:

4. Modify the values of the fields of interest. For a brief descriptioto the dialog box, see Array buttons.

ou want to remove some tables from the point definition, click the relative tab and check the Present box.

6. Click Update to confirm changes.

These dialog boxes show the following buttons, which allow you to perform several operatio

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 188

Tag Management

Click To

Move to the previous point

Move to the next point

Expand the collapsed array

Collapse the expanded array

Reset previous settings

Update the database fields with the values inserted in the fields

Insert the new values in the database fields

Close the window without saving

4.3.6.5 Modifyi ode)

To modif

1. In the modified in the database grid.

2. The REAL NAME field of a different colour (usually grey) to indicate that the field is read-only and thus cannot be modified.

3. Enter a new identifier in the SYMBOLIC NAME field to associate a name other than the array header to the element of the array.

4. Enter new values in the other fields, if required.

5. To save changes choose command File > Save

ng the field values of an array element (manual m

y the field values of an array element in manual mode:

Points Management window select the array element to be

each element of the array is displayed in

.

4.3.6.6 Duplica

To duplicate an array:

elec Management window.

2. Selec

ting an array

1. S t the array to be modified in the Arrays

t command Edit > Duplicate Array ; the Add Array dialog box appea

all the values of interest.

the OK button to confirm changes.

rs.

3. Enter

4. Click

4.3.6.7 Deletin

You can t environment.

To delete a single array: deleted in the Arrays Management window.

2. Select command Edit > Delete Array

g Arrays

remove one or more arrays only from the Arrays Managemen

1. Select the array to be

.

3. Confirm deletion with . The array and all its elements are removed from the database. Yes

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 189

Tag Management

To delete m1. Select command Edit > Delete Multiple Arrays.

s you can press the

s and all their elements are removed from the database.

Importan

You cannot remove only o

4.3.6.8 Locking an array

lies that if you merge this database with another, the program cannot shift the allocation of the selected array to another register/bit of the same type. For more information on merging databases, see Merging databases.

> Lock Array

ultiple arrays:

2. Select the arrays to be deleted in the window. To make multiple selectionSHIFT key.

3. Confirm deletion with Yes. The array

t ne element of the array

You can lock an array: this imp

To lock an array:

1. Select an array in the Arrays Management window.

. 2. Select command Edit

or 3. The array and all its elements are locked. The array icon (either ) is displayed in blue.

Arrays can be locked (as a whole) only in the Arrays Management environment. Thus you window

4.3.6.9 Unlocking an array

To unlock an array:

y in the Arrays Management window.

k Array

Important

cannot lock/unlock the elements of an array in the Points Management

1. Select a locked arra

. 2. Select command Edit > Unloc

or 3. The array and all its elements are unlocked. The array icon (either ) is displayed in

Important

Arrays can henvironment. Thus you cannot lock/unlock the elements of an array in the Points Management window.

white).

be unlocked (as a w ole) only in the Arrays Management

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 190

Tag Management

4.3.7 Updating server configuration

4.3.7.1 Updating the SIMATIC IT servers configuration

, that is, without shutting them down. nvironment.

• Updating the RTDS server configuration

rver, see Updating

•

For details on how to update the point configuration of the Plant Data Archive server, see the related documentation of the SIMATIC IT Plant Data Archive module.

•

update the point configuration of the Alarm Manager server, see the

4.3.8

4.3.8.1 Configuring alarms

You can organize alarms in groups (sets) according to their function or their zone and can filter their display in the SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager Display module. Alarms can be printed and archived.

To configure User alarms:

1. Click the AM tab in the Point Viewer dialog box. A dialog box appears and displays the

2. Check the Present box and configure the following Alarm Manager attributes.

Important This check box is enabled only if you are adding a Boolean point.

Field Name

Any changes you apply to a database from the Database Editor must be updated in the SIMATIC IT servers configuration (Alarm Manager, Plant Data Archive, RTDS).

This operation can be performed run-time by the serversTo this end, the program provides a dedicated configuration e

For details on how to update the point configuration of the RTDS seSIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server.

Updating the Plant Data Archive server configuration

Updating the Alarm Manager server configuration

For details on how torelated documentation of the SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager module.

Configuring alarms

Alarm Manager fields.

Action

Servers Groups

Choose the servers that have to manage the alarm Enter the name of the group to which the alarm belongs

Archivable CPrintable C to print the alarm Comment Reserved for future use Add Message C

m e 2 fields. C ry language) will be added before Message 1 whereas C dary language) will be added before Message 2.

Neg. Logic C u want to invert the alarm activation mode. Enable Alerter C u want to enable the Alerter service

heck the box if you want to archive the alarm heck the box if you want

heck this box if text entered in the Comment fields of the Main tab ust be concatenated to text in the Message 1 or Messagomment (Primaomment (Seconheck the box if yoheck the box if yo

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 191

Tag Management

Priority Sin ATIC IT Alarm Manager and A

Panel/Wave E ith .GRC extension) and/or sound file (with .WAV extension) you want to associate to the alarm. You can enter both values, using the ";" character or a blank as separator. File names must be entered with extension but without pathname and can be in any order. For further information, see also:

Associating a graphic panel to an alarm Loading mode Select the button which defines how to load the graphic panel:

Sub = replace the existing graphic panel. Add = add a new graphic panel.

Message 1 Alarm message displayed on the operator’s console. This message is mment Display – First > System from SIMATIC IT

Management Console. age 2 Alarm message displayed on the operator’s console, usually in a

language different from Message 1. This message is displayed if you have selected option Comment Display – Second Comment with command Configuration > System from SIMATIC IT Management Console.

3. Click the OK button.

Po tabase when you select command File > Save

elect the priority level you want to associate to the alarm. For more formation on alarm priority see the SIMlarm Manager Display documentation. nter the name of the graphic panel (w

Associating a sound file to an alarm

displayed if you have selected option CoComment with command Configuration

Mess

. ints are inserted in the da

4.3.8.2 Creating a group of alarms

reate a gr

elect com s in DB Editor

2. In the Defi the

To c oup of alarms:

1. S mand Tools > Define Alarm Group

ne Alarm Groups dialog box click button

3. Insert the name of the new alarm group. You can add up to 255 groups.

4. Click OK to save changes and quit.

to heir names from an existing TXT f m the dialog box.

o use existing group names for a different Plant, you can also export these names to a TXT file (click the Export button) and then re-import them.

4.3.8.3

To change the name of an alarm group: . Select command Tools > Define Alarm Groups in DB Editor.

2. Select the name of a group in the Group Names list.

3. In the Define Alarm Groups dialog box click the

If you want define several alarm groups at a time, you can import tile. Click the Import button and select the file fro

T

Updating alarm groups

1

button or click the group name.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 192

Tag Management

4. Enter the new name.

5. Click OK to save changes and quit.

To delete act command Tools > Define Alarm Groups in DB Editor.

e

3. Click the

n alarm group: 1. Sele

2. In the Define Alarm Groups dialog box select the name of the group to be deleted from thGroup Names list.

button.

4. Click OK to save changes and quit.

To change the sorting order: es are sorted in descending alphabetical order (by Name option). You

can assign a user-defined order:

2. In the Define Alarm Groups dialog box click the by User button in the Sort area.

3. Select the name of a group from the list.

By default, group nam

1. Select command Tools > Define Alarm Groups in DB Editor.

Group Names

4. Click the and buttons to move the group name down or up in the list, respectively.

. Click OK to save changes and quit.

and/or sorting order, click the Reload button. This operation ing the dialog box with the OK command.

4.3.8.4 Associating an alarm group to a point

To associate an alam group to a specific point:

2.

4. roup you want to associate to the point in the Group Names list.

5. The group name is moved to the Selection Summary list.

6.

7. me in Names list. The name is removed from the Selection Summary list.

4.3.8.5 Configuring the read/write mode

Points are always displayed in write mode when you open a database. Thus you can change any field value in the grid.

To prevent and Tools > Read-Only mode w he Points grid.

5

To restore the initial group names is possible only before quitt

1. In the database grid, click the AM tab to display the Alarm Manager configuration fields.

In the GROUPS column, double click the cell corresponding to the point you want to associate to an alarm group.

3. The Modify Configuration dialog box is displayed.

Click the name of the g

Each point can be associated to a maximum of 16 alarm groups.

To remove the association between a group and the point, click the highlighted group nathe Group

accidental changes to the data displayed, you can choose commhich is applied to t

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 193

Tag Management

Since array a nly in the Arrays Management window, you need to re- t in the same level of security.

4.3.9

4.3.9.1 handle communication with a PLC network

1. Click splaying the RTDS fields

r the following parameters:

Field Name

s nd array elements can be modified oen er the command also in that environment, if you want to obta

Configuring RTDS parameters

Entering RTDS parameters to

the tab in the dialog box. A dialog box diRTDS Add Pointsappears.

2. Check the Present box and then ente

DescriptionInterface N me Name of the interface used to handle communications between SIMATIC

e is defined during RTDS configuration.

Safe Value Value assigned by default to the variable if the value cannot be read from ns failure, SIMATIC IT Real

ications failure). Class Time class value. The time class is the frequency applied by the

interfaces to read values from the network. Six predefined classes d each class corresponds to a different sampling time: 0 = variables are not re ntervals by the interface but only upon a specific request from a IT component. 1 = 1 second 2 = 2 seconds 3 = 6 seconds 4 = 10 seconds 5 = 30 seconds 6 = 60 seconds This field contains infor d to access variables via third-party interfaces (e.g. PLC va

ield 2 This field contains infor access variables via third-party interfaces (e.g. PLC no

User Field 3 This field contains infor ed to access variables via third-party interfaces

3. Click the OK button.

Points are inserted in the databa lect command File > Save

aIT Real Time Data Server and a third-party PLC network, in order to read/write field variables. This nam

the field (e.g. due to network communicatioTime Data Server and interfaces commun

are available an

ad at predefined i SIMATIC

User Field 1 mation requireriable name)

User F mation required tode number) mation requir

. se when you se

4. iguring historical da

4. guring a point to be archived Tip

Detailed information about how compression is performed can be found in the SIMATIC IT Plant Data Archive and SIMATIC IT Historian Data Display documentation

3.10 Conf ta

3.10.1 Confi

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 194

Tag Management

In order to enter Plant Data Archive parameters:

1. Click the PDA tab in the Add Points dialog box. A dialog box displaying the Plant Data

2.

Parameter

Archive fields appears.

Check the Present box and configure the following Plant Data Archive attributes:

DescriptionMinimum VMaximum ValuClass Select the interval for the point data sampling.

See paragraph "Sampling classes". Type of the available types.

Eng. Unit External Compression Parameters requested for external compression calculation.

Internal Compression Parameters requested for internal compression calculation. ternal Compression parameters".

k the OK button to add the new parameters to the database.

To displ nfigured, select the PDA

s are inserted in the database when you select command File > Save

alue Minimum value the point may assume. e Maximum value the point may assume.

Select one See paragraph "Point types to be selected". Measurement unit of the archived point.

See paragraph "External Compression parameters".

See paragraph "In

3. Clic

ay the database fields relating to the attributes of the points cotab.

. The point

4.3.11 onfiguring graphic panels

d

he static attributes are only for graphic purposes, whereas the dynamic attributes allow you to iew the real-time dynamic trend of the individual Plant items. By defining these attributes, it is ossible to move an object in all directions, show or hide it, change the fill, border and text color,

to a bargraph. For example, of the contained liquid. You can

roup more elementary items and handle them as a single object.

Tip For more information on dynamic attributes, see the SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface documentation

Some parameters, such as threshold colors, min. and max. values, which are standard and r .

C

4.3.11.1 Graphic object attributes

Each graphic object has a set of attributes such as border color, fill color, position, visibility anso on.

The attributes can be dynamic or static, depending on whether or not one or more points are associated with them.

Tvpassign a blinking color, zoom in or out, or turn an enclosed area inyou can use a circle to represent a container and view the level also g

often the same for all objects, can be configured directly from the Database Edito

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 195

Tag Management

4.3.11.2

1. Points dialog box is

. At this point, you must assign a real name and a symbolic name to the point you are

Configuring graphic object parameters

To enter GUI parameters:

Operating in the Database Editor, select Edit > Point > Add. The Add displayed.

2

inserting: clicking the button next to Real Name calls up the Register Definition dialog box.

3. Make your selections for what concerns Register and Type according to your needs, anclick OK: this returns you to the Add Points dialog box. Depending on the selections ou

d y

made, a real name (consisting in specific initials and a consecutive number) is assigned to

4. Operating in the Add Points dialog box, assign the point with a symbolic name (Symbolic

dialog box, and check the Present box:

Area Nam

the point in question.

Name), and click OK.

5. Now click the GUI tab in the Add Points

- If you are entering the parameters of a logic variable, the Digital area is enabled;

- If you are entering the parameters of an integer or real variable, the Analog area is enabled.

The fields to be completed for these areas are described in the table below:

e Fields

Digital • True: enter the full or partial string to be displayed when the point

False: enter the full or partial string to be displayed when the point

Analogic • Minimum Value and Maximum Value • Delta: Percentage by which the point’s increase or decrease may

nd

:

• a logic variable, see Parameters of a logic variable.

• a slider, see Parameters for a slider.

Chart, see Parameters for a Trend or a Chart.

hat you have just configured will be used by the graphic objects,

4.3.11.3 arameters used by graphic objects

Graphic o

has status TRUE •

has status FALSE • Threshold values for HH, H, L, LL

vary (with respect to the range) • Trace Color: color to be used to display the point when in a Tre

or Chart graphic object.

To continue entering parameters for

• an integer or real variable, see Parameters of an integer or real variable.

• a Trend or a

To see how the parameters tsee Parameters used by graphic objects.

P

bject Parameter

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 196

Tag Management

Bargraph Minimum Value Maximum Value

Zoom Minimum Value Maximum Value

Position Minimum

Alphanume Maximum Value True (string) False (string)

Trend

Chart Minimum Maximum Value Trace color

Slider aximum Value

Line color (False (color) True (color) False (color)

Text color

4.3.11.4 arameters of a logic variable

I tab of the Add Points dialog box, to enter additional parameters for a

oint ON status; the Color dialog box

.

er g to be displayed when the point is in the OFF status in place of the Off default

3. i

4. of the points you have just configured,

Th e actually inserted in the database when you select command File > Save

Value Maximum Value

ric Minimum Value

Alphanumeric (digital)

Minimum Value Maximum Value Trace color

Value

Minimum Value MDelta

digital) True (color)

Fill color (digital)

(digital) True (color) False (color)

P

Operating in the GUlogic variable:

1. Click the True color box to assign a color to the pappears. In run-time, the selected color will show when the point is in the ON status. Enter the string to be displayed when the point is in the ON status in place of the On default string

2. Click the False color box to assign a color to the point OFF status; the Color dialog box appears. In run-time, the selected color will show when the point is in the OFF status. Entthe strinstring.

Cl ck the OK button.

To see the database fields relating to the attributes select the GUI tab at the bottom of the Database Editor window to view the GUI table.

e points ar .

4.3.11.5 Parameters for a slider

of the Add Points dialog box, to enter additional parameters for a

se or decrease may vary

Operating in the GUI tabslider:

1. In the Delta box, define the percentage by which the point increawith respect to the range (Minimum Value and Maximum Value).

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 197

Tag Management

2. Click the OK button.

database fields relating to the attributes of the points you have just configured, select b at the bottom of the Database Editor window to view the GUI table.

ally inserted in the database when you select command File > Save

To see thethe GUI ta

. The points are actu

4.3.11.6

eters for an

. In the HH, H, L, LL boxes, enter a numeric constant to define the reference thresholds.

r that you want to assign.

ImportanYou must ass in total, as the first box starting from the bottom contains the ssociated with the point values that are below the first threshold.

To see the database fields relating to the attributes of the points you have just configured, select th at the bottom of the Database Editor window to view the GUI table.

T

Parameters of an integer or real variable

Operating in the GUI tab of the Add Points dialog box, to enter additional paraminteger or real variable:

1

2. For each threshold, click the box next to it to define the colo

t ign five colors

color a

3. Click the OK button.

e GUI tab

he points are inserted in the database when you select command File > Save .

4.3.11.7 P

Operating in the meters for a T

. Double click the Trace color box and choose the color that has to be used for the line that illustrates the point’s trend or that represents the element in the chart.

ase fields relating to the attributes of the points you have just configured, select the GUI tab at the bottom of the Database Editor window to view the GUI table.

T > Save

arameters for a Trend or a Chart

GUI tab of the Add Points dialog box, to enter additional pararend or a Chart:

1

2. Click the OK button.

To see the datab

. he points are actually inserted in the database when you select command File

4. R

4.3.12.1 R

ou should recreate the index files periodically, in order to compress the database or to solve problems such as the wrong sort order of the points in the database grid.

This operation is strongly recommended if the elements of an array are displayed in the wrong order, e.g. element 0 of the array (code E) appears in the list before the header array (code V).

3.12 epairing the database

ecreating the database indexes

Y

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 198

Tag Management

This operation can be executed only after you have saved all the changes applied to the database.

d T

4.3.12.2 ase

To rebuild the database, index files and the files relating to the acquisition status of servers, c Tools > Rebuild > Database.

and, because all u

4.3.12.3

DS servers, select command Tools > Reset Servers Status.

4.3.13

4.3.13.1 Printing the database

in the Points Management and in the Arrays Management environments.

Points

• all databas

block of s

• all marked

In the Arrays

• the descrip

• the descrip window

4. e

port in order to see it as it will look when printed. Select command File > Print Preview to display a report page. Using the standard Windows buttons you can display

r print the report.

ose button.

ct command File > Print Setup in Database Editor.

he Layout tab yo e of the configured printers from the Printer list box. If you choose the Default be sent to the printer configured by default from Windows Print

To recreate indexes choose comman ools > Rebuild > Index Files.

Rebuilding the datab

sele t command

Important It is strongly recomminformation abo

end that you are careful before selecting this commt the current acquisition status of servers will be lost.

Resetting the server status

To reset the acquisition file of the Alarm Manager/Plant Data Archive/RT

Printing

Printing facilities are provided both

In the Management environment, you can send to printer or file:

e points

• a elected points

points

Management environment, you can only print:

tors of all the arrays displayed in the window

tors and the elements of all the arrays displayed in the

3.13.2 Print previ w

You can preview a re

two report pages, view the previous or the next page o

To quit the Preview window, click the Cl

4.3.13.3 Selecting a printer

A database can be printed to any printer configured in the network. Sele

In t u can choose onPrinter option, the output willManager.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 199

Tag Management

4.3.13.4 Printing records

nag ct command File > Print. oma ter you have selected with command File > Print

etup.

with command File > Print to File.

4.3.13.5 rinting to file

oints Management or Arrays Management windows select command File > Print to

y default in the \plant Browse

. Choose the write option:

- Append: to add the output at the end of the file

ed file.

4.3.13.6

footer, orientation,…) can be defined with command s Management.

the report: you can either select predefined

ng predefined fields are available (<EMPTY> mean rted):

•

• E

PAGE NUMBER

s can be defined:

• footer

In the Points MaThe report is aut

ement or Arrays M nagement windows seleatically sent to the prin

S

You can also write the output to a file

P

To print the contents of the current database to file:

1. In the PFile.

2. Enter the name of the file in the File Name box. The file is stored bname\DATABASE directory, but you can choose a different path by clicking the button.

3

- Overwrite: to overwrite the contents of the file

4. Click the Settings button to configure the print settings. For more information, see Print settings.

5. Click OK to send the output to the select

Print settings

Settings of the page to be printed (header, File > Print Setup in Points Management or Array

Headers and footers are printed on each page offields or enter any text.

s that no text is inseThe followi

• DATE

• TIME

DATE + TIME

DATABASE NAM

• LOCREG NAME

•

• FREE TEXT (the Free Text edit box is enabled and you can insert any text)

The following print attribute

• header

• page layout

• filter

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 200

Tag Management

4.3.13.7 Defining the header

Select command File > Print Setup in Database Editor. In the Print Settings dialog box

Select

click the Header tab.

To defineLeft

Center ill be printed at the center of the header. Default is the string

Right T which will be printed on the right side of the header. Default is the LOCREG N se any predefined field from the Right Item list box.

4.3.13.8

The text which will be printed on the left side of the header. Default is the DATABASE NAME but you can choose any predefined field from the Left Item list box. The text which w"Database Editor" (FREE TEXT), but you can choose any predefined field from the Central Item list box.

he text AME, but you can choo

Defining the footer

Select command File > Print Setup in Database Editor. In the Print Settings dialog box

Select

click the Footer tab.

To define

Left T of the footer. Default is <EMPTY> but yo box.

Center The text which will be printed at the center of the footer. Default is the PAGE

Right The text which will be printed on the right side of the footer. Default is <EMPTY>, but ned field from the Right Item list box.

4.3.13.9

he text which will be printed on the left sideu can choose any predefined field from the Left Item list

NUMBER, but you can choose any predefined field from the Central Item list box.

you can choose any predefi

Defining the page layout

Select command File > Print Setup in Database Editor. In the Print Settings dialog box click the Layout tab.

Enter the following data:

Parameter DescriptionPrinter Extended Format V rmat Pri at they can be viewed as a table. Orientation Clic

o check if the view format you have selected fits the page to be printed, click the Test Width e view is too

large and ove age bord change the page layout.

4.3.13.10 Defining the filter

To define the filter for printout:

1. Select command File > Print Setup

Select a printer from those configured. Check the boxes corresponding to the tables you want to print.

iew Fo nts fields so thk the Portrait or Landscape button to choose the page orientation.

Tbutton. The Database Editor shows a message about the results obtained. If th

rrides the p ers, you can

in Database Editor. In the Print Settings dialog box click the Filter tab.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 201

Tag Management

2. Choose the following options:

rParamete Description

Extract Points

assigned. Check the configurations (AM, PDA, GUI, RTDS) you want to export within the Filter Points by Configuration area. These check boxes

export all rations.

Show Arra .

4.3.14.1

y he main window.

h

You can choose whether to print all the points in the database, only the points you have selected or the points to which a bookmark has been

Filter Points by Configuration

determine the subset of records which will be exported, as follows: Selected: the program will only export those records which contain these configurations. Unselected: the program will only export those records which DO NOT contain these configurations. Undetermined (selected but shadowed): the program will records, whether or not they contain these configuBy default all records are printed.

ys Elements Check this box if you want to print all the elements of each array

3. Click OK to quit.

4.3.14 Customizing the environment

Showing/hiding bars

B default the Editor Database shows all the bars in t

To show/ ide Select commandToolbar View > Toolbars > Standard Edit bar Search bar Database Information

4.3.14.2 Customizing the scroll bars

n ll bar.

With the defa the scroll box on the vertical bar, the status bar isplays:

boxes in

Informations area:

Show Line Number on vertical scroll

View > Toolbars > Edit View > Toolbars > Search View > Point Viewer in Arrays Management

on the Database View > Database Info

The Poi ts Management window contains a horizontal and a vertical scro

ult settings, when you drag d

• the current line number

• the real name of the point, if the database is sorted by real name

• the symbolic name of the point, if the database is sorted by symbolic name

By default no information is shown when you scroll the horizontal bar.

With command Tools > Settings > Workspace tab you can change the information which isdisplayed while scrolling the vertical and the horizontal bar, by checking the following the Scrollbar

•

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 202

Tag Management

• Show Field Identifier on vertical scroll

• Show Line Name on horizontal scroll

Arranging windows in the client area 4.3.14.3

reg

However the following limitations apply:

not ent windows concurrent the Points Management windows at the same t

you cannot open two Points Management or Arrays Management windows at the same time (i.e. you cannot edit two databases at a time).

displayed in the client area when you ccess the Database Editor, use command Tools > Settings > Workspace tab > Keep Size

check box.

s maximize the windows displayed in the client area use command Tools > Settings > box.

4.3.14.4

The type and nagement and Arrays ont tab.

e standard Microssize. The selected fo ints Management, Arrays Management

4.3.14.5 Changing colors

base Editor show the status of points in the database grid.

o change the default colours assigned by the system, use command Tools > Settings > Color

the Color tab choose one of the following items from the Category list box:

READ-ONLY TEXT

• LOCKED TEXT

TEXT

BOOKMARK

• ERROR MESSAGE TEXT

• ERROR M

All windows in the client area (either in the Points Management, Arrays Management or LocMap environments) can be maximized, minimized and arranged according to Microsoft Windows standards. To do this use the commands from the Window menu.

• you can display the Points Management and the Arrays Managemly (but you can display the Locreg Map and ime).

•

To restore the default position and size of the windowsaand Position

To alwayWorkspace tab > Maximize Windows on Open check

Changing the font

size of the font used to display data in the Points MaManagement windows can be changed with command Tools > Settings > F

Th oft Windows dialog box appears and you can choose the font type and nt is applied to all the Database Editor windows (Po and Locreg Map).

The Data uses various colours to

Ttab. For more information on default colours, see Typographical conventions used in thedatabase grid.

In

• TEXT

•

• LOCKED AND READ-ONLY

•

• INFO MESSAGE TEXT

• INFO MESSAGE BACKGROUND

ESSAGE BACKGROUND

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 203

Tag Management

Then click a c our to the selected items.

mizin

o customize a view:

gement dialog box.

the Views list box select the view you want to customize, either a DB Table view or a User view.

ou want to move.

5. Click the Up/Down

olour icon in the palette to assign a different col

4.3.14.6 Custo g a view

T

1. Select command Tools > Views Management in the Database Editor.

2. Click the Customize Views tab in the Views Mana

3. In

4. In the Fields list box select the field y

buttons to move the field respectively up or down

6. You can also change the following settings by entering new values in the relative fields:

Field

in the list.

Description

Name Field Le

utton allows you to exit the dialog box.

4.3.15.1 nual database creation

AutomaticUpon definition of a new Unit, you are prompted to associate a database and/or project name to

n be selected from a list of existing names.

mpted to enter a number of parameters required to create the database, when you access the Database Editor or start the programming

rameters differ according to the Unit type:

Manual creYou can also create a new database independently of the definition of a Unit; in detail, you can:

Database Editor

Label which will be displayed in the column header of the database table. ngth Width (in number of characters) of the column where the field is displayed.

7. Click the Apply button. The Close b

4.3.15 Creating a Database

Automatic vs. ma

To create a database you can carry out either an automatic, or a manual procedure.

creation

the Unit. The database/project can be new, or ca

If the database/project does not exist, you will be pro

environment. These pa

• Creating a database associated with a RTDS/IMC Unit

• Creating a database associated with a Real Time Data Engine Unit

• Creating a database associated with a CONTROL Unit

ation

• Create a database from

• Create a database from Database Management

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 204

Tag Management

4.3.15 Creating a database associated w.2 ith an RTDS/IMC Unit

nt SIMATIC IT Management Console will display the New database dialog box with

Select

Upon definition of a new RTDS/IMC Unit, you are prompted to enter a variables database/project name and a locreg name to be assigned to this Unit.

If the database/project does not exist, when you access the DB Editor or the programming environmethe following request: The database does not exist, do you want to create it?

To

Bilingual Co ent (Secondary Language) field to the database. This insert an additional comment in a language other than

Unicode

By both the name

ne signed to the database, provided that the selected locreg is compatible with reg. If this is not the case, some Points might be removed from the database.

.3 ciated with a Real Time Data Engine Unit

sociates a default user locreg. This locreg can be configured only from the SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Engine Manager

4.3.15.4

the database/project does not exist, when you access the DB Editor or the programming ment, SIMATIC IT Management Console will display the New database dialog box with

Select

mment Add the Commfield is used to that used in the Primary Comment. Option not implemented

confirming this request, a new database is created, and is assigned withentered and the locreg selected during Unit definition. In the Editor Database, you can choose a

w locreg to be asthe current loc

4.3.15 Creating a database asso

Upon definition of a new Real Time Data Engine Unit, the program automatically creates an empty database with the same name as the Unit and as

environment.

Creating a database associated with a CONTROL Unit

Upon definition of a new CONTROL Unit (which logically represents an Siemens Orsi P.M.C.),you are prompted to enter a variables database/project name and a locreg name to be assigned to this Unit.

Ifenvironthe following request: The database does not exist, do you want to create it?

To

Bilingual Com ent Add the Comment (Secondary Language) field to the database. This field is used to insert an additional comment in a language

Unicode

y confirming this request, the program creates a new database, and assigns to it both the ame entered and the locreg selected during Unit definition. In the Editor Database you can

4.3.15.5 Creating a database from Database Editor

1. Start the Database Editor (For more information, see Starting the Database Editor.), and then select command File > New to create a new database.

m

other than that used in the Primary Comment. Option not implemented

Bnchoose a new locreg to be assigned to the database.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 205

Tag Management

2. The New database dialog box appears. Enter the following information:

Parameter DescriptionNam Identifier to be assigned to the database. Alp

string maximum 8 characters. e hanumeric

Locreg Bilingua

uage)" is added to the database. Unicode ot implemented

a new database by importing a file in .CSV format. For more g/exporting a database.

4.3.16

e Database Management environment select command File >

ew

Select the name of a system locreg or user locreg. l Comment If you select this check box, field "Comment (Secondary

Lang Option n

Note You can also createinformation, see Importin

Data Memory Area

Creating a new database

To create a new database in th

N . In the Create dialog box enter the following data:

Parameter

DescriptionName r to be assigned to the database. Alphanumeric string

up to 8 characters. Locreg Select the name of a system locreg or user locreg Bilingual Comment If you check this box, field "Comment (Secondary Language)" is

en

Identifie

added to the database.

When the database has been created you can select command File >Op to access the

4.4 Locreg anagement

4.4.1 e and displaying the Locreg

create a new database, a specific locreg is assigned to each database. See also locreg details.

open an existing database, SIMATIC IT Management Console uses the locreg Unit. Therefore, if the database locreg and the Unit locreg are not

e program issues an error message and displays the locreg structures and the ber of registers used in the database, for each type. For more information, see

o g for different locregs.

Database Editor and insert variables.

m

D fining

When youDatabase

However, if youassociated with the currentthe same, thmaximum numTr ubleshootin

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 206

Tag Management

4.4.2 atabase Locreg - Details

g is stored in reserved points of the database, which cannot be

number

Reading this data the program can check the compatibility between the locreg associated with the database and the Unit locreg.

Troubleshoo

Locregs not compatible If the database c ith the Unit, the locregs are not compatib ose to automatically remove the exce mits only partly, it will be truncated but

r No m will check for locreg compatibility eac t sue the error message

Locregs different but compIf all the databas d and then the locreg

cally replaced, since the locregs are compatible.

locreg run-time

You can change the locreg associated with the current database during an editing session. To

pened with command File > Open, that is, it must not be currently associated to any Unit.

The loc ose will be checked for compatibility against the current database locreg and e m ifferent locregs.

To chan

1. Cho reg Selection dialo

2. To a l the User or Sys ox.

3. Sele g map appear in the

4. Clic

5 Viewi

The loc Unit, subdivided by regis

D

Information concerning the locreviewed by the user.

This information describes the point structure and, for each register type, the higher used in the database.

4.4.3 ting for different locregs

ontains registers not defined in the locreg associated wle and therefore an error message is issued. You can choeding registers (please note that if an array exceeds the li the array will not be removed).

If you answe , the points will not be deleted, but the prograime you open the database, and thus re-ish

atible e points fit in the new locreg, a warning message is issue

is automati

4.4.4 Assigning a new

perform this operation you must first save the database. Please note that the database must have been o

reg you chosom essages are returned. For more information, see Troubleshooting for d

ge the locreg:

ose command Tools > Change Locreg in Points Management; the Locg box lists all the system locregs and user locregs .

ssign a new locreg to the database click the User or System buttons: altem locregs, respectively, are listed in the Available Locregs b

ct a locreg in the list box: the current locreg map and the selected locredialog box.

k OK.

4.4. ng the locreg map

reg map shows in a graphical format the memory area handled by theter type, and the currently allocated registers.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 207

Tag Management

Choose command File > Locreg Map in Points Management to view the locreg map

he nu r of free registers (shown in teal)

pe from the Register Type list box.

g up the button line of the ll the

mber of allo e registers for

reg with command Tools > Automatic Refresh. In the omatic Refresh dialog box check the Enable Automatic Refresh box and then enter the

umber of seconds in the range between 5 and 3600 in the Time Rate box.

ement

window.

The Map Bar displays the register type, and, for that type, the total number of registers, tmber of registers allocated (shown in red) and the numbe

To view the register map for a different register type, select the ty

The Locreg Summary window (which you can display by dragginwindow and can hide with command View > Locreg Summary) shows the number of aregisters configured for the current locreg, and the nu cated and freeach type.

You can refresh the locreg map manually by pressing the F5 button. You can also configure the automatic refreshing of the locAutn

or Arrays Management Select commands Points Manag from the menu File

4.5 Database Management Tool

Overview ab

The Database M f tools that help you maintain the databases of all ronment, you can perform the following ope

• Create a new

• Open a datab

• Rename a da

• Browse the d

Copy a database

• Delete a database

Import/export a database

ment select the Tools > Database Management

to return to the Points or Arrays Management windows, respectively.

4.5.1 out Points Database Maintenance

anagement environment provides a set o the Units configured in the current Plant. In this envirations:

database

ase

tabase

atabase

•

• Convert a database

• Merge databases

• Reallocate registers

•

To start the Database Management environ

command in SIMATIC IT Management Console: the main window lists all the databases defined in the current Plant.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 208

Tag Management

4.5.2 he Database Management environment

• ses configured in the current Plant.

Output Window, is used to display performance results or error messages.

nt

Management window displays the following attributes:

Name

• Type

Locreg

mand Window > Refresh

T

The Database Management window has two areas:

the upper area lists all the databa

• the bottom area, also called

Select the folders on the bottom of the Output window to see information relating to the differeoperations.

For each database, the Database

•

• Size

• LastSaved

•

• Bilingual

• Auxiliary Files

. To re-create the list of the Unit databases select com

4.5.3 Database ttributes

ttributes and their meaning:

Attribute

a

The following table summarizes the various database a

Description

Name Type Size expressed in byte. LastSaved Locreg Name of the locreg assigned to the database. For details, see

Bilingual Yescomments have been inserted when creating the database.

t only primary language comments are available. e Structure of the Points Database .

Auxiliary Files

ints acquired by the run-time update.

tically generated when you access the database from the Database Editor environment.

Database name For details, see Field: Type. Database dimension Date and time when the database was last saved.

Data Memory Area. means that both primary and secondary language

No means thaFor details, seAuxiliary files include: • Two INDEX files with IDR and IDS extension. • A FRR file used to handle free registers/bits. • An ACQ file used to list the po

SIMATIC IT servers upon These files are automa

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 209

Tag Management

4.5.4 Field: Type

The database can be of different type. Depending on the database type the following labedisplayed:

ls are

Label

Description[#] or empty field

command File > Details to list all the Unit names. If the field is empty, the ny Unit. in Database Management, if the target

Export from which it has been exported.

.CSV

DE DE bck ckup copy of a points database associated with a Real Time Data Engine

Old Obsolete files – version 2.03.xx (they are displayed with command Options >Show Obsolete)

Old - DE

4.5.5 Viewing the Database details

> Details in the Database Management window to display the Details dialog box which contains the following information:

the workstation on which the database is being edited and the Database Editor).

4.5.6

To open one of the databases listed in the Database Management window, select the

se and then select the command File > Open

Points database with .CDB extension. The Type field contains the number (in brackets) of the Units to which the database is associated. You can select

database has not been associated to aBackup File generated with a Merge command

file name already exists and the option Automatic Backup has been selected. You can restore the database selecting the command Database > Restore. File created with an Export command in the Database Editor. This file contains a block of records of the database Standard text file, generated by external Windows applications such as Excel, Access, etc. This file can be converted and imported to be opened as a standard database. Points database associated with a Real Time Data Engine Unit. BaUnit.

Obsolete Real Time Data Engine files – version 2.03.xx (they are displayed with command Options > Show Obsolete)

Select command File

• the computer name of application used to edit it (e.g.

• the name of the Units with which the database is associated.

Opening a database (Database Management)

databa .

you select a .CDB, .XDB or DE database, the Database Editor is started, whereas if you ct a . ditor is started.

You cann anagement if the file is already open in Database Editor or if it is a backup file.

4.5.7 Databa

The follo se Manager

Ifsele CSV database, the Text E

ot open a database from Database M

se-file types

wing table summarizes the various types of database files managed by Databa:

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 210

Tag Management

Type or extension Description.CDB .CSV

an be converted and imported to be

Export e generated with an Export command in the Database a block of records of the source

DE IT database associated with a Real

Backup on ption

4.5.8 Renam

DE datab med because they are automatically assigned the name of the Real Tim

o rename a database:

database name from the list.

mand File > Rename.

the new database name in the To DB box.

.

s the auxiliary files (.FRR, .IDR, .IDS, .ACQ), if they exist.

4.5.9 rowsing the database

Standard SIMATIC IT database. Standard text file, generated by external Windows applications (such as Excel, Access, ...) or through conversion. This file copened as a standard SIMATIC IT database. FilEditor, which contains database. Standard SIMATIC Time Data Engine Unit. File generated with a Merge command, if the destinatifile already exists and you have checked oAutomatic Backup.

ing a database

ases cannot be renae Data Engine Unit.

T

1. Select the

2. Select com

3. Enter

4. Click OK

The program also rename

B

To view all the points defined in a database select command Database > Browse in Database Management. The Database Browser tool provides a number of filters to view the oints according to your needs.

not be selected for Backup, Export and CSV files or for databases les.

p

The Database > Browse canwhich do not have auxiliary fi

se

atabase name from the list.

4.5.10 Copying a databa

You can copy a database to a new or to an existing database, thus overwriting the latter.

To copy a database:

1. Select the d

2. Select command File > Copy .

3. Enter the new database name in the To DB box

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 211

Tag Management

or select the To DE Unit button to overwrite the database associated to the DE Unit selected.

m also performs the following operations:

auxiliary files (.FRR, .IDR, .IDS, .ACQ), if they exist.

s the auxiliary files, if you overwrite a database which does not have these files.

the auxiliary files, if you overwrite a database which does have these files, whereas the source database does not.

a DE database is copied to another DE database or to a .CDB

Select command File > Delete

4. Click OK.

The progra

• copies the

• create

• removes

• copies the user locreg, ifdatabase.

• copies the user locreg, if a .CDB database is copied to a DE database

4.5.11 Removing a database

in Database Management to remove the selected whole database or only the auxiliary files (Auxiliary Files Only

choose to remove:

• Acquisition file (ACQ extension)

4.5.12

Selec abase > Packed reallocation in Database Management to sort the selec rform the following additional operations:

• Pa

• Re ing registers in order to optimize their use (e.g. records RI rmed into RI0 REC1 and RI1 REC2)

4.5.13 Impo

o import a database select command File > Import in Database Management.

local

n LCG)

t, you can choose that the database is copied to drive a: or can be exported with its auxiliary files and with the user locreg associated with

e database, provided that the corresponding boxes (Auxiliary Files and User Locreg). have

database. You can remove thecheck box). In this case you can

• Index files (FRR, IDR, IDS extensions)

Reallocating registers

t command Datbase, and peted data

ck the records

move unused spaces by renam0 REC1 and RI5 REC2 would be transfo

rting/exporting a database

T

In the Database to be Imported dialog box select the database to be imported, from anyor remote Plant, or from a floppy disk:

• SIMATIC IT Database (with extension CDB or RDB). The locreg associated with the database is automatically imported.

• SIMATIC IT Export Database (with extension XDB), Comma delimited file (with extension CSV)

• Locreg file (with extensio

By selecting command File > Exporb:. The database thbeen checked.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 212

Tag Management

4.5.14 Conversion

4.

ndard text ternal applications such as Excel, A

h a in a database that can mu , see Converting a .CSV file

IC IT database (

CSV file layout:

ord>;<locname>

e_PDB or

g to the same

ble). Second line The heading order can be different from the default one, provided that: for the

Main table, field Type always precedes field DefaultValue; for the other

ill be prompted to

Fields (not all must necessarily be present) are not case sensitive. Main Header: Symb Level;DefaultVaRTDS

ymbAM TaSymbolic ivable;Printable;Loadmode;Activeconf;Alert;Comment; Logic;Addmsg;Message1;Message2;Graphpage PDA Table Record Header: Symbolic;Description;Min;Max;Servers;Deltaext;Tminext;Tmaxext;Deltaint;T

a3_Onna4_On;Ana5_On;Ana1_Off;Ana2_Off;Ana3_OffOff; hrll;Color;Delta;String_On;String_Off

Third line andsubsequent lines

Symbolic

• Register

5.14.1 Creating a CSV file

A .CSV file is a sta file containing a list of variables, generated by exccess, etc.

This file must be edited witbe used by SIMATIC IT, it

n appropriate syntax and, in order to obtast be converted. For more information

into a SIMAT .CDB).

First line It has the following format:

<table identifier>;<keywwhere <table identifier> = Cube_MAIN, Cube_RTDB, Cube_ADB, CubCube_GMS <keyword> = keyword used to quickly select the csv files relatindatabase (optional) <locname> = the locreg name (optional) (only for the Main ta

tables, Symbolic and Description are always the first two fields (this to maintain the link with the Main table). The conversion program only checks whether the Min and Max fields of the PDA and GUI tables have the same values. If not, the user wchoose the value to be assigned to both tables.

Table Record olic;Description;Type;Register;Comment1;Comment2;Settinglue Table Record Header: olic;Description;Interface;Class;Safevalue;User1;User2;User3 ble Record Header:

;Description;Interface;Servers;Priority;Arch

S

minint;Tmaxint;Engunit;Class; Activeconf;Type GUI Table Record Header: Symbolic;Description;Min;Max;Dig1_On;Dig2_On;Dig1_Off;Dig2_Off; Ana1_On;Ana2_On;An;Ana4_Off;Ana5_Thrhh;Thrh;Thrl;T

all Values of record fields, separated by the ; (or other) symbol.

Keywords:

•

• Type

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 213

Tag Management

• Comment1

• Comment2

• Description

For a detailed description of the keywords available for the other database tables, see Structure f the Points Database.

4.5.14.2 Keyword: Symbolic

Symbolic identif acters. This field ory.

4.5.14.3 Keyword:Type

):

= float (real)

C = character

e type. If this data is omitted, type P ermanent) is assumed by default.

R = not permanent

A = alarm

B = backup

O = output

4.5.14.4 Keyword: Register

iable is to be associated. This field is optional. If no register is pecified, the program will automatically allocate a new register. But if you indicate a register

ed in the SIMATIC IT database.

4.5.14.5

irst comment of the variable. String up to 40 characters. Optional.

4.5.14.6

4.5.14.7

Letter which indicates the type of variable:

Identifier

o

ier of the database variable. Alphanumeric string up to 15 charis mandat

Variable type. Allowed values (can be entered both with uppercase and lowercase letters

I = integer

B = boolean (logical)

F

This field is mandatory. It can be omitted only for array elements.

The register type can be indicated next to the variabl(P

P or blank = permanent

I = input

Register to which the varsnumber, the record will be lock

Keyword: Comment1

F

Keyword: Comment2

Second comment of the variable. String up to 40 characters. Optional. If the database ismonolingual this field must not be used.

Keyword: Description

Description

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 214

Tag Management

empty scalar Vn Ei Bx position of the bit within the integer variable BxEi position of the bit within the i-th integer element of an array I y IEi

cified only when one or more fields (e.g. efault array values.

Lin mediately after the line descriimmediately ele e

4.5.14.8 Ex Importan

The first li

Example

iption;Comment1;SettingLevel

I0.[0];B;;COMMENT;1 Logic variable (not dynamically allocated) st begin

llocated) BOOL_IN_ARRAY;FI5.[7];B;;;1 Logic variable: eighth bit of integer variable FI5 (fifth

element of ARRAY) (not dynamically allocated): ALARM;;IA;;;1 Integer scalar alarm (dynamically allocated) INTEGER;;IP;;INTEGER COMMENT;1 Integer variable (dynamically allocated) BOOL_IN_SCAL;;;B5;;1 Logic variable allocated in bit 5 of INTEGER ARRAY_2;;IP;V10;;1 ents (dynamically allocated) BI Y_2;;;B6E4;;1

4.5.14.9 onverting a database

hen converting a database, you can perfom the following types of conversion:

conversion of a .CSV file into a SIMATIC IT database (.CDB);

conversion of the format of a SIMATIC IT database (.CDB).

ase (.CDB) into a .CSV file

abase > Save as CSV

array with dimension n element position within the array

integer which overlaps the logic arrainteger which overlaps the logic array starting from the i-th word

Records describing an 'element' need to be spesymbolic name, comment, etc.) differ from the d

es containing the description of array elements must be inserted imbing the array header. Lines containing the description of bits must be inserted

after the line describing the integer element. Field Type can be omitted for array m nts.

ample of CSV File

t ne must contain the field headings.

with Main table

Symbolic;Register;Type;Descr

BOOLEAN;FARRAY;FI1;I;V10;ARRAY COMMENT;1 Array of integers with 10 elements which mu

from FI1 (not dynamically a

Integer array of 10 elemT_IN_ARRA Logic variable allocated in bit 6 of element 4 of

ARRAY_2)

C

W

• conversion of a SIMATIC IT database (.CDB) into a .CSV file;

•

•

4.5.14.10 Converting a SIMATIC IT datab

1. Select command Dat in Database Management to convert a standard SIMATIC IT database (RDB extension) into a text file which can be edited with DOS or Windows applications (Excel, Access, …).

e following values: 2. In the CSV Format dialog box enter th

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 215

Tag Management

Parameter DescriptionLock Regi to be re-allocated during

Comment Highlight Check this box if comment fields (primary and/or secondary language)

3.

4. rator box a character (NOT alphanumeric) that will be used as a

5. ose the tables to be read from the database and converted in tion database.

OK button.

At the end of the conversion the CSV Destination File Names dialog box appears. Please note that only boxes relative to tabs available in the database are enabled. Insert the name

a name for a file where records skipped due to errors, are automatically inserted

4.5.14.11 Converting atabase (.CDB)

You can conver

sters Check this box if registers have NOTconversion

have to be placed at the beginning of each record (this option is useful,for instance, for translating comments quickly)

Type a string, which will be used to quickly search for the .CSV files generated by this conversion, in the Keyword box. The default string is the database name.

Enter in the Comma Sepaseparator between the different record fields.

Select the Tables button to chothe destina

the 6. Click

7.

of relative tabs.

8. Click the OK button.

If errors are found, at the end of the conversion, the program asks for

the format of a SIMATIC IT d

t a SIMATIC IT database (CDB type) into another SIMATIC IT ith a different format, that is:

database (.CDB extension) but w

with/without bilingual comment

Locreg box)

. Select Database > Convert in Database Management and enter the following parameter:

•

• with a different locreg (

1

Parameter DescriptionPack Check this box if registers have to be re-allocated during conversion Bilingual Comment Check this box if you want the format with bilingual comment

drop down list box select the locreg to associate to the new database.

ose the tables to be read from the database and converted in

ImportantIf you want abort the operation select the Abort button in the Working progress dialog or s Stop Conversion.

at

2. In the Locreg

3. Select the Tables button to chothe destination database.

4. Click the OK button.

elect the command Database >

5. At the end of the conversion the Destin ion dialog box appears.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 216

Tag Management

Select ToName Enter the Identifier of the target database

To overwrite the database associated to the Real Time Data Engine Unit selected. If y button, you can only choose the

et by the

If errors are found, at the end of the conversion, the program asks for a name for a file where records skipped ) are automatically inserted

4.5.14.12 Converting a

ou can convert a CSV file, previously imported, into a CDB

To DE Unit ou click this

Bilingual Comment option, if required. All other options are sprogram.

6. Click the OK button.

due to errors (which are not notified

.CSV file into a SIMATIC IT database (.CDB)

Y or DE type database. For s file types, see Database-file types.

his particular type of conversion can either include the Main tab, thus generating a new atabase that contains all the records extracted from it, or exclude the Main tab (in this case,

4.5.14.13 Conversion with Main tab

database, which will contain all the records extracted

o perform conversion with Main tab:

and Database > Convert

information on the variou

Tdthe tabs to be converted are inserted into an existing reference database).

If you convert with the Main tab, a new from the Main tab, is generated.

T

1. Select a CSV file from the Database Management window.

. 2. Select comm

3. The Convert CSV File dialog box appears.

Enter the .CSV files to be converted in one of the following ways:

elect them from the list and click the arrow button to move them to the Main, RTDS, AM,

election Based On)

st box, select the locreg to be associated to the new database.

ring conversion

6. Check Bilingual Comment box if the new database must include/contain the "Comment (Secondary Language)" field

ImportanIf you wan ct the Abort button in the Working progress dialog or select the command Database > Stop Conversion.

8. At the end of the conversion the Destination dialog box appears:

- Type their names in the Main, RTDS, AM, PDA, GUI edit boxes, respectively.

- SPDA, GUI edit boxes, respectively..

- Perform a guided search by using a keyword (button Automatic S

4. In the Locreg drop down li

5. Check Pack box if registers have to be re-allocated du

7. Click the OK button.

t t abort the operation sele

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 217

Tag Management

Select ToName Enter the f the target database To DE Unit To overwrite the database associated to the Real Time Data Engine

Unit selected. If you click this button, you can only choose the Bilingual

9. Click OK.

ImportanYou can ssource tab

without Main tab

Name o

Comment option, if required. All other options are set by the program.

t ave records skipped due to errors in .CSV files that correspond to the .

4.5.14.14 Conversion

If you convert without the Main tab, the tabs to be converted are inserted into an existing reference database.

To perform conversion without Main tab:

1. Select a CSV file from the Database Management window.

2. Select command Database > Convert .

3. The Convert CSV File dialog box appears.

4. Enter the .CSV files to be converted in one of the following ways:

- Type their names in the RTDS, AM, PDA, GUI edit boxes, respectively.

arrow button to move them to the RTDS, AM, PDA,

- Perform a guided search b using a keyword (button Automatic Selection Based On)

5. Select the database into which you want to insert the tabs to be converted from the Data Name list b

6. Che Overwrite s box to overwrite the tabs that already exist in the reference database.

want abort th ration sele Abort button in the Working progress or select the command Datab se > Stop Conversion.

ination dialog box appears.

- Select them from the list and click theGUI edit boxes, respectively.

y

base ox.

ck the Table

7. Click OK.

Important If you e ope ct the dialog a

8. At the end of the conversion the Dest

Select ToName Enter the N of the target database

nit To overwri database associated to the Real Time Data Engine Unit selected. If you click this button, you can only choose the Bilingual Comment o tion, if required. All other options are set by the program.

9. Click the OK button.

ameTo DE U te the

p

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 218

Tag Management

t records skip

ImportanYou can save ped due to errors in .CSV files that correspond to the source tab

4.5.15.1

Yo e) calle ations,

2. Select

.

4.5.15 Merging

Merging databases

u can insert the contents of the selected database into another database (.CDB or DE typd "reference" database. This program also performs congruence checks and re-alloc

if required.

To perform a database merge:

1. Select the database you want to merge in Database Management.

command Database > Merge . The draft cursor appears.

3.

4. Double click on it or select the command Database > Start Merge.

ImportanIf you want abort the operation select the Abort button in the Working progress

or sel e command Database > Stop Merge.

. At the end of the conversion the Destination dialog box appears.

Select

Select with the draft cursor the destination database.

t

dialog ect th

5

To

Name Enter the Name of the target database Unit To overwrite the database associated to the Real Time Data Engine

Unit selected. If you click this button, you can only choose the Bilingual Comment option, if required. All other options are set by the program.

are found, at the end of th asks for a name for a file where records ski ue to errors (which are not notified) are a ically inserted

.2 Register ation

During the merge process, the program performs consistency checks and re-allocates some

e fields:

To DE

6. Click the OK button.

If errors e conversion, the programpped d utomat

4.5.15 Realloc

variables of the database, if required.

Consistency checks concern the following databas

• symbolic name;

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 219

Tag Management

• real name;

• attribute (scalar, array, array element, array size).

should

• Different symbolic name or attribute, but same real name

Same symity.

If the record to be imported is locked or the real name refers to an I/O register (II, OI), an error

Example

Database Fi

The following general rules will be applied in the event that conflicts between two records occur:

• Same symbolic name and attribute, different registers but with same type

• Same symbolic name

• Variable available only in the database to be imported

bolic name and attribute, different registers but with same type In this case the Reference Database takes prior

message is generated.

eld Reference DB DB to be Imported

Symbolic nReal name Attribute Scalar Scalar

Different s ttribute, but same real name he variable to be imported will be reallocated in a new register.

rd to be imported is locked or the real name refers to an I/O register (II, OI), an error messag enerated.

Same symbolic name must have exactly the same

ame: if either condition is not verified, an error message will be generated.

Variable av a variable of the Database to be Imported is not stored in the Reference Database and the

nd

Database. Please note that I/O (II, OI) registers are never reallocated.

4.5.15.3 Example

Variables in the Database to be Imported

ame Delta Delta RF100 RF108

In the Destination Database the DELTA variable will be associated with register RF100.

ymbolic name or aIn this case t

If the recoe is g

Arrays with the same symbolic name must match perfectly, that is, size and n

ailable only in the Database to be Imported Ifcorresponding register is not locked, the variable will be added to the Destination Database athe associated register will be reallocated. However, if the variable in the Database to be Imported is locked, reallocation cannot be carried out, and therefore the variable will be inserted into the Destination Database only if the corresponding register is not already used in the Reference

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 220

Tag Management

Symbolic Name Register Locked VL_RAA RI0 NO VL_RCC VL_RDD YES

RI1 YES PF1

Variables in the Reference Database

Symbolic Name Register Locked VL_RFF RI0 / VL_RKK RI1 /

Variables in the Destination Database

Symbolic Name Register Locked VL_RAA RI2 NO VL_RDD PF1 VL_RFF VL_RKK RI1

RDD is locked but can be added to the Destination Database since register PF1 is not used by any variable in the Reference Database.

4.5.15.4 Reallocation

d for register reallocation:

variable will be reallocated in a register of the same type as g from an offset which corresponds to the highest register

number occupied in the Reference database plus one. The record will not be locked.

(e.g. PI), the new record will be automatically allocated and

er name (e.g. PI41), the new record will be automatically created and

4. llocation the usual rules are applied, except in the case that the logical efined also as integer variable.

d to reallocate

4.5.15.5 Ex ister reallocation

e Database to be Imported:

VMASK RI40 V_ON

YESRI0 /

/

Variable VL_RCC cannot be added to the Destination Database since the corresponding register (RI1) is locked and is already used by another variable (VL_RKK) in the Reference Database.

Variable VL_

rules

The following rules will be applie

1. If not otherwise specified, anythe variable register, beginnin

2. If you specify the register typewill be locked.

3. If you specify the registlocked.

For logical variable avariable is associated to the bit of a register d

In this case the logical variable will be reallocated in the integer register usethe integer variable and the corresponding bit.

ample of reg

The following variables are defined in th

RI40.[5]

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 221

Tag Management

If all RI registers up to 999 are occupied in the Reference Database, reallocation will proceed aows:

s foll

VMASK V_ON RI1000.[5]

efined also in the Reference Database, conflicts might ster and the corresponding bits of the Reference

.

Reference Datab

RI1000

In the event that the integer variable is darise. In this case the integer variable regiDatabase are maintained

ase Database to be Imported

VMASK V_ON V_OFF

4.5.15.6

regs

The Locreg of the Database to be Imported is different from the Locreg of the Reference Database but the two Locregs are compatible (i.e. the Reference Database does not contains

Locregs are different and incompatible ts

of the range nce Database Locreg.

ce Database.

4.6 Database Browser

4.6.1 Overview

ap

e DATABASE es of all the variables

efined in the current database.

For each point, the following attributes are displayed:

RI500 VMASK RI460 RI500.[2] V_ON RI460.[2] RI500.[3] HI_LEV RI460.[3]

The HI_LEV variable is not inserted into the Database.

Congruence of the database Locregs

Before starting to merge the databases the program will verify the congruence of the Locassociated with the two Databases.

The following situations might occur:

Locregs are different but compatible

registers outside of the range of the locreg of the Database to be Imported).

The Database to be Imported contains variables associated to registers which exceed the limiof the Refere

In either case the program will issue a warning message and will associate the ReferenDatabase Locreg to the Destination

of the Database Browser

The Database Browser is a general-purpose tool, which can be started from any SIMATIC IT plication to quickly search for variables defined in the database of a specified Unit.

When you start the Database Browser from any SIMATIC IT environment thNAME: database name dialog box appears. This dialog box lists the nam(i.e. points) d

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 222

Tag Management

• Symbolic Name

• Register

• Type

detailed description

Ex

BOLIC NAME field rray elements

e listed (Display format: ormal).

4.6.2 electing a different Unit

ws the points defined in the database associated to the

er window, you can choose any other Unit defined base Browser will automatically display the points configured in the

datab

4.6.3 Find

ut more

Standard s

• Symbolic Name

Th rd search are usually displayed in Normal format.

criteria applied to the current search. These codes are displayed in y format is currently applied, in red if the Extended format has been

Advanced searches: • ent

•

• Searching by RTDS Fields

• Description

To display all the tables and fields of a point, click the Viewer button. For aof each table, see Structure of the Points Database.

To expand the array on which you are positioned and list all its elements, click the button pand. To restore the default view, click the button Collapse.

By default the database records are listed in ascending order by the SYM(Sorting order: Symbolic). All the scalar variables, the array headers and the awith Symbolic Name other than the corresponding array name arN

S

By default, the Database Browser shocurrent working Unit.

By clicking button Unit in the Database Browsin your Plant. The Data

ase associated with the Unit you have selected.

ing records

4.6.3.1 Finding Records

All the search types described can be used either alone, or combined together to carry ocomplex searches.

earches: • Searching by Point Type

Searching by

e results of a standa

The status bar shows theblack if the Normal displachosen.

Searching by Comm

Searching by Record Type

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 223

Tag Management

• Searching by Configuration

4.6.3.2 y Point Type

o search by Point Type:

ction

3. Check one or more Filter on Type boxes (Integer, Real, Logic, Character).

cords found are listed in the DATABASE NAME: database

4.6.3.3

ic Name:

ck the By Name box in the Search area.

. Click the Search button. The records found are listed in the DATABASE NAME: database

4.6.3.4 Searching y Comment

nt:

. Click button Filter in the DATABASE NAME: database name window; the Filter Selection

dialog box appears.

3. Enter a string in the Filter on Comment box. You can use wildcards ? and *. For example, type ? to find any single character (C?MMENT), or type * to find any string of characters (COMME*).

4. Click OK to return to the DATABASE NAME: database name window.

5. Click the Search button. The records found are listed in the window.

Search is performed on field "Comment (Primary Language)" or "Comment (Secondary Language)" according to the option selected with command Configuration > System > Workstation Configuration tab in SIMATIC IT Management Console (area Comment Display, button First comment or Second comment).

4.6.3.5 Searching by Record Type

To search by Record Type:

1. Click button Filter in the DATABASE NAME: database name window; the Filter Selection dialog box appears.

2. Click the Advanced button. The Advanced Filter dialog box appears.

Searching b

T

1. Click button Filter in the DATABASE NAME: database name window; the Filter Seledialog box appears.

2. Check the By Type box in the Search area.

4. Click the Search button. The rename window.

Searching by Symbolic Name

To search by Symbol

1. Click button Filter in the DATABASE NAME: database name window; the Filter Selection dialog box appears.

2. Che

3. Enter a string corresponding to the symbolic name of the point in the Filter on Name box. You can use wildcards ? and *. For example, type ? to find any single character (N?ME), or type * to find any string of characters (NAME*).

4name window.

b

To search by Comme

1dialog box appears.

2. Click the Advanced button. The Advanced Filter

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 224

Tag Management

3. In the Filter on Type area check the Scalar and/or Vector boxes to find all scalar and/or array records.

4. Click OK to return to the DATABASE NAME: database name window.

d are listed in the window.

4.6.3.6 Searching by RTDS fields

To search by RTDS fields:

performed only for records with RTDS table.

1. Click button Filter in the DATABASE NAME: database name window; the Filter Selection dialog box appears.

og box appears.

4. Click OK to return to the DATABASE NAME: database name window

5. Click the Search button. The records found are listed in the window.

To restore the default values for all the fields (character *), click the Disable button

by Configuration

ction

ed Filter dialog box appears.

3. Check the Filter on Configuration box.

4. Click the AND/OR option button and check one or more tables (AM, GUI, PDA, RTDS). For

to the DATABASE NAME: database name window.

6. Click the Search button. The records found are listed in the window.

7. To display the tables of the records, click the Viewer button.

e fields of the

4.6.3.8 hoosing the Sorting Order

Records in the database can be sorted in ascending order by:

choosing Symbolic in the Mode area of the Filter Selection dialog box (button Filter)

log box (button Filter)

5. Click the Search button. The records foun

This search type can be

2. Click the Advanced button. The Advanced Filter dial

3. Enter the strings to be used for finding records in the Interface Name, User1, User2, User3fields. You can use wildcards ? and *. For example, type ? to find any single character (C?MMENT), or type * to find any string of characters (COMME*).

4.6.3.7 Searching

To search by Configuration:

1. Click button Filter in the DATABASE NAME: database name window; the Filter Seledialog box appears.

2. Click the Advanced button. The Advanc

example, check OR, AM and PDA to find all records with AM or PDA table. Check AND, AMand RTDS to find all records with AM and RTDS table.

5. Click OK to return

Note: When the RTDS check box is selected, you can specify search values in thFilter on RTDS Fields area

C

• SYMBOLIC NAME

• REAL NAME (i.e. Register Name)

choosing Real in the Mode area of the Filter Selection dia

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 225

Tag Management

4.6.3.9

By n Normal format when you perform a tandard search, and in Extended format when you carry out an advanced search.

owever, you can also select the Display Format:

oose one of the following s:

- Normal

4.6.3.10

ith Symbolic sorting order, the following information is displayed:

• all scalars

ents with symbolic name other than the corresponding array header name

With Real sorting order, the following information is displayed:

mind that, when the Symbolic sorting order is chosen, records are listed in

Display Format: Exten

ng information is displayed:

• all scalars

• all array headers

• all array elements, listed b corresponding array header. These elements are sorted by register name.

This display format is suppo y if you choose the Symbolic sorting order, in which records ascending order by SYMBOLIC NAME.

4.6.3.12 Display Format: Compressed

nformation is displayed:

• all array headers

Choosing the Display Format

default, records in the database are displayed is

H

1. In the Database Browser window, click Filter.

2. In the Display Format area of the Filter Selection dialog box, choption

- Extended

- Compressed

3. Click Search to quit.

Display Format: Normal

W

• all array headers

• all array elem

• all scalars

• all array elements

Note Keep inascending order by SYMBOLIC NAME. Instead, when the Real sorting order is chosen, records are listed in ascending order by REGISTER NAME.

4.6.3.11 ded

The followi

eneath the

rted onlare listed in

The following i

• all scalars

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 226

Tag Management

s This display format is supported only if you choose the Symbolic sorting order, in which recordare listed in ascending order by SYMBOLIC NAME.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 227

Real Time Data Server

5 Real Time Data Server

5.1

Time Data Server?

rom

Configuring components must be mapped to RTDS "points", whose

Initializing RTDS reads the configuration of these points from the Database when it is started, and dynamically updates the memory area. If the configuration of some RTDS points is later updated from the Database Editor, it is possible to download these changes to the SIMATIC IT

Reading RTDS polls the device drivers and updates the values stored in the memory area. SIMATIC IT

ory area and deploy them for process

. RTDS forces these values to the device drivers.

Overview

5.1.1 What is SIMATIC IT Real

SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server is a software layer building up a bridge between SIMATIC IT components and field devices. It manages a common data memory for all data coming fthe field, making it available to all upper-level components.

Tags to be handled by SIMATIC IT definition is stored in a proprietary Database, also known as "Data Dictionary".

Real Time Data Server, without stopping it.

components read updated tag values from this memmanagement tasks.

Writing SIMATIC IT components can set the values of tags at any time, by simply writing the new valueto the memory area

The Real Time Data Server can manage Integer, Float and Character registers.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 228

Real Time Data Server

5.1.2 Starting SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server

To launch SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server:

1. In SIMATIC IT Management Console, click the tab.

. Select the icon of the RTDS/IMC Unit 2 you want to use.

3. Select command Unit > Real Time Data Server > Start RTDS.

SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server is started.

ImportanThis comm ncomputer namworkstation n

Real Time Data Server has no user interface. To check if RTDS is running (two TDS instances cannot be started concurrently on the same workstation) view the

oolbox. For more information, see Management Console Tasklist.

t a d is enabled only if you have selected an RTDS/IMC Unit and if the

e assigned to the logical Unit is the same as the current ame.

SIMATIC IT RManagement Console Tasklist in the System T

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 229

Real Time Data Server

ATIC IT Real Time Data Server can be configured in hot backup. SIM

Tip

For more information, see manual Managing Communications with External Devices U

5.1.3

eal Time Data Server can read point values from the device drivers at different time intervals

ch is configured when defining the point in the Database (Data

RTDS provides the following polling classes (those written in blue behave differently with respect to the other classes):

ser’s Guide.

RTDS polling classes

Rand store them in the RTDS memory area. These time intervals are defined by default by the point’s polling class, whiDictionary).

Polling class Polling intervalClass 0 ("on request") Not read

Class 2

Class 3

Class 4

Class 5 30 sec

60 sec

Class 7 ("hig

4 / 5 / 6 yclically according to the time interval specified by the class.

Class 0 is not read cyclically, rather its value is acquired only d request.

, RTDS will set the polling class to 3).

f class 0 points can be configured by the user in order to be optimized for the

ImportanSIMATIC IT Real Time Data Engine and IMC do not

Class 1 1 sec

2 sec

6 sec

10 sec

Class 6

h priority") 500 ms

Class 1 / 2 / 3 /RTDS reads the point values c

This class specifies that the point value when a component issues a specific rea

When a component requests to read a value, the point class is dynamically changed and set to the appropriate polling class e.g., if a component needs to read a tag value every 6 seconds

The behaviour ouser’s specific process needs.

t support dynamic class

change management. Therefore, points managed by these components must be configured with classes different from 0.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 230

Real Time Data Server

Class 7 It is a hidden class and cannot be configured by the user. It is used to exchange data on high-priority queues. It causes a class change to happen when values are read from the ODS or GUI environments.

5.1.4 Dynamic class change

polling class represents the default, i.e. the frequency at which the point is read if no

ponents to change a slower polling class to a higher one, by simply issuing a read request. This process is known as "dynamic class change".

fore it must be carefully planned.

Dynamic cl s with class-0 points

Since a point defined in class 0 is read only when a component needs it, using class 0 is eed to be refreshed frequently. This configuration optimizes mizes the number of requests sent to device drivers and

decreases the system workload.

s of variables in class 0 and you request them from SIMATIC by repeatedly changing panels, the system will always switch new

requested variables from class 0 to class "n" and then back, when changing panel. This

Remarks

resent a meaningful refresh time for each variable,

5.1.5 c class change scenarios

SIMATIC IThe Data

nary.

SIMATIC IT Alarm Manager scenario _LEVEL_ALARM is defined in the Data Dictionary with RTDS polling

class 3 (3 seconds refresh rate). Then it is configured as a highest priority alarm in Alarm Manager (default refresh rate: 0.5 seconds). The system will always try to refresh the point with the priority established by Alarm Manager, even if the RTDS polling class is slower

The RTDS SIMATIC IT component requires it.

However, it is always possible for SIMATIC IT com

Dynamic class change takes time, there

ass changeDynamic class changes also occur when class-0 points are used.

appropriate for points which do not nthe number of points to be read, mini

For example, if you have hundredIT Graphic User Interface

overloads the system workload and is not a recommended configuration.

There is no "general rule" to decide which is the most appropriate polling class for a variable.

Generally speaking, the class must repaccording to the process needs.

Dynami

Graphic User Interface scenario Point TANK_LEVEL is configured with RTDS polling class 6 (1 minute refresh rate) in tDictio

SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface loads a graphic panel, with refresh rate 1 second, containing a tank to which point TANK_LEVEL is associated. Upon loading, the TANK_LEVEL point pollingclass is automatically changed to 1 (1 second polling rate). When the panel is unloaded, it returns to class 6.

The Boolean point TANK

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 231

Real Time Data Server

SIMATIC IT Plant Data Archive scenario he Data Dictionary with RTDS polling class 6

ks A/AM point is less than the RTDS polling class

defined in the Data Dictionary, a process is started which causes the tag to be managed by the SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server driver in a polling class associated with a time value that is less than or equal to the value set by PDA / AM component.

5.1.6

When an array is defined, the whole array is always associated with the same class defined in

data from the device driver, if all the elements are defined in such a way that they tiguous also on the PLC side, RTDS always reads all array elements in block.

Writing: fro device drivers y of their class, all points can be set at any time by SIMATIC IT components and ications.

y default, each element of an array is written independently of any other array element.

veral drivers (e.g., the OPC Client driver) allow you to configure an array in such a

ust enter an appropriate keyword in the UserField3 field of the Data Dictionary.

5.1.7 Installing and Configuring the SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server Drivers

drivers are supplied in order to exchange data with the relevant field devices, via the Real Time Data Server memory area.

US - MO PLUS Driver

PC Client Dr

Siemens 3964R Driver

If you need to communicate with other field devices not listed above, you can create your own drivers.

The real point OIL_TEMPERATURE is defined in t(60 seconds refresh rate). Then it is configured in PDA as a class 2 archiving (sampling rate: 3 seconds). The system will always try to refresh the point with the priority established by PDA, even if the RTDS polling class is slower.

RemarIn general, if the refresh rate configured for a PD

Reading and writing arrays with RTDS

Reading: from device drivers to RTDS

the array header.

When gettingare really con

m RTDS toIndependentlexternal appl

B

However, seway that all its elements are written to RTDS, even if just the value of one element changes.

To do this, you mIt is strongly recommended that you refer to the online documentation of each driver for moreinformation.

The following RTDS

• MODB DBUS

• O iver

•

Tip

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 232

Real Time Data Server

For more information, see man IMATIC IT Driver Development Kit User Manual"

.1.8 Data exchange between SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server and the RTDS interfaces

ual "S

5

5.1.9 ATIC IT Real Time Data Server

Chang Da ditor can be applied to SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server in two different way

• By shutting down SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server and starting it again. In this manner RTDS reads the wh figuration and automatically loads new points. This method is recommended w large number of changes has been applied.

By dynamically updating SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server without shutting it down. This can be obtained as follows:

update SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server:

1. Select command Configuration > Real Time Data Server from SIMATIC IT Management S tab of the Server Configuration window is displayed.

nect to the SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server instance you want to update

by clicking the

Updating the SIM

es to thes:

tabase E

ole conhen a

•

To

Console. The RTD

2. If necessary, con

button. In a hot-backup configuration, this command allows you to con t only to a master RTDS.

3. Click

nec

the button on the toolbar.

If RTDS is successfully updated, a detailed description of the operations performed during the ate trans (e.g. number of added, changed and deleted points) will be reported

in a log file. To view this log file click the

4. upd action

button on the toolbar.

. Otherwise an error message will appear.

points currently loaded in the SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server can be

ed by

5

Note: The number of

button on the toolbar and then the More Info button. display clicking the

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 233

Real Time Data Server

5.1.10 oublesh g the RTDS update

Too many modification on single array(s) Too many changes have been applied to a single array.

ll be automatically loaded by the

Database locked. nline update cannot be performed since the database is locked (either because it has been

opened or, for example, due to file replication).

a few minutes and then retry.

Generic error A gen s occurred.

d

Interface(s) not The R r instance, an invalid interface name has been entered in

e Database Editor) or the interface is obsolete and does not support online modifications.

Interface not connected s not yet connected to SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server

Wait u Server or verify if the interface has be gured and launched. See the Message Alerter for more details.

ve server notIn a h slave RTDS server is not synchronous (i.e. it has not been compl interfaces connected to the slave server have not finished reading the da

Retry s have been completed.

ate in progrhe server is updating, but another Update request has been issued.

Update successfully executed only partially RTDS can acquire a limited number of changes from the Database Editor in a single update

Click the Update button to start another update transaction when the previous one is completed.

Tr ootin

Shut down the RTDS and restart it. In this way all changes wiSIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server.

O

Close the Database Editor or wait for

eric error ha

Rea the private RTDS log file or the interface log file.

configured or obsolete TDS interface does not exist (fo

th

The RTDS interface ha

ntil the interface connects to SIMATIC IT Real Time Dataen correctly confi

Sla ready ot-backup configuration, theetely aligned yet) or thetabase.

later when the above operation

Upd ess T

Retry later when the current update is completed.

transaction.

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 234

Real Time Data Server

5.2 Data M

IMATIC IT manages one or more logical Units, each associated with a memory area, which is

The memory area occupies 64Kb by default, but this size can be modified by the user up to a axim b, for some Unit types (currently this size is supported only for Real Time ata E

The c scribed in a file, called LOCREG, which defines the numb ng, character, etc.). SIMATIC IT Services provid

emory Area

5.2.1 Data Memory Area

Sused by applications to read and write data. These memory areas are handled differently according to the configuration used.

mD

um of 512 Kngine and RTDS/IMC Units).

onfiguration of the memory area is deer, floatier of registers for each type (integ

es a number of System Locreg classes that can be modified by the user to create User Locregs.

ach locreg handles both User Registers and System Registers , which can only be updated om SIMATIC IT Management Console.

plications are physically represented by these egister name and the symbolic name of a

variable is achieved by creating the Points Database.

.2 RTD

IMATIC IT Real Time Data Server supports the following data types:

In bits (1 word).

teger registers can be handled in integer, hexadecimal and binary format. You can access a single bit of an integer register in order to handle boolean variables.

Float

loat registers can be handled only as <integer part>.<decimal part>.

Character he s acter register is 8 bits (1 byte).

Chara in alphanumeric format.

.3 Syst Server

SIMAT gs for SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server:

Efr

SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server supports Integer, Float and Character data types.

The variables (points) used by all SIMATIC IT apmemory registers. The association between the r

5.2 S Data Types

S

teger The size of an Integer register is 16

In

The size of a Float register is 32 bits (2 words).

F

T ize of a Char

cter registers can be handled

5.2 em Locregs for SIMATIC IT Real Time Data

IC IT Services supplies 6 system locre

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 235

Real Time Data Server

• RTDB_0

• RTDB_1

• RTDB_3

RTDB_4

• RTDB_5

Each system locreg can be used to create custom User Locregs by changing the number of gisters in the areas reserved for I/O and user registers (P and F

F

5.2.4 Type

• RTDB_2

•

Integer, Float and Character reregisters).

SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server Drivers can handle only I/O variables (FI, FF, FC where stands for field).

User registers (P) can be used by the IMC module as internal variables for storing program variables.

Locreg RTDB_0 Register Number

I/O

I 10000

5.2.5 Type

FC 13504 FF 8000

F

Locreg RTDB_1 Register Number

I/O 1000

User Registers

5500

5.2.6 Locreg RTDB_2 Type

FC FF 750

FI 800

PC 2000 PF 8500

PI

Register NumberI/O FC 1000

1400

0

2000

5000

FF

FI 100

User Registers PC

PF 8000

PI

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 236

Real Time Data Server

5.2.7 Type

Locreg RTDB_3 Register Number

I/O

FF 3400

FI 2000

PF 6000

5.2.8 LoType

FC 2000

User Registers PC 1000

PI 4000

creg RTDB_4 Register Number

I/O

User Registe PC 1000

PF 3500

0

g RType

FC 3000 FF 5400

FI 4000

rs

PI 250

5.2.9 Locre TDB_5 Register Number

I/O FC 4600 FF 8000

5.2.10 User Registers

sters are subdivided according to the Locreg type:

• Registers for

• Registers f egs

5.2.11 egisters for RTDS Locregs

The following User Registers are available in RTDS Locregs:

Name

FI 8000

User Regi

RTDS Locregs

or P.M.C. Locr

R

Description

P, i.e. permane bles F, i.e. field Used to exchange data with non-proprietary control networks

nt Used by SIMATIC IT applications to store internal varia

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 237

Real Time Data Server

B, i.e. backup Used by SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server if this module is configured in hot up. st be aligned

he sl

B reg ore the following register types ble:

Register Typ

backon t

These registers can be used to store variables which muave RTDS memory area.

P, F and are availa

isters can be Integer, Float or Character. Theref

e DescriptionFI Exchange Integer data with external devices (non-proprietary

control networks) data with external devices (non-rks)

FC

PI Internal integer variables nt variables

InternIntegFloat

BC Alpha ariables to be aligned on the slave RTDS

The numbe r (up to 4Kb), only for User Locregs , using the Loc ement Console.

If you use Siemens Orsi proprietary controllers (P.M.C.)the following user registers are available:

Name

FF Exchange Floating pointproprietary control netwoExchange alphanumeric data with external devices (non-proprietary control networks)

PF Internal PC

Floating poial Alphanumeric variables

er variables to be aligned on the slave RTDS BI BF ing point variables to be aligned on the slave RTDS

numeric v

r of these registers can be changed by the usereg tool supplied in SIMATIC IT Manag

5.2.12 Registers for PMC Locregs

Description

P, i.e. permanent these registers are maintained even after power-off, uffer battery.

R, i.e. not perman e registers are cancelled upon system startup, unless a different configuration has been chosen.

, and R registers can be Integer, Float or Character. Therefore the following register types are available:

Register Type

The values stored in thanks to the presence of a b

ent The values stored in thes

P

Description

RI RF Non-permanent Floating Point registers

Non-pe racter registers a

PF Perma int registers Perma

The number egisters can be changed by the user, only for User Locregs, using the ool anagement Console.

Non-permanent Integer registers

RC rmanent ChaPI Perm nent Integer registers

nent Floating PoPC nent Character registers

of these rLocreg t supplied in SIMATIC IT M

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 238

Real Time Data Server

In addition the following registers are available:

Register Type

DescriptionII 16 bit input registers holdingOI 16 bit output registers holding

values read from the field values written to the field

AI e alarm messages to be sent to the supervision program.

For more information o mory areas, see the software e P.M.C. f

R

sters are used for special purposes such as troubleshooting, reading system date nd time, etc.

re available:

Register Type

Alarm registers (16 bit integers) used to generate th

Tip n P.M.C. registers and me

manual of th amily you want to use.

5.2.13 System egisters

System regia

The following system registers a

Description

SA SP l integer/logical registers used to monitor the system

SR SS EI

Tip For more detailed information on how user programs can use these registers, see

Control Environment Program Guide

5.3 Configuring the L

Locr

Locreg configuration is the float and isters to fit yo

um nits) and PMC OL Units m" locregs and cannot be

System diagnostics messages Speciastatus Registers holding the remaining interval for each sequence Registers holding the sequence status Registers reserved for ITER II instructions

manual ming User’s

ocreg

5.3.1 Configuring the eg

tool which allows you to define the amount of integer,character reg ur requirements.

The system provides a n ber of pre-defined RTDS (used for RTDS User u(used for CONTR ) locregs. These are the so-called "systemodified by the user.

In the Locreg Configuration environment, you can:

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 239

Real Time Data Server

• Create new user locregs;

Modify a user locreg; •

• View the registers of a locreg.

5.3.2 Creating a new user locreg

To create a new user locreg:

1. Select command Configuration > Locreg Configuration in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

2. Select command File > New in the Locreg Co

list

n about the selected

Parameter

nfiguration window.

3. The Class Selection dialog box appears. Select the System Locreg you want from thebox and click OK.

4. The Locreg Configuration window shows the following informatiolocreg:

DescriptionLocreg Class Name f the system locreg to be used as a model to

.C. ies)

use .C.)

les .C.)

rary e rary

stem Library Name Name of the Ladder system library

If you have chosen an RTDS locreg, see If you have selected a RTDS Locreg.

7. Select command File > Save or Save as to save the locreg you have modified with a name o creg. User locregs are saved in directory \Plant Name\DATABASE.

8. S quit the Locreg environment.

5.3.3 If you have selected an RTDS Locreg

1. Select command Configuration > Locreg Configuration in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

e available:

- User Memory

- Backup Memory

Name ocreate the user locreg

Device Type Type of the CPU assigned to the Unit (RTDS or P.Mser

Device Sub Type Reserved for future Operating System Version Version of the operating system installed (only for P.MSystem Library Segment Address Address of the segment containing the system modu

stored in the system libraries (only for P.MIter System Library Name Name of the Iter system libBlock Diagram System Library NamLadder Sy

Name of the Block Diagram system lib

5.

6. If you have chosen a P.M.C. locreg, see If you have selected a P.M.C. Locreg.

ther than the system lo

elect command File > Exit to

2. In the Locreg Configuration window, the following tabs ar

- Type

- Field Memory

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 240

Real Time Data Server

3. Modify the number of bytes reserved for each type according to your1 double word = 32 bit, 1 byte = 8 bit).

needs (1 word = 16 bit,

5.3.4 Parameter

Type Description

Type Memory MapAlarm Memor Memory used (in Words) for the Alarms (AI registers)

5.3.5

lative to F registers.

Parameter

Type of Locreg Name Name of the memory map file y

Field Memory

This tab contains information re

Description

Integer/logic r (in words and bytes) by integer/logic

Real Variable n double words and bytes) by real type variables

Char/String V riables The memory used (in bytes) by character/string type variables

Total Bytes The total memory used by all variable types

5.3.6

This tab contains information relative to P registers.

Parameter

Va iables The memory used type variables

s The memory used (i

a

User Memory

Description

Integer/logic r

Real Variables The memory used (in double words and bytes) by real type variables

Char/String V The memory used (in bytes) by character/string type variables

Total Bytes The total memory used by all variable types

5.3.7 Ba

Th se reg

Parameter

Va iables The memory used (in words and bytes) by integer/logic type variables

ariables

ckup Memory

is tab contains information relative to B registers. A small memory area is reserved for theisters (maximum 4 Kb).

Description

Integer/logic Var

The memory used (in words and bytes) by integer/logic type iables

Reaiables varl Variables The memory used (in double words and bytes) by real type

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 241

Real Time Data Server

variables Cha ables

Total Bytes

5.3.8 If you have selected a PMC Locreg

. Select command Configuration > Locreg Configuration in SIMATIC IT Management Console.

2. In the Locreg Configuration window the following tabs are available:

- Type

ur needs (1 word = 16 bit, 1 double word = 32 bit, 1 byte = 8 bit).

5.3.9

This tab contains information relative to P registers.

Parameter

r/String Vari The memory used (in bytes) by character/string type variables The total memory used by all variable types

1

- Permanent Memory

- Not Permanent Memory

3. Modify the number of bytes reserved for each type according to yo

Permanent Memory

Description

Integer/logictype variables

Real Variable The memory used (in double words and bytes) by real type variables

h riables The memory used (in bytes) by character/string type variables

Number of free bytes The number of free bytes Number of available bytes

The available memory

5.3.10 Not permanent Memory

This tab contains information relative to R registers.

Parameter

Variables The memory used (in words and bytes) by integer/logic

s

C ar/String Va

Description

Integer/logic

Real Variable

Char/String V

Number of frNumber of available bytes

The available memory

Variables The memory used (in words and bytes) by integer/logic type variables

s The memory used (in double words and bytes) by real type variables

ariables The memory used (in bytes) by character/string type variables

ee bytes The number of free bytes

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 242

Real Time Data Server

5.3.11

To modify a user locreg:

command Configuration > Locreg Configuration in SIMATIC IT Management

2. Select command File > Open

Modifying a user locreg

1. Select Console.

in the Locreg Configuration window.

3. The Locreg Selection dialog box shows by default the names of all the user locregs. SYSTEM LOCREGS CANNOT BE EDITED BY THE USER.

4. Select the user locreg you want to update from the list and click OK.

5. The Locreg Configuration window shows the following information about the selected

Parameter

locreg:

DescriptionLocreg Class Name Name of the system locreg to be used as a model to

create the user locreg Device Type Type of the CPU assigned to the Unit (RTDS or

P.M.C. series) Device Sub T pe Reserved for future use Operating System Version Version of the operating system installed (only for

P.M.C.) System Library Segment Address Address of the segment containing the system

modules stored in the system libraries (only for P.M.C.)

Iter System Library Name Name of the Iter system library Block DiagraLadder Syste ystem library

you have selected a RTDS Locreg.

7. If you have chosen a P.M.C. locreg, see If you have selected a P.M.C. Locreg.

8. Select command File > Save

y

m System Library Name Name of the Block Diagram system library m Library Name Name of the Ladder s

6. If you have chosen an RTDS locreg, see If

or Save as to save the locreg you have modified. User locregs are saved in directory \Plant Name\DATABASE.

mm

5.3.12 Viewing the registers of a locreg

the registers of a user locreg:

elect command Configuration > Locreg Configuration in SIMATIC IT Management e.

. Select command File > Open

9. Select co and File > Exit to quit the Locreg environment.

To view

1. SConsol

2 in the Locreg Configuration window.

3. The Locreg Selection dialog box shows by default the names of all the user locregs. To display system locregs click the System button in the Type area.

nd click OK.

d

4. Select the user locreg you want to view from the list a

5. The Locreg Configuration window shows the following information about the selectelocreg:

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 243

Real Time Data Server

Parameter DescriptionLocreg Class NaDevice Type t (

Device Sub Type e future use Operating Sy M.C.) System LIbra odules

Iter System Library Name Name of the Iter system library Bl ram System Library Na

the Block Diagram system library

La ibrary Name

and ws the following

Parameter

me Name of the system locreg Type of the CPU assigned to the Uni RTDS or P.M.C. series)

Res rved forstem Version Version of the operating system installed (only for P.ry Segment Address Address of the segment containing the system m

stored in the system libraries (only for P.M.C.)

ock Diagme dder System L

Name of

Name of the Ladder system library

6. Select comminformation:

File > Display. The Locreg Display dialog box sho

DescriptionName Symbolic nameMem. Type Memory type of the register (a Type Register type (Integer, Float, Character) Address (Hex) Starting address in hexadecimal format

(Dec

. To print the locreg displayed, select command File > Print

of the register larm, permanent, I/O, system)

Address ) Starting address in decimal format Number Number of available registers

7. Click Exit to return to the Locreg Configuration window.

8 . The standard Windows

5.4

5.4.1

anages the RTDS memory area and allows data exchange between a large number of non-proprietary supervisory / control systems

integration is achieved via modules called drivers, which A&D AS MES for a large variety of PLCs, DCSs, Loop

Controllers, etc.

Real Time Data Server can be configured in offline mode, such as concerned:

• size of RTDS queues

•

• Quality flags management

dialog box for setting printing parameters appears.

Configuring SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server

Configuring SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server

The SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server component m

and SIMATIC IT applications. Thishave been developed by Siemens

The behaviour of SIMATIC ITfar as the following features are

• The interfaces to the drivers

The

0 class points management

• Oneshot reading

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 244

Real Time Data Server

• Time Stamp management

5.4.2

Wh equired by SIMATIC IT applications to communicate and exchange data with PLCs and other market devices.

Notes

Pr

Configuring the interfaces to the RTDS drivers

en configuring RTDS in offline mode, you define the drivers r

• You can configure up to 16 drivers.

• You can select the command only if you have selected a USER UNIT - RTDS/IMC or a USER UNIT – Real Time Data Engine logical Unit.

ocedure

1. In SIMATIC IT Management Console, click the tab.

2. Select an RTDS or RTDEM Unit.

3. Select command Unit > Real Time Data Server (or Real Time Data Engine) > RTDS Offline Configuration

Expand the Unit tree, then expand the Management or

item and double click the RTDS Offline Configuration icon.

4. In the Real Time Data Server dialog box, click the Real Time Data Server Offline Configuration tab. Enter the following data:

In the box EnterInterface Nam exchange data with external devices. This

ExecutabName

directory, and will be executed upon SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server start-up. To find out the name of the executable program, see the

entation of the relevant RTDS

Interface Location

Note: The Interface Name is inserted also in the Interf. field of the Points Database associated

is added to the string if you install more than one stance of the same interface (e.g. SINEC1, SINEC2, SINEC3).

e the name of the driver used toname is defined when you install the driver.

le the name of the driver executable program (without extension). This file has been copied by the driver setup program to the SIMATIC IT system

Installation and Configuration documdriver. (Optional) the name of the directory to which the driver executable program has been copied.

with the RTDS/IMC Unit. This name identifies the type of the external device relevant for eachvariable.

For example, if you use the Siemens SINEC H1 interface, the program creates the SINEC Interface Name. A progressive numberin

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 245

Real Time Data Server

5. Check the Save User Registers box to save the values stored in the permanent registers store them when RTDS is

6. Check the Save Backup Registers box to save the values stored in the backup registers (B).

7. C button.

e the directory are displayed. Check the RTDS.

Note or remove the selected driver, respectively.

Importan

If you plan to use the PDE Programming Development Environment to process ust check the Start Integral

module will be executed upon SIMATIC IT RTDS/IMC

5.4.3 Defining the size of RTDS queues

In o o exchange data between the memory area and the interfaces to third-party drivers, IMATIC IT Real Time Data Server writes data to and reads data from dedicated queues. In reater detail, there are two input queues from the interfaces (one with high priority, the other

ple

d by class 7, as well as to return the result of settings. Whenever you force a value from RTDS to the field, this triggers a re-reading of the value, in

t to reset the value has been successful or not. These re-plings, are managed via high-priority input queues.

Furthermore, when using IMC or Data Engine:

• H ority input queues are refreshed at the end of EACH task/sequence.

• L put queues are refreshed only at the end of each DE/IMC system time tick.

The ueues can be customized by the user, as follows:

1. S d Unit > Real Time Data Server (or Real Time Data Engine) > RTDS O ion oExpand the Unit tree, then expand the Management

(P) when SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server is deactivated and rere-started.

lick the Add

Th names of the driver, the executable program and -only box if you want the driver only to read frRead om and not to write on the

: Click buttons Change and Delete to modify

t

the data acquired from external devices, you mMultifunction Controller box. In this way the IMC

Real Time Data Server start-up (this option is available only for Units).

rder tSgwith low priority) and as many output queues as the number of configured interfaces. A simdiagram illustrates this architecture.

High-priority input queues are use

order to check whether the attempreadings, in addition to class-7 sam

Low-priority input queues are used by all other classes.

igh-pri

ow-priority in

size of these q

elect commanffline Configuratr

item and double click the RTDS Offline Configuration icon.

2. In the Real Time Data Server dialog box click the Advanced tab.

ich

High Priority 2000 up to 8000 Low Priority 8000 up to 20000 Interfaces 1000 up to 20000

3. Click the Queue tab. Configure the queues by entering the number of queue items, whcan be stored in each of them. This value must be:

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 246

Real Time Data Server

Since these queues have a limited size, it is important to monitor their occupation and the relative peaks. This operation can be performed from the RTDS Online Configuration environment.

Not nfigured size of RTDS queues can be viewed by clicking the e: The currently co button on the toolbar and then the More Info button.

5.4.4 Monitoring the RTDS queue status

To c the occupation rate of the queues used by SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server to xchange data between the memory area and the interfaces, do as follows:

ent

2. Click the

hecke

1. Select command Configuration > Real Time Data Server from SIMATIC IT ManagemConsole. The RTDS tab of the Server Configuration window is displayed.

button on the toolbar. A chart is displayed: the first trend corresponds to the peak occupation of the high priority input queue.

3. You can select the trend to be monitored in the Parameters list, relative to input high priority, e following options:

Peak occupatio cupation reached in this queue

ak counter How many times the peak has been reached erage occup

Occupation > 90% counter s the average has reached 90%

5.4.5 Defining the management of 0 class points

t acquired at regular time intervals but only when a SIMATIC IT ir value. Therefore their management can be configured by the user.

1. Select command Unit > Real Time Data Server (or Real Time Data Engine) > RTDS Offline Configuration from SIMATIC IT Management Console, or E it tree,

input low priority or output queues and choose one of th

n Maximum ocPeAv ation Average occupation of the queue

How many time

Class zero points are nocomponent requests the

To define class-0 point management:

xpand the Un then expand the Management item and double click the RTDS Offline Configuration icon.

2. In the Real Time Dat tab.

3. Click the General tab. You can configure the following options:

ion

a Server dialog box click the Advanced

Opt DescriptionDis ange class error Since a certain time usable chmanagement

ually elapses before tag values are actually read, during this interval some SIMATIC IT components display a series of # in place of the point

read error" string oints.

Setting of zero class point Select On value change to send class zero points to the interface when their value changes in comparison to the previous one. This is the default configuration.

value. Check this box not to display the "which appears when loading class zero p

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 247

Real Time Data Server

Select Unconditioned to send class zero points to the interface whenever their setting is requested, even if the value is the same as the previous one.

5.4.6 Optimizing the setting of values on device drivers for 0 class points

e array is written to the device driver only when it changes in the Real Time Data Base memory area (e.g. because a SIMATIC IT component has modified it).

sval one currently stored

Th in class 0, which are not polled: the device driver might have modified the tag value, but, since this value has not been read by RTDS, as no application requested it, the Real Time Data Base memory area contains a value which is not aligned with the current value on the device driver.

lues written by a SIMATIC IT component or an application to the Real Time Data Base memory area can be sent to device drivers independently of the current values stored in SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server.

5.4.7 Enabling oneshot reading

The oneshot reading option allows you to refresh the values in the RTDS memory with the most updated PLC values.

To enable oneshot reading:

rver (or Real Time Data Engine) > RTDS Offline Configuration from SIMATIC IT Management Console or Expand the Unit tree, then expand the Management

Typically the value of a point, of a single array element or of a whol

A of version 3.01, SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server can be configured in order to write a ue to the device driver, even if the value to be written is the same as the

in the Real Time Data Base memory area.

is approach is useful for points

With this configuration new va

1. Select command Unit > Real Time Data Se

item and double click the RTDS Offline Configuration icon.

2. In the Real Time Data Server dialog box click the Advanced tab.

3. Click the Oneshot reading tab. Check the Enable oneshot reading box. The settings area below is activated.

5. In the Max number concurrent requests box, insert a number indicating the maximum number of simultaneous requests from divers clients the RTDS can manage. Note Each request contains one or more oneshot readings.

5.4.8

mand Unit > Real Time Data Server (or Real Time Data Engine) > RTDS

or

4. In the Max execution time for oneshot reading box insert a number indicating the maximum time a oneshot reading of a single variable may last. When the time expires, the oneshot reading request becomes invalid and an error will be sent to the requesting client.

Enabling quality flags management

In order to manage quality flags, their use must be enabled, as follows:

1. Select comOffline Configuration from SIMATIC IT Management Console

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 248

Real Time Data Server

Expand the Unit tree, then expand the Management item and double click the RTDS Offline Configuration icon.

3. Click the General tab. Check the Enable quality management box and select OK.

5.4.9

value of a variable was modified, proceed as follows:

ata Engine) > RTDS

Expand the Unit tree, then expand the Management

2. In the Real Time Data Server dialog box click the Advanced tab.

Enabling Time Stamp

To allow the clients to know the specific time at which the

1. Select command Unit > Real Time Data Server (or Real Time DOffline Configuration from SIMATIC IT Management Console Or

item and double click the RTDS Offline Configuration icon.

dialog box, click the Advanced tab.

5.4.10

SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server manages the state of a variable and, as such, the validity index of the variable value. This value respects the OPC standards of quality flags (good, bad, uncertain).

The quality value of field variables is assigned directly by the associated interface.

of field variables without an associated interface / with an interface that does not manage variable states, can be handled by the user, by using

nd mation on how to use these instructions, please see the Iter,

Ladder and Block Reference Guides.

Quality information for a variable can be only displayed from the ODS and SIMATIC IT Graphic User Interface components.

ImportantQuality fla enabled in order for SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Serv values.

Attribute

2. In the Real Time Data Server

3. Click the General tab. Check the Enable Time Stamp box and select OK.

Displaying quality information

The quality value of non field variables or

appropriate instructions supplied by the proprietary programming languages (Iter, Ladder aDiagram Block). For more infor

g management must be er to manage quality

Description

Status val Quality describing the quality status. Substatus Detailed description of the quality status. Depends on the quality

GOOD, BAD, UNCERTAIN. Limit iagnostic information.

ue Integer value, not masked Quality value. Value

value, which can beValue providing useful d

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 249

Real Time Data Server

5.4.11

e substatus value for the GOOD quality, according to the OPC standards.

SSSS

The GOOD quality attribute

This is th

Define

0 Non-specific

Local Override N/A

ed description of each quality flag, please refer to the "The OPC Data Access ustom Interface Specification" document, which can be downloaded from the

www.opcfoundation.org web site.

5.4.12 he BAD quality attribute

This is the substatus value for the BAD quality, according to the OPC standards.

SSSS

1-5 N/A 6 7-15

For a detailC

T

Define0 1 2 Not Connected 3 4 5 Last Known Value 6 Comm Failure 7 8-15

tion" document, which can be downloaded from the

5.4.13 The UNCERTAIN quality attribute

This is the substatus value for the UNCERTAIN quality, according to the OPC standards.

SSSS

Non-specific Configuration Error

Device FailureSensor Failure

Out of Service N/A

For a detailed description of each quality flag, please refer to the "The OPC Data Access Custom Interface Specificawww.opcfoundation.org web site.

Define

0 1 le Value 2-3 N/A 4 Sensor Not Accurate 5 its Exceeded 6 Sub-Normal 7-15 N/A

Non-specific Last Usab

Engineering Un

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 250

Real Time Data Server

For a detailed description of each quality flag, please refer to the "The OPC Data Access ation" document, which can be downloaded from the eb site.

5.4.14

This is the status value, according to the OPC standards.

QQ

Custom Interface Specificwww.opcfoundation.org w

The quality status

Define Description0 Bad Value is not useful for reasons indicated by the Substatus. 1

the Substatus. Not used by OPC The Quality of the value is Good.

5.4.15

LL

Uncertain The quality of the value is uncertain for reasons indicated by

2 N/A 3 Good

The limit field

This is the limit value, according to the OPC standards.

Define Description

0 Not Limited The value is free to move up or down 1 Low Limited The value has ‘pegged’ at some lower limit 2 High Limited The value has ‘pegged’ at some high limit.

The value is a constant and cannot move.

5.5

5.5.1 etails on RTDS hot backup (redundancy)

hot backup reflects what is valid for the other SIMATIC IT modules in which this particular configuration is possible.

ter management. There exist differences acoording to the type of nt to maintain synchronization between master and slave RTDS.

5.5.2

S is a time- and resource-consuming activity. ws:

• Only B (Backup) registers are always kept synchronous by the system.

• P (Permanent) registers are kept synchronous only when modified by one of the upper level components (GUI, ODS...), Real Time Data Engine and IMC excluded.

3 Constant

Hot backup (redundancy)

D

The configuration of RTDS in

For what concerns regisregister for which you wa

Register management with RTDS in hot backup

Register alignment between master and slave RTDTherefore, register synchronization occurs as follo

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 251

Real Time Data Server

• F (Field) registers are not kept synchronous by the system because their synchronization is guaranteed by field devices.

5.5.3 unction

Purpose cutable (dbalign.exe) was specifically developed to permit the alignment of

rver to the clients that have "image" plants, i.e. which support pairs of RTDS in Backup.

Location It is installed by default in C:\ICUBESYS\BIN.

Behaviour This application must be launched manually on the client inside the "image" plant that you want to maintain aligned. If no "image" plant exists, the application fails (however, a private log file

.LOG keeps trace of the program’s activities and lists any reasons for stops or

fter being launched, the DB-Align application examines the list of defined RTDS Units, rching for one the associated device of which corresponds to the computer name of the

machine on which the program is running. If more than one such Unit is present, the application signals this in the log file, but nonetheless considers only the first of such Units that it detects.

it associated to the appropriate workstation, the program determines the ted database and corresponding locreg file and then copies the files from the

the program interrupts its execution.

Once the Copy operation is completed, an alert message informs the user as to the conclusion

5.5.4 DB-Align application (dbalign.exe)

Prerequisites The application must be configured as a Custom application on the clients where there exists

The workstation must be logged on to a remote Plant.

ation of files must be active.

DS Unit configured to run on the workstation.

The DB-Align f

The DB-Align exethe dbfiles from the se

named DBALIGNwarnings).

Asea

After finding the Unname of its associamaster server found to the local PC.

If there is no Unit associated to the appropriate workstation, then the DB-Align programsearches for a Unit associated to the workstation (if one exists) on which RTDS runs in backupin relation to the machine considered.

If such a Unit is found, the program determines the name of the database and locreg and then copies them.

If no such Unit is found, then

of the process and its outcome.

Launching the

• an "image" Plant.

•

• Local replic

• There exists a RT

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 252

Real Time Data Server

• No other instance of the DB-Align application must be running.

Procedure 1. Logon to the "image" Plant.

2. Add the dbalign.exe application to the Client menu as a Custom application in Management Console.

Management Console, launch the application from the Client menu.

5.6 Advanced DS configuration

5.6.1

s on RTDS by editing specific .INI files that come

Important Editing the aforementioned .INI files must be performed solely by expert users.

WER.INI

• File GPSSOCK.INI

• File QBRIDGE.INI

• File RTDB.INI

• File USERBK.INI

5.6.2 COMMVIEWER.INI

ATA*

d= N

imum number (set as default) of Audit Trail records loaded in the Viewer

5.6.3 GPSSOCK.INI

Important Before performing any operations on this file, we recommend that you contact Siemens A&D AS MES Technical Support Service for any additional information.

REGISTRATION

3. Operating in

RT

Advanced RTDS configurations

You can perform advanced configurationprovided with the application.

• File COMMVIE

• File ITFLIB.INI

• File MENU.INI

• File NCSERV.INI

[D

Max_Data_Loade

N indicates the maxmemory.

[ ]

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 253

Real Time Data Server

NotRegNetChange = TRUE/False

nfiguration.

ts visualization in the Management Console will never happen, when you

the key ComMode under the section [COMUNICATION_MODE] is GPS_RQM and the value

means of RIS.

If the key ComMode under the section [COMUNICATION_MODE] has the value GPS_ONLY_PIPE, then SIMATIC IT always uses the network file system of the operating system for the I/O operations on files.

5.6.4 ITFLIB.INI

This file must be edited in the RTDB sub-directory of the central plant, on the master and slave plant servers.

The file foresees a section name for each Interface Name that the user wants to configure.

Example:

[InterfaceName1]

noasciilog = 1

StopThreadTO=300000

…

[InterfaceName-n]

noasciilog = 1

StopThreadTO=300000

Meaning of each available parameter:

noasciilog: if the file is not edited, its value will be 0 (default): in this case, the driver writes an ASCII log file, having the same contents of the system log file shown by Log File Viewer. Instead, if the value is 1, the ASCII log file is disabled. This is useful when the ASCII log file resides on a remote hard disk.

StopThreadTO : internal timeout in driver architecture; its default is 40000.

If the key ComMode under the section [COMUNICATION_MODE] is GPS_RQM and the valueof NotRegNetChange is TRUE, then refresh of the units visualization in the Management Console will not happen, when you update the net co

If the key ComMode under the section [COMUNICATION_MODE] is GPS_ONLY_PIPE, then the refresh of the uniupdate the net configuration.

[FILE SYSTEM]

UseFFSYS = YES/NO

Ifof UseFFSYS is NO, then SIMATIC IT uses the network file system of the operating system forthe I/O operations on files; if the value is YES, then the File System Server provided by SIMATIC IT Sevices is used. This final guarantees the support of the Ethernet redundancy realized by

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 254

Real Time Data Server

5.6.5 MENU.INI

[DELAY]

Y] or the Retry key. As default setting, SIMATIC IT Management Console performs 60 attempts of closing Production Modeler.

e

5.6.6

Th

Wi are stilfre file is configured).

Ex

[CO

Ch

Ch

Th

the file does not exist, the default value will be applied.

o bypass (disable) the check, CheckAppLife=-1.

ach foundation master

5.6.7 QBRIDGE.INI

ile QBRIDGE .INI in the directory nnot perform forcing on PMCs.

ube Bridge Server so that no client is able to perform any

Ex

1)

Co

Comp

Computer3 = GAMMA

Retry=<integer specifying attempts number>

You do not find in the file menu.ini, either the section [DELA

Each attempt has a duration of 5 seconds, so that the maximum time to close this modulreaches 5 minutes.

It is possible to increase or decrease the attempts number by adding manually this section andspecifying an integer greater than or equal to one.

NCSERV.INI

is file (read by SIMATIC IT Network Configuration Server) contains the setting of the timedelay [in msec] prior to checking the status (running/not running) of the Historian modules.

th this operation, Network Configuration Server checks whether all SIMATIC IT modulesl running. However, this is a time-consuming operation, which could be performed less quently (in particular, whenever USERBK.INI

ample of NCSERV.INI file:

NFIG]

eckAppLife=180000

eckAppLife is given in msec (for instance, 180000 -> 3 minutes).

e default value is 120000 -> 2 minutes.

If

T

This configuration file must be edited in the directory ICUBE.CNF of eserver.

When the Cube Bridge Server is started, it searches the fICUBE.CNF, where you can find all client’s names that ca

It is also possible to configure the Cforcing on PMCs.

amples of the .ini format are as follows:

[RdOnlyAccess]

mputersCount = 3

Computer1 = ALPHA

uter2 = BETA

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 255

Real Time Data Server

e computers ALPHA, BETA and GAMMA cannot perform any forcing on PMCs. Th

[Rd

Co

r.

5.6.8 RT

sercomodified in oco qu

Se

High-priority queue (500 ms reading operations), from all driver instances to RTDS:

[INHQUEUE]

UnitName1=8000

UnitName2=8000

UnitName-n=8000

Low-priority Input queue (1 - 6 classes), from all driver instances to RTDS

[INLQUEUE]

UnitName1=20000

UnitName2=20000

UnitName-n=20000

Output Queues (change class and write commands), from RTDS to each single driver instance:

[OUTQUEUE]

UnitName1=20000

UnitName2=20000

UnitName-n=20000

2)

OnlyAccess]

mputersCount = ALL

It is not possible to perform any forcing on PMCs when you connect to this Cube Bridge Serve

DB.INI

This file (found in the RTDB sub-directory of the central plant, on the master and slave plant vers) is usually not edited manually: its contents are written by using RTDS Offline nfiguration in SIMATIC IT Management Console. But queue dimensions can be manually

rder to obtain a dimension that exceeds the limits foreseen by RTDS Offline nfiguration. This may be necessary when the number of points becomes very high. Theseeues are used by RTDS and drivers in order to communicate.

ctions and parameters:

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 256

Real Time Data Server

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 257

In this manner, the number of queue elements are defined. They must be defined on each plant in order to permit rapid RTDS switches.

Each queue element can contain the value of a read variable (input queue), or the value of a variable to be written (output queue), or the request to begin to read a variable (output queue). String variables use a number of elements equal to their length.

If RTDS has been activated on a client, it is possible to force reading of the locally copied database by setting the following new key:

[DBLOCAL]

UnitName = YES

UnitName is the name of the unit associated to RTDS that runs on the client pc or on the backup pc.

Note: The local copy of the database is done manually and can be performed if the client has been configured in order to manage the local copy of the plant.

5.6.9 USERBK.INI

This file contains the names of the computers on which RTDS is configured for hot backup.

Example of USERBK.INI file:

[BCKCONN]

ComputerNum=4

ListPriority=TRUE

Computer1=SERVER_1

Computer2=SERVER_2

Computer3=CLIENT_1

Computer4=CLIENT_2

In this example, there are two pairs of RTDS configured for hot backup.

(first pair: SERVER_1 - SERVER_2, second pair: CLIENT_1 – CLIENT_2).

The RTDS configured in stand-alone need not be written in the .ini file.

If set to TRUE, the ListPriority key permits the communication to RTDS without verifying the network registration of RTDS to SIMATIC IT Network Configuration Server. As a result, the traffic over the network is decreased. Therefore, the ListPriority key is significant also when there is no RTDS in hot backup (ComputerNum=0).

This configuration file must be edited in the directory ICUBE.CNF of each client and each server (master and slave).

It is also possible to balance the load of the ETHERNET clients toward two bridges configured for backup among each other, introducing an appropriate key in the file. In detail:

[CUBEBRIDGE]

Primary = computername1

Auxiliary = computername2

Real Time Data Server

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 258

Primary is the name of the computer where the Bridge of reference for the client is running. If the client cannot reach the Bridge of reference, it connects to the auxiliary Bridge. The client does not switch over once the connection has taken place, even if the primary Bridge becomes available.

The SIMATIC IT OPC Browser

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 259

6 The SIMATIC IT OPC Browser

The SIMATIC IT OPC Browser is a tool, that exploits the OPC Server List and the OPC browsing interface in order to get information, as the OPC Server ProgID and the OPC ItemIDs, useful to connect and get data from locally and remotely registered OPC Servers. In addition, this tool can be used to automatically configure the OPC Client driver to connect and get data from an OPC Server, provided that it supports the OPC browsing interface.

With the SIMATIC IT OPC Browser, you can:

• Browse for all the local OPC Servers: that is, OPC Servers (supporting or not the OPC Server List) present on the local computer. See How to use SIMATIC IT OPC Browser.

• Browse for remote OPC Servers compliant with the OPC Server List: that is, all the OPC Servers present on the local network that have been registered according to the OPC categories and can therefore be found by means of OPCEnum server (OPC Server List). See How to use SIMATIC IT OPC Browser.

• Connect to each one of the above mentioned OPC Servers (local and remote) that exposes the OPC browsing interface, and browse the OPC items to get information about the variables, to which the OPC Server has access. See How to use SIMATIC IT OPC Browser.

• Connect to a remote OPC Server that is not compliant with the OPC Server List, provided it has been registered locally. If this OPC Server exposes the OPC Browsing interface (it is browsable), its OPC items can also be accessed by the tool. See Connecting to a locally registered server on a remote workstation.

• Configure the OPC Client driver, to get data from every browsable OPC Server, by selecting from the OPC Server’s items, the single variable or group of variables to be accessed, and automatically inserting them in the Data Dictionary, with the suitable parameters. See Automatic configuration of OPC Client Database fields.

Important

Remember that the OPC Browser is not a Database Editor, but a tool to insert points (to be handled by the OPC Client driver), in the Data Dictionary. To modify a point inserted by means of the SIMATIC IT OPC Browser, you still have to use the Database Editor.

6.1 How to use SIMATIC IT OPC Browser

To use SIMATIC IT OPC Browser:

1. From SIMATIC IT Management Console, select command Tools > OPC Browser. The SIMATIC IT OPC Browser window appears.

2. To view the OPC Servers running on the local workstation, expand the My Computer icon from the tree list displayed in the left pane of the OPC Browser window. All OPC Servers present on your PC are displayed.

3. To view the OPC Servers running on any workstation connected to the network, expand the Network Neighborhood icon and then choose a workstation.

The SIMATIC IT OPC Browser

SIMATIC IT Services V4.4 SP2 – User Manual 260

4. If you want to browse for a server on a remote workstation, that cannot be found by the OPC Server List, you can try to connect to it by clicking the Connect Locally Registered Servers

icon.

5. Select one of the OPC Servers. The Server Information tab, in the right pane, shows some Registry information and the server name to be used in order to configure SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server User Field 1. . If you are not using the Automatic DB Configuration, you can copy and paste this value into the Database Editor.

6. Expand the icon in order to display the OPC server variable hierarchy. This hierarchy, depending on the server, can consist of one or more levels. Intermediate levels are called

Branches , while terminal levels are called Leaves . You can expand each intermediate level to browse for the leaves of the lower level.

7. To select a variable (item), expand all the Branches until you get the Leaf of interest and select it. The Item Information tab in the right pane of the OPC Browser window shows the Variable Name to be used in SIMATIC IT Real Time Data Server User Field 2. If you are not using the Automatic DB Configuration, you can copy and paste this value into the Database Editor. Depending on the OPC Server, some further details about the variable may be displayed (Description, Canonical Data Type, Array or Scalar, Array dimension, High EU, Low EU, Access Rights, Server Scan Rate).